Home

DR130/DR231/DR241 Hybrid Recorder(Stand

1. V LII a Ce FN e 9 e e ee 8 a E Hn TMM elie AC power supply model 338 4 30 207 _ 98 8 M i aR CS OO D eml Cer nn 2 N m N h GF Iso vooowa lll H ies Y LJ LJ i N DC power supply model 30 252 98 8 amp 4 E E C If not specified the tolerance is 396 However in cases of less than 10mm the tolerance is 0 3mm 14 20 IM DR231 01E 14 3 Dimensional Drawings DR231 Unit mm Rear Panel AC power supply model E Su eye PIES DC power supply model
2. IM DR231 01E 5 5 5 3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel Relevant Keys 001 01 AC 1Ph3W RNG 250 5A V1 002 VA1 SPAN 1250 1250W ro OS Cere ESC RECORD refer CO Cree INS DEL KEYLOGI Operating Procedure Using OQ and cuart ser enter 2 Press the RANGE key to enter RANGE menu select and or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure press the MODE ESC key This returns to the first item of the menu Note however that your new settings and selections are canceled selections Setting the Measuring Range and Recording Span Main menu item P1 P3 P13 4 001 01 AC 1Ph3W 001 01 AC 1Ph3W D Voy 001 01 AC 1Ph3W SKIP AC SCALE D 4 001 01 AC 1Ph3W ENTER 1Ph2W 1Ph3W 3Ph3W 2l 3Ph3W 3l 3Ph4W 4 RNG 250V 5A P1 D 250V 0 5A 250V 5A 25V 0 5A 25V 5A 4 RNG 250V 5A P1 ENTER SPAN 125 0 125 0W ENTER gt Span Limit 125 0 to 125 0W i SET configuration complete ESC Setting Linear Scaling Main menu item
3. ISSUE Alarm relay 22 Alarm relay 21 Alarm relay 20 Relay status of alarm output relay 13 Relay status of alarm output relay 12 Relay status of alarm output relay 11 Alarm relay No in units of 1 Slot No fixed to 1 Unit No fixed to 0 4 12 IM DR231 01E 4 8 Using the CLOCK Date amp Time Display Relevant Keys DISP MODE C RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT CO FEED INS DEL RANGE ALARM wy M FUNC 1 CHART SET ENTER mrunce2 Operating Procedure 1 Select the sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select CLK using the MODE key Sub display 1 and 2 005 0 8210V 006 0 0095V wCLK Dec 30 95 13 16 19 Clock Display The date and time can be displayed on sub display 2 According to the set time in 3 7 Setting the Date and Time see to page 3 19 the current date and time can be displayed The display shows the month day year and hour minute second in this sequence Aejdsig spo 1011u0Jg 34 Buas B IM DR231 01E 4 13 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span Relevant Keys 001 10 VOLT 2V RECORD ALARM SPAN 2 0000 2 0000V CHART SKIP VOLT TC RTD DI DELTA SCL KEYLOCK Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu using
4. Relay Status Display The status of relays can be displayed on sub display 1 and 2 4 gt On each display the status of maximum 30 relays can be monitored The display shows for relays which are currently not operated by internal switch alarm output relay and shows W for relays which are currently operated by internal switch alarm output relay IM DR231 01E Aejdsig spo 101100Jy 34 6umes B 4 7 Using the RELAY STATUS Display Relation between the Relay Status and Internal Switch If the relay status of the internal switches is being displayed an S will be displayed as the first character The next two characters show the number of the internal switch which corresponds to the first batch of the display and range from 01 to 51 There are 60 internal switches S01 Internal switch 21 Internal switch 20 Internal switch 12 Internal switch 11 Internal switch 10 Relay status of internal switch 3 Relay status of internal switch 2 Relay status of internal switch 1 I nternal switch 30 Internal switch no in units of 1 fixed to 1 Tens of internal switch no 0 to 5 Jnternal switch S Relation betw
5. 4 001 01 4 C O SET OK 1 For Model DR130 indicated as 001 01 001 01 PARTIAL ON RATE 50 _0 0000V gt Rate Limit 1 99 4 RATE 50 _0 0000V gt Boundary Limit 1 9999 1 9999V 4 ET K ENTER ESC ENTER ENTER ESC ZONE _ _0 150 mm 2 For Model DR130 indicated as gt Left limit 0 145 mm 3 For Model DR130 indicated as gt Right limit 5 150 mm IM DR231 01E 6 3 Setting Recording Zones and Partially Expanded Recording Explanation Setting Recording Zones ZONE This setting specifies the recording zones for each channel The set left and right position of the zone correspond to the left and right span set at the SPAN menu recording span The left value of the ZONE menu corresponds to the value of the left position of the zone whereas the right value of the ZONE menu corresponds to the value of the right position of the zone A zone can be set in 1 mm steps and must be within the range of dot printed recording The configurable ranges of the left and right stops of a zone and their defaults are as follows Left Stop Default Right Stop Default DR130 0 to 145 mm 0 mm 5 to 150 mm 150 mm DR231 241 0 to 245 mm 0 mm 5 to 250 mm 250 mm The right stop must be set to be at least 5
6. 1 amp 2 Removed IM DR231 01E 3 3 pue uonejeisu 3 2 How to Install AC power supply model 438 1 30 207 L 988 a n 0 8 a DC power supply model 30 252 _ 98 8 jg Be od C Rack Mounting Dimensions AC power supply model 482 611 _ Panel face 113 11 3 30 C Eee men 25 I EIE 1 Su N 9 0 FE x t 1 2 1 amp 2 Removed DC power supply model Panel face 30 7 1 amp 2 Removed 3 4 IM DR231 01E 3 2 How to Install DR241 Panel mounting Use steel plates 3 mm thick or more for panel mounting The external and panel cutting dimensions for the DR241 are shown below The panel cutting dimensions include the cutting interval for multiple mounting on the same panel The DR241 weighs about 16 kg so a shelf should be provided to support the DR241 behind the panel Insert the instrument from the front face of the panel Insert the blocks of the mounting brackets as accessories into the rectangular holes after removi
7. ACT EDGE S DA TA_WR D ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR ENTER DATA WR WR TRIG RD TRIG LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD TRG1 D 4 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 ENTER LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE MMN START D ACT EDGE REPORT START ENTER START STOP ACT LEVL RECORD D 4 ACT LEVL RECORD ENTER To the next page From the following page IM DR231 01E 9 7 suornoung 194 0 pue uonoyAuoe 3 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event MATCH TIME actions The MATH menu is displayed only with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 and models with the M1 option The MEMRY and FLOPY menus are displayed only with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 The REPORT menu is displayed only with M3 option From the previous page To the previous page EVT MATCH TIME 1 O n EVT MATCH TIME 1 ENTER 123 ACT EDGE ALARM ACK D ACT EDGE ALARM ACK ENTER I ACT EDGE ALARM RST ENTER OQ LI ACT EDGE TIMER RST ENTER L ACT EDGE RECORD OFF D i ACT EDGE RECORD OFF ENTER OFF ON Te cr coe NN PR ENTER I ACT EDGE DIGITAL PR ENTER C opidi PR 01 D ACT EDGE MSG 01 ENTER 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MMM DISP 01 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01
8. ETT aet nd amma end f eM end YT QOD x 91 s z peeds eyg 100 HANNON OEE 0 iun v 994 OOD foooocoooc 1nojund jo Jouueu2S 1 2 ETa SZ 8T TH R 1 z yew wely jo oN jauueYD 9 Bulpiooe1 noud jo 01 9nle 1895 1nojuud amp tht oun erep Bundes s z lt nojuud jeba K Jo ujod eouoJ9jeH IM DR231 01E 2 6 2 3 Recording Functions Recording Example for DR231 DR241 The numbers in parentheses refer to reference pages Functions 8 2 yes Jo uonisod
9. eV Ube cooorrkzazroooooa ccccooocoo JM je PAM IH PE Pk td 4 ad td GLEE ie ae ge ge ge E E A AEAEE ETEESI aE mi i al a i L 1 lt 1epeeH qnojuud ge Bues gosar stent s z lt lt 7 100 911 paeds yeyo 00 2141 00 23Ii 00 711 900 011 500 12 600 212 5800 312 60 512 DTO MID2 z t t0 2IAd z zta ara 2 0 2 z amp 10 2Id E eto yin LTID0 uI eto ara 610 8uin ocQ HIn 1 4 0 21 4 Brea 0 2143 zres v O0 23l14 L S 5Z 214 T 9 9Z0 uIm a 9 0 u1Im 820 41 s z a e6z0 uim L z os o auim ynoquud i 2 7 IM DR231 01E 2 3 Recording Functions Recording Format You can modify the recording format of measurement values according to your own preferences The following selections are available Items common for Analog Trend and Logging mode Printing Channel No or Tag When printing measurement values the corresponding channel number or a preset tag can be recorded with it This selection will also affect the display the same way The number of characters of a tag which will be printed out can be selected too Items for Analog Trend Mode Printing Starting Stopping Time of Recording You can select whether to print the time of starting stopp
10. Main menu SET L__ Lower menu CHART2 ENTER gt SECOND SPEED 100mm H ENTER gt Chart Speed Max 1500mm H 4 TIMER MODE RELATIVE ENTER 4 TIME 00 01 00 ENTER gt Set Day amp Time DD HH MM 00 C O ESC TIMER MODE ABSOLUTE ENTER 4 TIME 1h ENTER 1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 6min 10min 12min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h 24h 4 REF TIME 00 00 ENTER i GET OK ESC 6 4 IM DR231 01E 6 2 Setting the Chart Speed Chart Speed 1 CHART This setting specifies the chart speed of ordinary trend recordings The setting ranges from 1 to 1500mm h in 1 mm steps The default setting is 100mm h Depending on the chart speed the items channel number TAG digital printout and alarm scale message may not be included in your printout See the table below for details Chart speed 1 to 9mm h Channel No TAG Record enabled Digital print out Record disabled Alarm scale message Record enabled 10 to 1500mm h Record enabled Record enabled Record enabled Chart Speed 2 CHART2 This setting consists of a chart speed and recording interval Depending on the Event Action function refer to 9 1 on page 9 1 the chart speed and recording interval will change into chart speed 2 and its corresponding interval Chart speed 2 setting This setting is the same as for chart speed 1 and its default setting is 100mm h Recording interval
11. Recond SET TAG Gace GO Cre INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter TE CHART2 ZONE PARTIAL TAG DIGITAL PR MANT aim set 2 Operating Procedure Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu Select set using the keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET 1 Lower menu TAG ENTER 001 01 TAG D AGB c esM Select Channel No 4 001 01 TAG D STAG en xam O O gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 TAG 12345678901 ENTER gt TAG 1234567890123456 I amp 0123456789 ABC KLT 4 GET OK ESC DIGITAL PR ENTER gt 001 01 DIGITAL PR ON D gt ON 001 RRR HEH gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 DIGITAL PR ON D gt ON 001 EEEEENENE OV gt Select Channel No In case SINGLE is set as log interval at 4 the RECORD setting in the SET UP mode 001 01 DIGITAL PR ON SET OK ESC gt ON W 00 MENNENE HEH OFF ON In case MULTIPLE is set as log interval at the RECORD setting in the SET UP mode DIGITAL PR TIMER No 1 ENTER 123456
12. s z 8 2 eed 10 jo peeds ey Buipu3 1 yew Nx g ta ud oso mo TH E E LET H bie TH on te ow 8 2 i 1 yew wey N S0 tSt IH O 0 4 ma 90 81 IH StO Dtda a a bi 4 Lol 1 tt a dog dee p doi enjeA pojeo i 80 91 TH oso H n 60 91 TH g10 pda Mrs ooo 96 Wet ado Oti v inel 14 Buip402281 s z puai L Jo Be 10 on dd e ANNNK SSS ogg 44d ROKK POYO ONNI a oe aE LD LD U UO nmnennnWNNNNN 91 1nojuud jenueui jo on jouueYyD eL z wo wl 1nojuud jenuew jo i Bundeis 0019t OE ibiltrttttti badairtgend d PEMA K ODE DOTAN a ODOR OD TH Nad ONI ON Nata tte
13. ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER To the previous page From the following page IM DR231 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of Event MFUNC KEY actions The MATH menu is displayed only with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 and models with the M1 option The MEMRY and FLOPY menus are displayed only with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 The REPORT menu is displayed only with M3 option From the previous page To the previous page EVT MFUNC KEY 1 O n EVT MFUNC 1 ENTER 12 ACT EDGE ALARM ACK ACT EDGE ALARM ACK ENTER C O I ACT EDGE ALARM RST ENTER I ACT EDGE TIMER RST ENTER ACT EDGE RECORD OFF D ACT EDGE RECORD OFF ENTER OFF ON I ACT EDGE MANUAL PR ENTER OQ ACT EDGE DIGITAL PR ENTER OQ ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 D i Lo ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 ENTER 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MM DISP 01 D ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 ENTER 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START D lt nno ems ACT EDGE FLAG F01 D lt ACT EDGE FLAG F ENTER F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16
14. sss 14 4 Operation p tiel 4st e eee er eie ee ye IP IRAE 1 2to 1 4 Operation varese iieii reesen rere saaa EEA See mode Optional modules ers ar A E 4 alarmmodule eee te en sei ede a 2 19 communication interface modules sss 2 19 DUI DO mod le erre REP ERES ERES 2 19 P Parity sciens ese ee e 3 12 14 16 14 17 Partially expanded display sss See Display Parts replacement zie Ia e E P ORE CURE RES 13 1 PASS WOU x 9 15 2 18 Periodic maintenance oe ees b eye eei Lo evt 13 1 OPES See printing pitch dic pU 3 6 Position marks when installing the chart and ribbon cassette 3 7 Power Connector eere Pere I eroe 1 2 1 3 3 21 connector DC eer aeiaai 1 2 1 3 3 23 Cable CODE saves itte 3 3 1 3 21 switch terminals uo oci 1 2 to 1 4 3 22 3 23 Power supply voltage s sess 3 3 16 to 3 24 Pr ttigger 4 es eee ele Referer ms 11 5 Printing ENE 2 8 10 5 Printout printing Additional aise RR 2 13 Priority for recording colors eene 2 11 Protective grounding sese See grounding Q R Rack mount kit rack mounting eere RATE for partially expanded recording Recording colors ioseph een See also priority
15. an EA TTTS Q mekeme AC power supply model 438 j 90 207 2 988 D ae 0 N 0 L wo N DC power supply model 30 252 988 pe dts D a i 9 9 is T A Es o 5 o If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10mm the tolerance is 0 3mm 14 21 IM DR231 01E 14 3 Dimensional Drawings DR241 Number of input channels 30 Unit mm 424 Rear Panel MENTI A rei e S IT CHESTNUT rere e gles om 444 40 203 288 If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10mm the tolerance is 0 3mm 14 22 IM D
16. ENTER ESC 10 12 IM DR231 01E 10 5 Setting Burn out Reference Junction Compensation Setting Burn out BURN OUT Set the dot printing position when burn out occurs for each channel OFF the burn out function is not actuated DOWN a dot is printed at the end of chart width on the minimum value setting side of the recording span UP Dot is printed at the end of chart width on the maximum value setting side of the recording span The default setting is OFF Setting Reference Junction Compensation RJC Set either the internal or the external compensation for each channel INT internal compensation is performed EXT external compensation is performed For external compensation set the voltage to be compensated Voltage to be externally compensated set in the range of 20000 to 20000 mV The default setting is INT Note n order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 24 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 24 IM DR231 01E 10 13 dN Las sbumes oiseg 10 6 Setting Recording Colors m SETUP COLOR GO Ge gt Select Setting Parameter CHART iD INTG FILTER RELAY BURN OUT RJC COLORT cuart ser e
17. ao I ACT EDGE DIGITAL PR ENTER gt ao 01 i ACT EDGE MSG 01 am 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11121314151617 181920 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 D 4 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 ENTER C O 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START H ACT EDGE MATH START ENTER gt START STOP CLEAR RESET F terenoea ro D 4 cx ACT EDGE FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR D 4 pe ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA WR ENTER DATA WR WR TRIG RD LD TRG1LD TRG2LD TRG3 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 DO 4 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 ENTER LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE REPORT START D 4 ACT EDGE REPORT START ENTER START STOP ACT LEVL RECORD D 4 ies ACT LEVL RECORD ENTER gt LI ACT LEVL SPEED CHG TREND GO01 D 4 ACT LEVL GR TREND G01 ENTER G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 ENTER ACT LEVL FLAG F01 D 4 ACT LEVL FLAG F01 ENTER F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 4 ACT LEVL REPORT gt To the next page From the following page IM DR231 01E 9 5 suonoung 194 0 pue uonounJ uonoyAue 3 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions IP C Selection of event TIMER actions The MATH me
18. Power factor PFi i 1 2 3 13 0 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 Phase PHi i 1 2 3 13 0 89 0 to 89 0 deg 89 0 to 89 0 deg 89 0 to 89 0 deg 89 0 to 89 0 deg Frequency FREQ 41 00 to 69 00 Hz 41 00 to 69 00 Hz 41 00 to 69 00 Hz 41 00 to 69 00 Hz IM DR231 01E 14 5 suoneoyi2ods 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S3 Output Data Items of Each Wiring Method Output Data Item Single phase Single phase Three phase Three phase Three phase Two wire Three wire Three wire Three wire Four wire Dual voltage Triple voltage Dual current Triple current Effective voltage V V1 V1 V3 V1 V3 V1 V2 V3 V1 V2 V3 V13 V1 V3 2 V13 1 3 2 V13 1 3 2 V0 1 2 3 3 VO V14V2 V3 3 Effective current I I1 I1 I3 I1 I3 I1 I2 I3 I1 12 I3 113 11 13 2 113 11 13 2 113 11 13 2 10 11 12 13 3 10 11 12 13 3 Active power W P1 P1 P3 P1 P3 P1 P2 P3 P1 P2 P3 P13 P1 P3 P13 P1 P3 P13 P1 P3 PO P1 I2 P3 Apparent power VA VAI VAI VA3 VAI VA3 VAI VA2 VA3 VAI VA2 VA3 13 VA1 VA3 VA13 VAI VA3 VA13 VAI VA3 VA1 VA2 VA3 Reactive power Var Varl Varl Var3 Varl Var3 Varl Var2 Var3 Varl Var2 Var3 13 Varl Var3 Varl3 Varl Var3 Varl3 Varl VA3 0 Varl Var2 Var3 Frequency FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ Power fact
19. keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear ise LES ESC Gene Jern C INS DEL Z ser LEwrER mrunc a although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting SET Main menu um MEMORY ENTER MEMORY COPY ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 COPY MODE TO FDD ENTER FDD FROM FDD 4 COPY TYPE DATA ENTER DATA PANEL 4 COPY FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC DDD COPY CONVERT OFF ENTER O O OFF ON 4 Copying O 4 COPY OK End of copy ESC COPY TYPE PANEL ENTER DATA PANEL 4 COPY FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC DDD 4 Copying 4 COPY OK End of copy ESC COPY MODE FROM FDD ENTER TO FDD FROM FDD 4 COPY TYPE DATA ENTER DATA PANEL 4 COPY FILE AAA ENTER sd BBB CCC DDD Copying 4 COPY OK End of copy ESC J 11 16 IM DR231 01E 11 5 Copying a Data File Explanation Measured computed set up data is copied from the internal RAM disk to a floppy or vice versa Types of files that can be copied COPY TYPE DATA copies measured computed data PANEL copies setup data Saving measur
20. Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure ESC GO C DEL INS RANGE ALARM ee cHART ser 2 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O Q keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key The main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be saved when you reach the final display of that setting SETUP E 3 CSKA Lower menu TEMP ENTER TEMP C ENTER CF TEMP SET ESC IM DR231 01E 10 25 dN Las sbumes oiseg 10 11 Selecting the temperature unit from C or F option Selecting the temperature unit TEMP The temperature unit can be selected from the following C which is the initial value or F Note n the User s manual all functions and operations are explained using the C unit When using the F unit replace the C unit with the F unit For the measurement range measurement accuracy and maximum resolution in case of using the F range refer to the following table as a replacement of the one on page 14 2 Measurement range Refer to the following table Measureme
21. Explanation Set up data for the SET mode or SETUP mode is read from the internal RAM disk or a floppy disk Loading methods LOAD MODE in SET mode The following two methods are available DIRECT Setup data is loaded immediately after setting has been completed TRIG I TRIG 2 TRIG 3 The event action function is used to load set up data when an event takes place This function is useful if you want to record data when an event takes place with different recording spans One event must be set for the LD_TRG1 LD TRG2 and TRG3 actions during event action function setting For a detailed description of the event action function refer to 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions page 9 1 Confirming the set up data To confirm the read set up data for the SETUP mode specify SETUP STORE in the same way as the SETUP mode setting Note f set up data saved on another instrument DR series recorder is loaded and does not match this instrument s configuration settings which do not comply with the configuration cannot be made No file reading is possible during computations During reading GP IB RS 232 C RS 422 A RS 485 communication remains inactive IM DR231 01E 11 15 ejeg dn jegs pue payndwog peanseejy Buipeeg Dui es 11 5 Copying a Data File SET MEMORY gt Select Setting Parameter SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TRT Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the
22. LIMIT Overflow data is treated as the next data for computation Measurement channels to which linear scaling is applied Specified scaling upper lower limit Measurement channels to which no linear scaling is applied Upper lower limit of the measuring range Computation channels Specified LEFT RIGHT value Processing of the results of TLOG PSUM computation OVER If the result of a separate calculation of TLOG PSUM XXXX exceeds 99999990 the DR recorder goes into an overflow ROTATE If the result of a separate calculation of TLOG PSUM XXXX exceeds 99999999 the DR recorder resets the value subsequent to 99999999 to 0 and continues computing The process is effective only when a pulse input module is installed uoneinduio IepoiN LW 94 ejqereA v IM DR231 01E 12 13 13 1 Periodic Maintenance and Recommended Parts Replacement Period Periodic maintenance Check the recorder s operation periodically to keep it in good operating condition Especially check the following items and replace consumable parts as needed Do not use a lubricant for periodic maintenance Are display and recording functioning properly Are there blurred or broken sections of the recording or printout characters When replacing the ribbon cassette refer to Section 3 3 Chart and Ribbon Cassette Installation s the chart paper feeding properly When replacing the ribbon cassette see Section 3 3
23. The influence of the external magnetic field the measuring instrument 400A m or less IM DR231 01E 3 31 pue uonejeisu 3 8 Countering Noise Step 2 Change the position of the noise source A Leakage magnetic flux of transformer NON E o LM _ dzstrong Move the instrument a location where the influence from magnetic flux is weak B Sparks strong electromagnetic radiation weak electrogmagnetic radiation Move the instrument to a location where the influence from electro magnetic radiation is weak Grounding a decrease of impedance The grounding method is the point of common mode noise suppression Equipment under measurement EUM The instrument lt OR e Toge The difference in the potential to the ground between EUM and the instrument may cause a ground current resulting in noise Equalize the potentials to the ground so that the common mode noise becomes zero One point grounding Potential equalization EUM The instrument EUM The instrument qe ET if grounding is difficult The basic means to obtain stable measurement is to set the circuit potential with proper grounding Thus potential equalization is the means to be adopted only when grounding is
24. The default setting is as shown in the operating procedure diagram on pages 10 20 and 10 21 The last operation menu PANEL ALL ITEM is the menu that globally set all menus However the selection of INIT selects the default setting Note n order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 24 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 24 IM DR231 01E 10 23 dN Las sbumes oiseg 10 10 Selecting Display Update Interval Registering SET UP Menu and Terminating SET UP Menu aS SETUP DISPLAY a OD C INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART T COLOR LOCK FUNC PARM SET PARM DISPLAY A ser Enter 2 EHI uinum Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu
25. 080 Invalid character strings for group setting Set character strings correctly 081 Invalid channel in character string for group Set channel correctly setting 083 Partial compaction set to a channel where Change ranges SKIP was set 084 Partial compaction set to a channel in Change ranges which ranges cannot be partially compacted 085 Partial compaction out of range in a channel Set correct partial compaction range with continuous ranges 086 The left and right zones have the same values Change zone set values 087 The left zone is wider than the right zone Change zone set values 088 The left and right zones are less than 5 mm Change zone set values apart wide 089 Copy channel setting error Sets the correct channel 090 Attempted to copy a message with the same Change copy source or destination source and destination number 091 Illegal protocol for logic setting Set correct protocol eoueuojuire J pue Bunooys a qnolL IM DR231 01E 13 5 13 4 Error Codes 100 No equation option Not possible to make any computation settings 101 Invalid code in the equation Set the equation correctly 102 Incorrect number of in the equation Set the correct number of 103 Syntax error Set the equation correctly 104 Illegal character s or code s is used before Set the equation correctly or after an operator 105 The right and left spans ar
26. ALL SKIP will be displayed When the main display is set to AUTO mode then this will be displayed on the main display regardless of the settings of sub display 1 and 2 When sub display 1 is set to AUTO mode and the main display is set to any other mode than AUTO then this will be displayed on sub display 1 regardless the setting of sub display 2 When sub display 2 is set to AUTO mode and the main display is set to any other mode than AUTO and sub display 1 to any other mode than AUTO then this will be displayed on sub display 2 When on any of the main sub displayl or sub display 2 ALL SKIP appears other displays which may have been set to AUTO will turn blank Only the selected display mode on sub display 1 and the status display will appear IM DR231 01E 4 3 4 2 Using the MANUAL Display Relevant Keys DISP MODE C RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT 0 FEED INS DEL RANGE ALARM ww M FUNC 1 CHART SET enter mrunc2 MANUAL Display for the Main Display 1 Select the main display using the DISP key 2 Select MAN using the MODE key Sub display 1 002 0 0034V 003 0 0920V AMAN 3 Select the required channel using the S keys Main display 001 0 0057V MANUAL Display for Sub display 1 1 Select sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select
27. Chart cassette presser Lever of chart pressure plate 1 Chart cassette 4 Open upward the chart pressure plate 2 by simultaneously pushing the right and left latch release buttons of the chart pressure plate 2 Sprocket Platen Chart pressure plate 2 Latch release button of chart pressure plate 2 3 6 IM DR231 01E 3 3 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette Loading the Chart Paper 5 Place the chart paper in the chart storage housing and move the paper to the left Position the chart so that its round perforations are on the left and the recording surface faces upward when the chart paper is wound around the platen Chart paper 2 Platen Chart pressure plate 2 Chart storage housing Fold line of chart paper Sprocket pue uonejeisu 2 Right and left position mark Guide pin 7 Align the right and left chart paper perforations Set the chart paper so that the right and left marks of the sprockets and the fold line are aligned 8 Close the chart pressure plate 1 until it latches Confirm that the horizontal lines of the chart paper are parallel with the horizontal line of the chart pressure plate 1 If they are not parallel open the chart pressure plate 1 and align the right and left perforations again 9 Close the chart pressure plate 2 Press lightly on chart pressure plate 2 until it latches securely 10 Fitting the guide pin of the chart cassette in the main unit guide g
28. C O FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY FORMAT ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 FORMAT MODE 1 44MB ENTER 1 2MB 720KB 1 44MB VOLUMEN ENTER FORMAT YES ENTER NO YES 4 Formatting i FORMAT OK Ena ESC Formatting a floppy disk in the SETUP mode A floppy disk can be formatted in the same way as in the SET mode Select FLOPPY from the SETUP menu Main menu SETUP rure e CO FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY FORMAT ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 99 3 5 FORMAT MODE 1 44MB ENTER 1 2 720 1 44 4 a 9 VOLUME DARWIN ENTER 2s 4 ae FORMAT YES ENTER YES 5 E imet 28 FORMAT OK End ESC IM DR231 01E 11 25 11 10 Formatting a Floppy Disk Explanation A floppy disk is formatted All the data on the floppy disk will be deleted Thus copy necessary data to another media before carrying out formatting Format mode FORMAT MODE Select the format mode from the following 2HD 1 44 MB 1 2 MB 2DD 720 KB Volume name Give the volume name using no more than 11 standard width characters Beginning the volume name with a space is not allowed If this happens an error will occur During initializations GP IB RS 232 C RS 422 A RS 485 communication remains inactive 11 26 IM DR231 01E 12 1 Overview of the Computation Function Type Operator Example Description Addition 001 002 Obtai
29. Flag for M1 option Group reset for M1 option Products with style number S5 and S6 are not sold IM DR231 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument In case the wrong instrument or accessories have been delivered or if some accessories are not present or if they seem abnormal contact the dealer from which you purchased them Futhermore please contact a Yokogawa representative to order any of parts as follows Main Unit DR130 DR231 DR241 Check that the model and suffix code given on the name plate are according to your order Model and Suffix Codes Model Suffix Code Description DRI130 Hybrid recorder portable model DR231 Hybrid recorder desktop model DR241 Hybrid recorder panel mounted model Memory No memory M 3 5inch floppy disk drive Software edis Without data acquisition software ES With data acquisition software Input Channel 30ch for DR231 DR241 only Input Type Pass Universal input screw terminal Universal input clamp terminal DCV TC DI input screw terminal des DCV TC DI input clamp terminal Power Supply zz 100 240VAC 12 28VDC for DR241 only Power Cord Dias 3 pin inlet w UL CSA cable Part No A1006WD Penis 3 pin inlet w VDE cable Part No A1009WD Raus 3 pin inlet w SAA cable Part No A1024WD Soe 3 pin inle
30. M ain menu Lower menu ALM BUF CLEAR ENTER Op erating status O C MSG BUF CLEAR ENTER PNE MODULE INF ENTER INF SYSTEM ENTER SYSTEM REAL O C For GP IB interface COMM INF ENTER MODULE GP IB ENTER gt ADDR 01 Co MODULE RS 232C ENTER ai gt BIT RATE 19200 LENGTH 8BIT PARITY NONE gt STOP 1BIT HANDSHAKE OFF OFF RAM INIT ENTER gt RAM INIT NO ENTER ae B C RAM INIT YES 4 RAM INITIALIZING After about 10 seconds Note The displayed information varies depending on the settings given in Section 10 8 Setting FUNC FUNC3 Menu The flow of operation shown above is the one given when the recorder is in the default state 9 16 IM DR231 01E 9 4 Clearing Alarm Message Buffers and Displaying and Initializing Module Communications Information Any of the following functions are executed and displayed by pressing the ENTER key the last key of the lower menu After that the recorder returns to the operation mode Clearing the alarm buffer ALM BUF CLEAR Cancels all information in the alarm buffer see page 6 11 Clearing the message buffer MSG BUF CLEAR Cancels all information in the message buffer see page 7 3 Displaying information set in the modules MODULE INF Displays the information in the module installed in the slot SYSTEM Displays
31. MANUAL PR ENTER 001 01 PR ON D ONMOO MENNENENENENENHHE HEH Select Channel No 4 001 01 MANUAL PR ON D gt ON 001 RRR REE HEH Select Channel No 4 001 01 MANUAL PR ON ENTER ONB HEB OFF ON 4 GET OK ESC 6 8 IM DR231 01E 6 4 Setting Tag Digital Printout and Manual Printout Explanation Tag Setting A tag of up to 16 characters can be assigned to each channel If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A30 The characters numbers for the tag can be selected by cursor from the displayed row on sub display 1 For details on the number of characters which will be printed refer to 10 2 on page 10 4 For details on the number of characters which will be displayed refer to 4 1 on page 4 2 To select whether the tag or channel number are displayed printed refer to 10 2 on page 10 4 The default settings are all spaces For details concerning entering characters numbers refer to page 6 15 Digital Printout Setting DIGITAL PR This setting can be selected for each channel from the following This setting applies to the digital print of the analog mode and logging mode The default setting is ON OFF Digital printout will not be carried out for this channel ON Digital printout will be c
32. New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SETUP Lower menu PRN ADJ ENTER PRINTER HYS 2 ENTER gt Hys Limit 50 50 4 PRINTER ZERO __ 326 ENTER gt Zero Limit 1 500 C O PRINTER FULL 2506 ENTER gt Full Limit 2400 2600 4 PRINTER SET ESC j SCAN INTVL ENTER gt SCAN INTERVAL 2 sec ENTER 23456 10 12 15 20 30 60 4 SCAN INTVL SET ESC For the DR130 indicated as Full Limit 1400 1600 IM DR231 01E 10 1 dN Las sbumes oiseg 10 1 Selecting Adjustment of Dot Printing Position or Scan Interval Explanation In the PRN ADJ menu three lines are dot printed according to the left and right movements of the carriage Adjustment of Dot printing Shift HYS Dots are printed in a line along the length of the chart almost in the middle following the right and left movements of the carriage If these dots shift either to the left or the right make a straight line by adjusting the HYS setting The setting range is 50 to 50 The set value 1 corresponds to about 0 1 mm of the dot printing position Adjustment of Zero Position ZERO If a line composed of printed dots shifts from the scale line at the left end of the chart have the line of dots just overlap the scale end line by adjusting the ZERO setting The setting range is 1
33. Operating Procedure Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu Select set using the keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu sET 1 Lower menu i ALARM PR ENTER 9 001 01 1 ALARM PR ON2 D gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 1 ALARM PR ON2 D gt Select Channel No J 001 01 1 ALARM PR ON2 1234 4 001 01 1 ALARM PR ON2 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 In case ofOFF MSG ON ALARM OFF ENTER OFF 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 18 14 15 16 1718 19 20 4 SET OK ESC 6 10 IM DR231 01E 6 5 Setting the Alarm Printout Explanation Selecting the Alarm Items Although up to four alarm headings can be set per channel this setting specifies the number of the heading which will be printed The default setting is 1 If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive alarm items can also be set for computation channels A01 to A30 The setting can be selected from 1 2 3 or 4 All four headings can be assigned to one single channel For details on alarm settings refer to 8 1 page 8 1 Selecting the Alarm Printout ALARM PR This setting can be selected from the following The default setting is ON2 OFF
34. Relay contacts in case of de energizing When power is OFF When Power is ON When Power is ON and no alarm has and an alarm has A Re pe n NC NO C NC NO C NC AND OR Setting When a group of alarms share the same internal switch or alarm output relay you can select how the internal switches alarm output relays will be operated AND will be operated when all alarms are occurring OR will be operated when at least one alarm is occurring Alarm occurrence Channel 1 Alarm status Alarm occurrence Channel 2 Operation Alarm output AND relay status OR Operation HOLD NON HOLD Setting You can select whether to hold the operating status of operated internal switches or alarm output relays This setting applies to both the internal switches and the alarm output relays Alarm status Alarm release Alarm release Operation of Internal switch Wee __ alarm output Alarm reset tery Refer to page 2 16 Reflashing Alarm Setting When several alarms share the same alarm output relay you can select this setting which results in a short de operation of the relay when a second alarm occurs Alarm occurrence Channel 1 Alarm status Channel 2 Alarm occurrence Channel 3 ENT Reflash ON Working Working Working ee et ee Alarm output relay Approx 200ms Approx 200ms Reflash OFF p seing IM DR231 01E 2 15
35. SETUP 7 1 OQ Lower menu DISPLAY ENTER AUTO INTERVAL 2 ENTER gt 2345 4 al AUTO INTVL SET ESC END ENTER SETUP ABORT ESC ENTER SET UP end Selection of Display Update Period DISPLAY Select the display update interval when the operation display mode in the display is AUTO Select 2 3 4 or 5 seconds The default setting is 2 seconds Registration Abortion of Setting Selection Details and Termination of SET UP menu END In order to make the details set selected in the SET UP menu effective a registering operation is necessary In contrast the status can also be brought to that before setting selection abort without registration Terminate the SET UP menu after registering or aborting operation ABORT Registration is aborted and the SET UP menu is terminated STORE After registration the SET UP menu is terminated The default setting is ABORT Select the END menu then press the ENTER key The operation display mode is reached about 10 seconds after pressing the ENTER key 10 24 IM DR231 01E 10 11 Selecting the temperature unit from C or F option Relevant Keys SETUP TEMP RECORD gt Select Setting Parameter ALARM CHART iR LOCK FUNC PARM SET PARM DISPLAY TEMPT Operating Procedure Main menu
36. This instrument uses a feedback pulse width modulation type A D converter and has the following features Linearity and stability are good because of the feedback effect Integration type A D converter ensures excellent noise suppression If the integration time is equal to the noise period the positive and negative sides of the shaded part in the figure below cancel each other out and thus the average value becomes zero IM DR231 01E 3 29 3 8 Countering Noise Anti Noise Measures Balance each other Input voltage instantaneous value MY DC voltage average value integration time Normally an integration time of 20ms 50Hz 16 7ms 60Hz is selected depending on the commercial power supply frequencies A 100 ms integration mode is added to the instrument to achieve superior noise rejection However when using the 100ms setting the smallest measurement interval is longer than in case of the 20ms or 16 7ms setting The integration effect enables the PWM A D converter to perform the following two functions Rejection of frequency determined by the reciprocal of the integration time and frequencies which are whole multiples of that frequency First order lag filter provided with cut off frequency proportional to the reciprocal of the integration time The following table compares the integration times of 16 7ms 20ms and 100ms Integration time Rejection frequency Cut off frequency
37. suomnoung 194 0 pue uonoyAuoe 3 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event REMOTE actions The REMOTE menu is displayed only with R1 option The MATH menu is displayed only with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 and models with the M1 option The MEMRY and FLOPY menus are displayed only with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 The REPORT menu is displayed only with M3 option From the previous page EVT REMOTE 1 4 EVT REMOTE 1 1234567891011 12 r ACT EDGE ALARM ACK r ACT EDGE ALARM ACT EDGE ALARM RST ACT EDGE TIMER RST L ACT EDGE RECORD OFF ACT EDGE RECORD OFF OFF ON ACT EDGE MANUAL PR avo ACT EDGE DIGITAL PR ao m ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 4 ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1112131415 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 4 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 m ACT EDGE MATH START 4 ACT EDGE MATH START CY START STOP CLEAR RESET ACT EDGE FLAG F01 4 Ao ACT EDGE FLAG FO1 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDG E MEMRY DATA_WR ayo ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR DATA_WR WR_TRIG RD_TRIG LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 roroa E FLOPY LD_TRG1 4 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE REPORT START 4 ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP L AcC
38. 1 TIME 00 01 00 ENTER C O Explanation 1 SET OK ESC 1 TIMER MODE ABSOLUTE ENTER 4 1 TIME 1h ENTER gt Set DD HH MM 00 1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 6min 10min 12min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h 24h 1 REF TIME 00 00 4 SET OK ESC Recording Mode SYSTEM The following types of recording mode can be selected The default is TREND LOGGING LOGGING MODE measurement values will be printed out as digital values TREND ANALOG TREND MODE measurement values will be recorded as analog trends trend recording and printed out as digital values Selecting the recording interval This setting can only be done for the TREND mode and its default setting is AUTO FIX recording takes place at intervals equal to the measurement period scan interval intervals AUTO recording takes place at intervals automatically decided by measurement interval and chart speed Engineering Unit UNIT An engineering unit of up to six characters can be assigned to each channel The default setting is all spaces The characters numbers can be selected by cursor from the displayed row on sub display 1 An engineering unit can only be assigned to channels to which linear scaling is applied For details concerning entering characters numbers refer to page 6 15 If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy dis
39. 10 12 Working with the Report Function The DR recorder calculates and processes an hour s day s or month s worth of measurement or computation data into instantaneous values averages and or sums to print the results in a predetermined format at a preset time The results can be delivered using the communication function or printed on a recording chart For more information on output using the communication function see the separate DR130 DR231 DR232 DR241 DR242 Communication Interface User s Manual IM DR231 11E You select from the choices in the FUNC menu which opens when you press the FUNC key to start stop report making or print reports You can also start stop report making using the event action functions Reports come in the following three types Type Intervals Between Making Reports Data Item for Computing Hourly report Every hour 1 00 2 00 23 00 24 00 An hour s average maximum and minimum An hour s sum and cumulative sum Instantaneous value at the time of making the report Daily report Every other day preset time A day s average maximum and minimum A day s sum and cumulative sum Instantaneous value at the time of making the report Monthly report Every other month preset time A month s average maximum and minimum A month s sum and cumulative sum Instantaneous value at the time of making the report On Off of Hourly Daily and Monthly Report Making Configure the on s and off s of hourly daily
40. Chart and Ribbon Cassette Installation Is there enough chart paper left The remaining chart paper length is printed in the left margin of the chart at 15 cm intervals DR130 or 20 cm intervals DR231 241 When replacing the chart paper see Section 3 3 Chart and Ribbon Cassette Installation If problems develop with the recorder see Section 13 3 Troubleshooting Recommended parts replacement period It is necessary that recorder parts be replaced periodically for use of the recorder over an extended period of time The table below shows the recommended parts replacement periods for specific parts that wear out These replacement periods indicate where the recorders have been used under normal operating conditions When replacing parts refer to these replacement periods taking the actual operating conditions into consideration When replacing parts other than the chart paper ribbon cassette or fuse please contact your nearest Sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual Part Part number Replacement Description period in years Display B9233KJ 3 4 30 000 hours Fuse A1350EF 2 For AC power supply 250V 2 54 time lag fuse Fuse A1354EF 2 For DC power supply 250V 6 34 time lag fuse Fuse B9573TZ 10 For printer board 500 mA Motor B9233EA 5 For chart paper Motot DR130 B9231CM 3 For carriage with a screw shaft Motor DR231 B9232CM
41. Cleaning When cleaning the case or any other part of the instrument first remove the power cord from the receptacle and in case of direct connection disconnect the power lines Do not use volatile chemicals since this might result in dis coloring etc Always use a dry soft cloth for cleaning When not using the instrument for a long time When the instrument is not being used for an extensive period of time unplug the power cord from the outlet when using an adapter for direct wiring to the power supply disconnect the power cord from the outlet IM DR231 01E pue uonejeisu 3 2 How to Install Installation Conditions Installation Method The instrument must be installed in a location where the following conditions are met Ambient temperature and humidity Ambient temperature 0 to 50 C 5 to 45 C when the recorder includes a floppy disk drive e Ambient humidity 20 to 8076 RH for 0 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C However no condensation should be present Installation location Room Installation height Altitude up to 2 000 m Note Internal condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where both the ambient temperature and humidity are higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In case of thermocouple input this might result in erroneous measurements In those cases allow the instrument to achieve equilibrium with its new environment for at least one hour before s
42. Crimp ori Iugs ies ccasccasavessdegascabssssacasesessaseaadscsssesscssiseseansinates 3 16 D Data format 5e eet ee E Y RR E OHNE YA 11 6 Data length 3 12 3 13 Data SIH TE 11 6 11 12 11 19 DC power supply wee 3 23 DC power supply connector esses 5 3 23 jponcvjc 2 3 5 3 DCV TC DI input module eere 4 3 17 IM DR231 01E Index 3 X3QNI INDEX Deleting a character or numerical eene neut ti tede eie See Inserting deleting a character or numerical Destination channel for difference between channels 2 17 5 3 DI digital cette e erem 5 3 DVDO module Manion 4 3 18 Difference between channels eese 2 17 4 2 5 3 Difference high low See Alarm Digital printout printing 2 5 to 2 8 6 9 7 1 10 5 10 6 number of columns for seseeeeeeeee 2 8 10 5 Display eee See also Functions 1 2 to 1 4 4 2 4 3 Alat UT 4 2 4 3 information 22 16 Alarm Search oie io re ete 2 1 4 7 4 8 Alarmi Status dice o E o RO ear 2 1 4 10 AU Ou oe 2 1 4 1 to 4 3 chanel ee Pa Rr ex e EVI 4 2 4 3 legc UM 2 1 4 13 CO dt lon eet TERRA HERR HA ERU e weeds 2 1 difference between channels
43. FREE LOCK FEED KEY LOCK FREE LOCK PRINT KEY LOCK FREE LOCK FUNC KEY LOCK FREE LOCK M FUNC1 KEY LOCK FREE LOCK M FUNC2 KEY LOCK FREE LOCK 4 A CODE NUMBER ___0 Set the pass word KEY LOCK SET ENTER ESC ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ESC IM DR231 01E 10 15 dN Las sbumes oiseg 10 7 Setting Key Lock Explanation Selection of Use or Nonuse of Key Lock Select whether the key lock function is used or not used NOT the key lock function cannot be used USE the key lock function can be used The menu KEY LOCK ON is displayed in the FUNC menu and key lock can be executed For details see Section 9 3 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Reset Timer Reset Keylock and Message Printout page 9 15 The default setting is NOT Selection of Making Key Lock Ineffective Even if key lock is executed the turning on off of the power switch DISP MODE key operation and cursor key operation are effective Other than the above whether operation of the following keys is made effective or locked can be selected Selectable keys RECORD FEED PRINT FUNC M FUNCI and M FUNC2 Choice FREE made effective LOCK locked The default setting is LOCK Setting Password A CODE NUMBER Set a password for executing resetting key lock
44. G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 ap C io ACT LEVL FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 4 ACT LEVL REPORT To the next page To the previous page ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER From the following page IM DR231 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event CHART END actions The MATH menu is displayed only with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 and models with the M1 option The MEMRY and FLOPY menus are displayed only with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 The REPORT menu is displayed only with M3 option From the following page To the previous page EVT CHART END ENTER i r ACT EDGE ALARM ACK i o ACT EDGE ENTER LI ACT EDGE ALARM RST ENTER alo ACT EDGE TI IMER RST ENTER gt ao te eee D 4 ACT EDGE RECORD OFF ENTER OFF ON qe NN ENTER
45. OFF List printout will not be printed ON Setting information per channel will be printed Setting the List Format LIST FMT This setting specifies which setting information will be printed out in case of list printouts Each of the following lists can be selected ON or OFF and the default setting is ON LIST RANGE information about the setting range Information about settings related to tags type of input recording span linear scaling and computation equation LIST ALARM information about the alarm settings Alarm settings LIST PRINT information about the printing settings Information about settings related to analog trend recording digital printout interpolation recording zones partial expanded recording recording interval of digital printouts for logging mode and analog mode moving average scaled values alarm printout manual printout and data saving ON OFF LIST OTHER information about other settings Information about settings related to match time groups headers messages event action function list format and computation constant Information which always be included in a list printout regardless of the above settings are title measurement interval recording interval trend chart speeds 1 and 2 recording mode and time IM DR231 01E 6 13 SUOI IPUOD eui Dunes 6 7 Entering Messages Headers and Title Relevant Keys SET MESSAGE gt Select Setting Parame
46. Set SETS OFF PANEL CHART2 SET3 COV set SETS OFF PANEL A ZONE SET3 aM SET SET3 OFF To next page Select set using the keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting From the following page 10 20 IM DR231 01E 10 9 Setting SET SET3 Menu From previous page To previous page F PANEL PARTIAL ENTER 4 PARTIAL SET3 ENTER O O SET sets OFF m PANEL TAG ENTER 4 TAG SET3 ENTER CO SET SET3 OFF PANEI ENTER TREND SET ENTER S S set sets OFF PANEL DIGITAL PR ENTER 4 DIGITAL PR SET3 ENTER COYC J SET SET3 OFF PANEL PR ENTER MANUAL PR SET3 ENTER CoA SET SET3 OFF PANEL PR ENTER ALARM PR SET3 ENTER al SET SET3 OFF PANEL SCALE PR ENTER SCALE PR SET3 ENTER aC SET SET3 OFF PANEL LIST PR ENTER LIST PR SET3 ENTER ale SET SET3 OFF PANEL LIST FMT ENTER 4 LIST FMT SET3 ENTER OW SET SET3 OFF Uo PANEL MESSAGE ENTER 4 MES
47. Single phase two wire single phase three wire three phase three wire dual voltage dual current three phase three wire triple voltage triple current and three phase four wire IM DR231 01E 14 3 suoleoyioeds 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S3 Measured Data Items For each module a maximum of six data items can be selected from the effective voltage effective current active power apparent power reactive power frequency power factor and phase angle The selected data items can then be assigned to channel numbers xx1 to xx6 to show them on the display as well as record them Restrictions apply to the combination of selectable data items however depending on the method of input wiring Conditions of Measurement Measuring range for current and voltage inputs 1096 of the measuring range current and voltage inputs 10046 of the measuring range range is monitored in frequency measurement All measurements are done relative to the frequency on a channel for V1 and therefore the results of measurements are not guaranteed if the V1 input is out of the range noted above If the input apparent power falls below 10 of the span the DR recorder cannot measure the phase and power factor negative overflow A maximum of two scans worth of data become invalid immediately after a change has been made to the measuring range and or wiring Measuring Accuracy and Resol
48. g 328 0 to 572 0 Cul0 L amp N g Cul0 WEED g Cul0 BAILEY 8 High resolution RTD Pt100 1mA 5 220 0 to 302 0 F Pt100 2mA s 94 0 to 158 0 F JPt100 1mA s 220 0 to 302 0 F JPt100 2mA s 94 0to 158 0 F R S B K E J T ANSI IEC 584 DIN IEC 584 JIS C 1602 1981 2 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U Cu CuNi DIN 43710 3 N Nicrosil Nisil IEC 584 DIN IEC 584 4 W W 5 RE W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co 5 Pt50 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1986 Pt100 JIS C 1604 1989 JIS C 1606 1989 IEC 751 DIN IEC 751 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1989 6 SAMA DIN 7 McGRAW EDISON COMPANY 8 Ranges to which accuracy applies Cul0 GE 119 9 to 338 0 F Cul0 L amp N 103 0 to 302 0 F Cul0 WEED 4 0 to 482 0 F Cu10 BAILEY 4 0 to 482 0 F 10 26 IM DR231 01E 10 12 Working with the Report Function Relevant Keys ESC RECORD SETUP REPORT sucer GO Co INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART MATH FLOPPY REPORT ALARM A D INTGT kerLoc DO cuart ser enter 2 Operating Procedure To enter the SETUP menu follow the steps below 1 If the DR recorder is in the OPERATION DISPLAY mode or shows a menu other than the SETUP menu turn off the power switch once 2 Turn on the power switch while pressing down the DISP key and then keep holding
49. no engineering unit will be displayed Selected Display Mode refer to page 4 1 for procedure This only appears on sub display 1 when monitoring The arrow shows to which display the display mode refers 004d L 0 0926V 005 0 0824V AUT L Selected display mode Engineering unit Measurement value Alarm Difference between channels Channel No 1st digit unit No fixed to 0 2nd digit slot No depending on the number of modules 0 1 0 2 0 3 3rd digit channel No in units of 1 Others Same as for the main unit AUTO Mode for Sub display 2 Data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms Measurement Values Engineering Units and Selected Display Mode Same as for the sub display 1 Others Same as for the sub display 1 Aejdsig spo 34 6umes B Points to Note when Using the AUTO Mode When all three displays are set to AUTO mode the main display will start displaying data of the channel with the smallest channel number on sub display 1 data of the next two channels will be displayed while on sub display 2 data of the next two channels will be displayed When the data are updated the display will be replaced with data of the next consecutive channel When the input type of all channels is set to SKIP then depending on the display settings as described below
50. 01 1 H _ _0 00 4 001 01 1 H _ 0 00 ENTER gt Alarm Limit 0 00 100 00 4 RELAY OFF ENTER 4 AV SET OK ESC RELAY S01 4 RELAY S01 ENTER 4 SET OK ESC Explanation Selecting channel Nos Channels Nos A01 to A30 are available for computation channels optional Selecting the alarm item number Set the alarm item number for each channel as follows Select any number from among 1 2 3 and 4 Alarm numbers 1 to 4 can be set for one channel For details on setting the alarm printout see Section 6 5 Setting the Alarm Printout on page 6 10 Note f SKIP is selected for the input type or if the computation channels are OFF alarms cannot be set f the following cases the alarm is set to OFF f the input type or measuring range in the related channel is changed If computation channels are turned ON OFF or the computation equation is changed f the recording span for the linear scaling or linear scaling values is changed or f the standard channel for differential computation between channels is changed Setting the alarm or relay including internal switches gives more functions to this recorder For details see Section 9 1 Setting Event and Action Functions on page 9 1 IM DR231 01E 8 1 suue y pue Buifejdsiq Bunies 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches Selecting the type of alarm Select an alarm type fo
51. 01Hz Power factor 2 of SPAN Oxl Ix 80 0 01 Phase angle 5deg 0 lt lt 80 0 1deg 14 4 IM DR231 01E 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S3 Measuring Ranges Measured Data Item 25 V 0 5A 25 V 5 A 250 V 0 5 A 250 V 5 A Effective voltage 0 00 to 25 00 V rms 0 00 to 25 00 V rms 0 0 to 250 0 V rms 0 0 to 250 0 V rms Vi i 1 2 3 13 0 Effective current 0 0000 to 0 5000 A rms 0 000 to 5 000 Arms 0 0000 to 0 5000 A rms 0 000 to 5 000 A rms Ii i2 1 2 3 13 0 Active power 12 50 to 12 50 W 125 0 to 125 0 W 125 0 to 125 0 W 1250 to 1250 W P1 P2 P3 Active power 25 00 to 25 00 W 250 0 to 250 0 W 250 0 to 250 0W 2500 to 2500 W P13 Active power 37 50 to 37 50 W 375 0 to 375 0 W 375 0 to 375 0 W 3750 to 3750 W PO Apparent power 0 00 to 12 50 0 0 to 125 0 VA 0 0 to 125 0 VA 0 to 1250 VA VAI VA2 VA3 Apparent power 0 00 to 25 00 VA 0 0to 250 0 VA 0 0 to 250 0 VA 0 to 2500 VA VA13 Apparent power 0 00 to 37 50 VA 0 0to 375 0 VA 0 0 to 375 0 VA 0 to 3750 VA VAO Reactive power Varl Var2 Var3 0 00 to 12 50 Var 0 0 to 125 0 Var 0 0 to 125 0 Var 0 to 1250 Var Reactive power 0 00 to 25 00 Var 0 0 to 250 0 Var 0 0 to 250 0 Var 0 to 2500 Var Var13 Reactive power 0 00 to 37 50 Var 0 0 to 375 0 Var 0 0 to 375 0 Var 0 to 3750 Var Var0 Power factor 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 PFi G
52. 2 set at the menu displayed after having pressed the SET key for three seconds Group trend recording refer to page 2 10 Saving and reading of measured data computed data and set up data This function is available if the instrument is equipped with a floppy disk drive This function enables saving of data to the internal RAM disk or floppy disk and reading of data into the instrument Starting stopping of computation reset clear and group reset This function is available if the instrument is equipped with the computation function or equipped with a floppy disk drive This function enables starting and stopping of computation Flag Valid only for models with mathematical option M1 Set the flag to 1 This function prevents alterations by careless key operations When the key lock function is activated the indicator KEYLOCK at the right side of the display will be lit All key operations except power ON OFF DISP MODE key and the cursor will then be disabled However you can preset whether RECORD FEED PRINT FUNC M FUNC1 and M FUNC2 keys will remain operable even after key lock has been set Furthermore when activating or releasing the key lock a menu for password verification appears to prevent the key lock to be used by unauthorized operators 2 18 IM DR231 01E 2 6 Other Functions External Input Output Function Option Alarm Output When A4 option is installed ten external output relays make contact can
53. 3 25 14 9 14 15 Tancar neret te Eee ies 2 17 5 5 List printout printing sse 2 12 6 13 7 2 Logging LOGGING eon eere See Mode Logic LOGIC box oo a a a E TEE 9 9 Low limit alarm lower limit alarm eesee See Alarm M MANUALE 53 tres tee ttti een See Display Manual printout printing sese 2 13 7 2 9 10 2 6 2 7 SOUS OF tcc cae Se epe a eet 6 17 9 9 Measured data 11 1 to 11 6 R ading ireen 11 7 to 11 10 Measurement input functions Measurement interval sse Mode Analog Trend sees Display eite eee eee ee Logging LOGGING Monitor Display eret Opera O aseTi potenter dene R cording nne edere cett TIME int te nre o HH tie Model and Suffix Codes Module information eii eene adi Monitor Display Mode essere Mounting brackets cerent tenetis 5 3 2 Moving average functions essseeeeeeens 2 17 6 17 number of samples for eene 2 17 6 17 MUETIPLE 4 iet reste petebat sins 2 9 10 6 N Names Of parts entered 1 2 to 1 5 3 6 to 3 9 Name plate STE EE PEERS E QU E aa aes 3 NOALARM ettet tet etes 4 7 to 4 9 Noise Countermeasures eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennee eene 3 26 to 3 35 O Operating conditions reference
54. 4000 2 3 125 Measurement accuracy 4 digits 0 004 V Moving average Moving average results for between 2 to 64 scans are computed Data Save Load Function Media for data save load Buffer memory internal SRAM Capacity 512 KB Data backup Around 10 years backup with lithium battery at room temperature while power is off Specified data length 10 20 30 40 50 100 200 300 400 500 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 10k 20k 30k 40k and 50k data ch Total memory lengt must be within the free memory size 3 5 inch floppy disk Number of drives 1 Disk types 2HD 2DD Supported formats 1 2 MB 1 44 MB and 720 KB Applicable data Setting values measured values and computed values only possible whe optional math function is specified Method to save to the floppy disk Copies data stored in the buffer memory to the floppy disk except for setting values which can be directly saved to the floppy disk Method to load from floppy disk Copies data from the floppy disk to the buffer memory except for settin values which can be directly loaded from the floppy disk Printing and outputing loaded data Able to print captured data saved in the buffer memory or output to a communication interface Data save format Setting values ASCII Measured computed values binary except ASCII CSV Format is also possible when saving to floppy disk Data capacity Setting values DR130 Maximum about 42 KB in case when saving the setting va
55. 5 250V in case of DR130 231 located in fuse holder when power supply is 1 Timelag 6 3A 250V when power supply is 2 or option P6 is specified only when P6 is specified 10 colors Recording width 250 mm length 30 m grid 25 mm Recording width 150 mm length 20m grid 10 mm this manual Communication Interface manual only when C1 C2 C3 or C7 are specified Data conversion software manual comes with models with whose software code is 2 Software compatible with Windows 95 98 and Windows NT comes with models whose software code is a Ax Provided depending on the specifications 1 One of these power cord types is supplied according to the instrument s suffix code IM DR231 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Accessories Optional Software Spares Name Model Description Shunt resistance DV300 011 10Q for screw Shunt resistance DV300 012 10Q for clamp Shunt resistance DV300 101 100Q for screw Shunt resistance DV300 102 100Q for clamp Shunt resistance DV300 251 250Q for screw Shunt resistance DV300 252 250Q for clamp Rack mount kit DV400 013 for DR231 Rack mount kit DV400 015 for DR130 Name Model Description DAQ 32 DP120 13 Windows 95 98 and Windows NT DAQ 32 Plus DP320 13 Windows 95 98 and Windows NT Name Model Min Q ty Description Ribbon cassette B9627AZ 1 10 colors Chart paper B9627RY 10 Recording width 250mm l
56. 5 g AC power will operate as long as the AC power switch is on even if the main switch is turned off If you are not going to use the instrument for a long time turn off the AC power switch 3 24 IM DR231 01E 3 7 Setting the Date and Time Relevant Keys Operating Procedure SET CLOCK ere S Gz ats INS DEL Clock mete mm menn CD Cser Press the CHART key to display the CHART menu Set and select using or To escape while using a single menu press the MODE ESC key The menu returns to the first menu to which the single menu belongs Note that newly selected or set items will be canceled When the device displays that setting is completed the newly set or selected details are fixed Main menu SET 1 co Lower menu 1 CLOCK ENTER 96 01 01 03 36 23 ENTER gt Set Date amp Time YY MM DD HH MM SS i kkk SET OK ESC Explanation Setting the Date and Time Set them in the order of year month day hour minutes seconds Year Specify the lower two digits of the year Example 1996 96 2000 00 Month day Use two digits for each Hour 00 to 23 Press the ENTER key at the set time to make it effective Note The date and time settings are back
57. 5 Engineering urit tte ARS PREIS 2 13 6 2 Header coe cusps is ERR HERR aR 2 13 6 15 7 2 DASE eo e dante ees 2 12 6 13 7 2 Mana en e 2 13 7 2 9 10 MESSAge ener rere rr here 2 13 6 15 7 3 9 10 9 17 Message printout sue 7 3 cleaning eee eer es 9 17 jM 2 13 6 9 10 4 Titles eet roO ERR ERR 2 6 to 2 8 2 13 6 15 2 13 c RR e M RE RE 10 13 C Carriage E 3 8 13 1 Carrying handle ree TRO ete 3 2 20 Chart chart cassette chart paper 5 3 6 to 3 10 Chart 2 19 3 18 Chart speeds eene ein 2 5 2 0 6 4 6 5 setting change of nee eerte 2 5 6 5 9 10 Clamp terminal 3 to 5 3 17 isses 2 1 4 13 CODE NUMBER 4 eticteetie recente See Password Component type oom e eme te eee np ted 1 1 1 4 Computation tendent tiene d 2 17 Computation Computation error kesip Operat E Equations Constant ecce eye o Wee d YN deese Starting stopping clearing resetting Computed data e EE Reading ee D l ting ncn eerie teni eie e ieri Copying Conditionss pd E OD PEE ERES Copying alarm other items range 9 12 9 13
58. 6 V ZERO gt 6 V SPAN gt 20 V ZERO gt 20 V SPAN gt 50 V ZERO gt 50 V SPAN gt Pt 1 mA ZERO 9 Pt 1 mA SPAN gt Pt 2 mA ZERO Pt 2 mA SPAN 9 Pt 1 mA H SPAN Pt 2 mA H SPAN gt Cu 2 mA ZERO gt Cu 2 mA SPAN When the DC V TC DI input module is selected the displayed values for RTD in the universal input module can be modified without influencing operation of the recorder The calibrated values appear in the above order each time the ENTER key is pressed If the MODE key is pressed while displaying calibrated values the display returns to A D calibration mode selection and the calibrated value already adjusted before pressing the MODE key is canceled Calibrated values are effective immediately after terminating the DISPLAY mode Adjustable range and error display Adjustable ranges are 32768 to 32767 excepting 16384 16384 16385 and 16383 If the following numeric values are set errors appear Outside the range from 32768 to 32767 2 16384 or 16384 ERROR145 16385 or 16383 ERROR144 Note In the adjustable ranges if the following are not satisfied the adjusted module is recognized as an error module Calibrated value ZERO 3277 to 3277 ideal value 0 Calibrated value SPAN 29491 to 29491 ideal value 32768 ZERO calibration SPAN calibration When calibrating the DC TC or DI input module you need not calibrate an RTD END mode storing a calibr
59. 925 315 60 23 3 4 9 15 8 96 02 14 15 05 17 0 13 227 315 55 23 3 4 9 16 0 96 02 14 15 05 19 0 13 928 315 04 23 3 5 0 16 1 96 02 14 15 05 21 0 12 620 315 29 23 3 5 1 16 1 96 02 14 15 05 23 0 12 643 315 01 23 2 5 1 16 2 96 02 14 15 05 25 0 13 426 315 05 23 2 5 1 16 3 96 02 14 15 05 27 0 12 227 315 42 23 2 5 2 15 9 96 02 14 15 05 29 0 12 233 315 81 23 2 5 2 15 8 96 02 14 15 05 31 0 13 822 315 03 23 2 5 1 15 8 96 02 14 15 05 33 0 12 324 315 05 23 2 5 2 15 8 96 02 14 15 05 35 0 13 220 315 07 23 2 5 1 16 0 96 02 14 15 05 37 0 13 450 315 91 23 2 5 1 16 3 96 02 14 15 05 39 0 13 720 315 05 23 2 5 1 16 3 96 02 14 15 05 41 0 12 670 315 02 23 2 5 2 16 2 96 02 14 15 05 43 0 12 830 315 01 23 2 5 0 16 1 96 02 14 15 05 45 0 12 350 315 01 23 2 5 0 16 1 L y jj ux Saving date time Data Note The following special ASCII codes will be converted as follows gt Space 20H gt Space 20H u gt u 75H gt e 65H U gt Space 20H No file copying is possible during computations During copying GP IB RS 232 C RS 422 A RS 485 communication remains inactive If a data item is saved using a trigger the letter T precedes the time at which the trigger was applied
60. Awaiting a trigger Restrictions during saving The following settings can not be made while saving is in progress Settings relating to media except for saving stop setting Measuring range Computation equation constant Group Copying when range copying is on IM DR231 01E 11 2 Reading Measured and Computed Data Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Main menu oise C ESC RECORID SET MEMORY GO Cre INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY ker ere cuart ser enter Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the O Q keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Reading measured computed data immediately from the RAM disk SET m T Q MEMORY READ ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 READ MODE DIRECT ENTER DIRECT TRIGER STOP INFO 4 READ FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC DDD i READ START DATA 1 ENTER gt Start limit 1 200000 i READ START End of setting ESC d Main menu Reading me
61. Can be set in the range of 0 to 9999 The default setting is O Note In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 24 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 24 10 16 IM DR231 01E 10 8 Setting FUNC FUNC3 Menu Relevant Keys SETUP ZFUNC PARM gt Select Setting Parameter JELAY BURN OUT RJC COLOR LOCK FUNC PARMT Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure ESC refer C JC INS DEL ser LeEwreR w ruwc 2 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O Q keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SETUP OQ Lower menu FUNC PARM ENTER gt PANEL ALARM ACK ENTER eee uy ALARM ACK FUNC ENTER 9 FUNC PARM SET ESC O O FUNCFUNC3 OFF PANEL ALARM RESET 4 ALARM RESET FUNC FUNC
62. Constant Relevant Keys oise C ESC RECORID SET CONST GO Cree INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST TREND TIMER LOG 1 soos rer cuart ser LEwreR mrFunc2 Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the 5 keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET CONST ENTER CONST No K01 ENTER K01 K02 K04 K05 K06 K07 K08 K09 K10 4 OOQ K01 9 9999E 29 ENTER ee vid 0123456789E SET OK End of setting ESC Explanation Up to 30 constants K01 to K30 can be set The number of significant digits is 5 excluding the decimal point If exponent is used the mantissa and exponent must consist of 5 digits and 2 digits respectively The configurable ranges are e 1 0000E 35 to 1 0000E 35 0 1 0000E 35 to 1 0000E 35 IM DR231 01E 12 7 uoneinduio IPPON LIN 34 12 4 Starting Stopping Computation Computation can be started and stopped from the FUNC menu or using the event action function Starting stopping computation from the FUNC menu Pres
63. ENTER 01 0203 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START D O Bue ACT EDGE FLAG FO01 ACT EDGE FLAG F ENTER 4 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR D 4 avo ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR ENTER DATA WR WR TRIG RD TRIG LD TRG1 LD TRG2 LD TRG3 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 D 4 avo ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 ENTER LD TRG1LD TRG2LD TRG3 ACT EDGE REPORT START D 4 ACT EDGE REPORT START ENTER START STOP ACT LEVL RECORD D 4 ACT LEVL RECORD ENTER From the following page To the next page 9 8 IM DR231 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Explanation When an event is detected this menu allows you to set and execute a certain action Selection of logic LOGIC box number Select a box number from among 01 to 30 for storing a combination logic from events to actions Select the same number as the box number already indicating events and actions and set an event and action to overwrite the logic number Selection of events EVT Select any event from among the following NONE releases the event action setting REMOTE This menu is displayed only with R1 option When a remote control signal is applied the action is executed There are 12 control sign
64. Event Reset here If MATH is selected as a level action computation will be carried out while an event is present Computation will stop when the event is cleared When the level action is set the start stop clear amp start computation using using the M FUNC key are disable The edge and level actions cannot be set simultaneously For the level action only one action is available MEMRY available with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 equipped with the floppy disk drive DATA WR saves one data item to the specified data length each time an event occurs e WR TRIG saves measured computed data on the built in RAM disk RD TRIG reads measured computed data from the built in RAM disk LD TRGI to 3 reads setup data from the built in RAM disk e FLOPY available only when provided with the M1 option or a floppy disk drive LD TRGI to 3 reads setup data from the floppy disk FLAG only for M1 optional model e F01 to 16 Set the flag number F01 to F16 to 1 F01 to F16 are normally 0 Flags can be placed in computing equations to hold the computed result using a certain event as a trigger or reset to 0 REPORT available if the instrument is equiped with the REPORT function START Edge action Starts making up a report STOP Edge action Stops making up a report REPORT Level action Starts stops making up a report Note If in the SETUP mode the report function is set to OFF for all data items you cannot s
65. Except auto switch does not function on the DC power supply model Minimum measurement interval DR130 Filter ON OFF ow pass filter OFF Low pass filter ON number S integration 20ms 16 7ms 100ms 20ms 16 7ms 100ms of channels time 50Hz 60Hz 10Hz 50Hz 60Hz 10Hz 10 2s 4s 3s 12s 20 2s 5s 4s 15s DR231 DR241 a Low pass filter OFF Low pass filter ON number integration 20ms 16 7ms 100ms 20ms 16 7ms 100ms of channels time 50Hz 60Hz 10Hz 50Hz 60Hz 10Hz 10 0 5s As 3s 12s 20 2s 5s 4s 15s 30 2s 6s 4s 20s 2s if the power monitor module is installed Reference junction compensation Switchable internally or externally for each channel Compensation accuracy for the reference junction measured at 0 C where the input terminals are balanced Type R S B W 1 C Type J E T L U 0 5 Maximum allowable input voltage 2V DC or lower range TC RTD DI CONT 10V DC 6V DC or greater range DI LEVEL x60V DC Normal mode voltage DC voltage 1 2 times the rated range or less at peak value including 50 or 60Hz signal component RTD 50 mV or lower at peak value Normal mode rejection ratio 40dB or greater 50 60Hz 0 1 IM DR231 01E 14 1 suoneoyi2ods 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S3 Common mode noise voltage 250V AC rms 50 60Hz Common mode rejection ratio 120dB or greater 50 60Hz 0 1 500Q unbalanced between the negative measurement terminal and ground Ma
66. FUNC3 OFF PANEL TIMER RESET Ayo TIMER RESET FUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL MATH START 4 MATH START FUNC Ol FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL MATH_CLR_START MATH CLR START F NC AI FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL MATH STOP 4 MATH STOP FUNC al FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL MATH ACK aio 1 MATH ACK FUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF To next page ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER From the following page IM DR231 01E 10 17 dN Las shuimes oiseg 10 8 Setting FUNC FUNC3 Menu From prevlous page PANEL REPORT START lt REPORT START FUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL REPORT_START cy REPORT START FUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL REP_RECALL_START ic RECALL START FUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL REP_PRINT_STOP c o REP PRINT STOPSFUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL KEY LOCK ON 4 KEY LOCK ON FUNC ar FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL KEY LOCK OFF 4 KEY LOCK OFF FUNC ar FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL S U LIST START 4 S U LIST START FUNCS al FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL S U LIST STOP 4 S U LIST STOP FUNC3 ais FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL MSG PRINT 4 MSG PRINT FUNC al FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL ALM BUF CLEAR 4 ALM BUF CLEAR FUNC3 DS FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL MSG BUF CLEAR 4 MSG BUF CLEAR FUNC3 CY FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL MODULE INF 4 MODULE INF FUNCS3 ae FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL COMM IN
67. INFO FORMAT 4 gt VOLUME DARWIN ENTER gt MEMORY 20000 BYTES 4 INFO END Eno ESC Displaying information in the SETUP mode Information can be displayed in the same way as the SET mode Select FLOPPY from the SETUP menu Main menu SETUP m lt FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY INFO ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 gt VOLUME DARWIN ENTER gt MEMORY 20000 BYTES 4 INFO END Enad ESC 11 22 IM DR231 01E 11 8 Displaying RAM Disk and Floppy Disk Information Explanation Internal RAM disk and floppy disk information is displayed Internal RAM disk Remaining memory size is displayed Floppy disk Volume name and remaining memory size are displayed ejeg dn jas pue payndwog peanseejy IM DR231 01E 11 23 11 9 Initializing the RAM Disk Relevant Keys series EDS r ESC RECORD SET MEMORY DE Func print JJ C Freep INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR EVLOCH cuart set enter 2 Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings
68. INIT 001 01 CH SET ON D gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 CH SETZON D gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 CH SETZON ENTER OFF ON CH SET OK End of setting ESC Saving immediately SET Main menu O MEMORY ENTER gt MEMORY WRITE ENTER CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INIT WRITE MODE DIRECT ENTER DIRECT TRIGER REPEAT STOP 4 WRITE file ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 WRITE FILE DDDD ENTER 4 WRITE SAMPLE INTVL ENTER INTVL 1min 2min 5min 10min LOGIC 4 WRITE LENGTH 1k ENTER 10 20 30 40 50 100 200 300 400 500 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 10k 20k 30k 40k 50k kkk ESC WRITE START End of setting 11 2 IM DR231 01E 11 1 Saving Measured and Computed Data Main menu Saving one file only using the event action function The action in the event action function must be configured as MEMRY WR before you can perform this task SET xc 1E ied MEMORY ENTER MEMORY WRITE ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE rds INIT WRITE MODE TRIGER ENTER DIRECT TRIGER REPEAT STOP 4 WRITE file ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 WRITE FILE DDDD ENTER i WRITE SAMPLE INTVL ENTER INTVL 1min 2min 5min 10min LOGIC 4 WRITE LENGTH 1k ENTER Main menu 10 20 30 40 50 100 200 300 400 500 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 10k 20k 30k 40k 50k 4 WRITE PRE TRIG
69. MAN using the MODE key Sub display 1 002 0 0422V 003 0 0726V MAN 3 Select the right or left channel using the keys A dash will appear below the unit number of the selected channel 4 Select the required channel using the O Q keys Sub display 1 006 0 0892V 003 0 0726V MAN MANUAL Display for Sub display 2 1 Select sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select MAN using the MODE key Sub display 1 005 0 0931V 006 0 0092V YMAN 3 Select the right or left channel using the gt Q keys A dash will appear below the unit number of the selected channel 4 Select the required channel using the O keys Sub display 2 009 1 0075V 008 0 0154V 4 4 IM DR231 01E 4 2 Using the MANUAL Display MANUAL Display for the Main Display Channel No Difference between Channels delta and Alarms Same as for the AUTO mode refer to page 4 2 Measurement Values Same as for the AUTO mode refer to page 4 2 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then SKIP will be displayed When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected appears Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO mode refer to page 4 2 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then no engineering unit will be displayed MANUAL Display for the
70. Max min value TLOG P PQ TLOG P P 003 Obtain the P P value of the measured data of channel 003 Fi S 0 Total value TLOG SUMQ TLOG SUM 004 Obtain the total value of the measured data of channel 004 s s Average value _ TLOG AVEO TLOG AVE 005 Obtain the average value of the measured data of channel 005 z 3 Statistical computation of the measured data from the start of the statistical computation until it is stopped When combining with each of the operators MAX MINQ SUMO and the value that can be specified inside is limited to the input channel number the computation channel number refer to next page Example TLOG MAX A01 IM DR231 01E 12 1 12 1 Overview of the Computation Function Statistical operators within the group Type Operator Example Description Maximum value CLOG MAX CLOG MAX GO01 Obtain the maximum value of the measured data of group G01 Minimum value CLOG MINO CLOG MIN G02 Obtain the minimum value of the measured data of group G02 Max min value CLOG P P CLOG P P G03 Obtain the P P value of the measured data of group Total value CLOG SUM CLOG SUM G04 Obtain the total value of the measured data of group G04 Average value CLOG AVE CLOG AVE GO5 Obtain the average value of the measured data of group G05 Statistical computation of the measured data of the input channel within the same group measured at the same time every specified interval Spec
71. OK ESC R 001 01 SCL DI LEVL D 4 001 01 SCL DI LEVL ENTER LEVL CONT 4 SPAN 0 1 ENTER Span limit 0 1 4 SCL _ 0 00 100 00 ENTER i SET OK ESC Explanation The setting of the channel number is the same as explained in 5 1 on page 5 2 The following explanation assumes that you already carried out the channel setting and that you selected SCL as the input type Selecting the Input Type for Linear Scaling The input type can be selected from the following The default setting is VOLT VOLT DC voltage Refer to page 5 3 TC thermocouple Refer to page 5 3 RTD resistance temperature detector Refer to page 5 3 DI contact Refer to page 5 3 2 1eeurq yueds 1ndu ay Buas Setting the Recording Span Refer to page 5 3 Setting the Scaling Values SCL The left scaling and right scaling values are set following the left and right span values of the span menu The value on the left side of the SCL menu shows the left scaling value and the value on the right side of the SCL menu shows the right scaling menu The setting ranges from 30000 to 30000 The decimal point can be set in any position of the scale as shown below Set it when the left scale is set LI PS PS LLL or he The default settings are 0 00 for the left span and 100 00 for the right span For details on setting the engineering units for linear scaling refer to page 6 2
72. Relevant Keys DISP MODE RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT C CO FEED INS DEL RANGE ALARM CP M FUNC 1 CHART SET enter 2 RELAY STATUS Display for Sub display 1 Explanation 1 Select the sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select RLY using the MODE key Sub display 1 1501 RLY 3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels Sub display 1 1511 4 RLY RELAY STATUS Display for Sub display 2 1 Select the sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select RLY using the MODE key Sub display 1 and 2 1501 WRLY S01 3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels Sub display 1 and 2 1501 WRLY 1031
73. Remarks 16 7ms nx60Hz approx 19Hz for 60Hz 20 0ms nx50Hz approx 16Hz for 50Hz 100 0ms nx10Hz approx 3 2Hz for both 50Hz 60Hz n 1 2 3 As shown in the table the merit of 100 0 ms integration is not only that it applies to both 50 and 60Hz but also that it provides a low cut off frequency as the first order lag filter and improves the noise rejection ability The following figure shows the calculation values of the NMRR for three integration times and an example of actual measurement of the NMRR for a 100 ms integration signal Calculated values of NMRR Example of actual measurement of NMRR 100ms PTT 404 50 604 100ms 70 dB 5 10 20 50 100 200 5 Praia om mme sb Noise Filter This instrument is equipped with a low pass filter cutoff frequency of 10Hz for both 50 60 Hz 50Hz 60Hz which functions as a way of noise rejection Also exponential averaging functions as a noise filter Applications Practical Measures Reducing noise itself The basics of this practical measures dictates using the instrument in conditions where noise is suppressed as much as possible for power lines an increase of impedance Separate the power lines for noise source equipment inverter thyristor etc from those for the measuring instrument 3 30 IM DR231 01E 3 8 Countering Noise for input lines an increase of impedance Always separate the input lin
74. Single phase Model Three phase Model Wire clip Ema Wire clip V1 Eo n 9mm EA Wire clip m Strip 9 mm of insulation off the leadwire ALWAYS clamp the leadwire with the wire clip The recommended torque for fastening the wire clip screw is 0 4 to 0 5 Nem Wiring Diagrams Single phase Two wire Configuration Ara t SOURCE LOAD SOURCE LOAD Single phase Three wire Configuration power monitor modules for three phase use only SOURCE LOAD SOURCE LOAD FUSE Three phase Three wire Configuration dual current dual voltage measurement power monitor modules for three phase use only ANE p SOURCE LOAD IM DR231 01E 3 19 pue uonejesul 3 5 Connecting the Signal Lines Three phase Three wire Configuration triple current triple voltage measurement power monitor modules for three phase use only AUN E SOURCE R v LOAD 2 LOAD Three phase Four wire Configuration power monitor modules f
75. Sub display 1 and 2 Data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously on each display Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms and Selected Display Mode Same as for the AUTO mode refer to page 4 3 Measurement Values Same as for the AUTO mode refer to page 4 3 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then SKIP will be displayed When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected appears Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO mode refer to page 4 3 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then no engineering unit will be displayed IM DR231 01E Aejdsig spo 101100Jy 34 6umes B 4 3 Using the PAGE Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Select the main display using the DISP key Explanation DISP MODE oy RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT FEED RANGE ALARM CO M FUNC 1 CHART SET enter mrunc2 2 Select PGE using the MODE key Sub display 1 002 0 1936V 003 0 0995V APGE 3 Select the required set of five channels page using the CS amp keys Display 006 0 0173V 007 0 0197V 008 0 0074V APGE 009 0 0162V 010 0 0102V PAGE Display for the Main Display When this display is selected the measurement values of five consecutive channels w
76. Tag Digital Printout and Manual Printout page 6 9 SINGLE Digital print The interval is determined by the chart speed and the number of columns to be printed See the table in chapter 14 page 14 4 Logging mode interval for timer No 1 MULTIPLE intervals selected for each channel from 6 kinds of timers for either Digital printing or the Logging mode The default setting is SINGLE Note n order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 24 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 24 10 6 IM DR231 01E 10 3 Select Alarm Interval Hysteresis Hold A D Converter Integration Time Filter Relevant Keys OQ ESC SETUP ALARM JL INS DEL Select Setting Parameter CHART RECORD ALARM A D INTG FILTER RELAYT EYLOGI cuart ser enter Cuin Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O Q keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu wil
77. The DI DO module is mounted in slot4 41 to 42 The default setting is OFF Setting AND OR AND This can be set either to the relays or the internal switches However the relay setting can be made when the A4 option or R1 option is selected Selection of Internal Switch Relay S internal switch is set O relay is set The default setting is S Setting AND OR The relays or the internal switches are set to AND in up to the set range and set to OR in the range exceeding the set range For internal switches set from 01 01 to 01 60 For the A4 option 01 01 to 01 60 can be displayed However if this option is installed in slot 4 01 41 to 01 50 is the effective setting range For the R1 option 01 01 to 01 60 can be displayed However if this option is installed in slot 5 01 51 to 01 52 is the effective setting range For the A4 and R1 option 01 01 to 01 60 can be displayed However if the A4 and R1 options are installed in slots 4 and 5 respectively 01 41 to 01 52 is the effective setting range neither case above if all are to be set to OR or reset set NONE The default setting is NONE 10 10 IM DR231 01E 10 4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal Switch Setting Energizing Deenergizing ENERG This is a menu displayed for the A4 option or R1 option The internal switches cannot be set Relay Setting Set the object relays from one number relay first relay to another number
78. This setting specifies the recording interval for the logging mode One type of recording interval can be set The setting is done the same way as described on page 6 3 although only one type can be set IM DR231 01E suonipuo eui Dunes 6 3 Setting Recording Zones and Partially Expanded Recording Relevant Keys SET ZONE gt Select Setting Parameter CHART2 ZONE PARTIAL TAG DIGITAL PR MANT csr wor PEASY Geen ESC Operating Procedure e Main menu RECORD refer CO Ce INS DEL cu RANGE ALARM CD KEYLOGI set enrer 2 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu Select set using the keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting SET Lower menu ZONE ENTER 001 01 ZONE 0 250mm Select Channel No 4 001 01 20 __0 250 Select Channel No 4 001 01 ZONE 0 250mm C O 2 Left limit 0 245mm 2 4 001 01 ZONE 0 250mm gt Right limit 5 250mm 3 4 K ENTER PARTIAL ENTER 001 01 PARTIAL OFF gt ON W 001 4 001 01 PARTIAL OFF gt ON 001
79. Using this funcion the DR will autonatically change its date and time to the summer time or winter time when appropriate If you specify SUMMER the time will be ajusted to one hour later when the specified date and time is reached If you specify WINTER the time will be ajusted to one hour earlier when the specified date and time is reached When the set time is reached the setting will return to its intial value of 50 01 01 00 The value of the years are as follows 00 to 49 stand for the year 2000 to 2049 whereas 50 to 99 stand for the years 1950 to 1999 IM DR231 01E suoloung J19u1o pue uonoun J uonoyAuoe 3 10 1 Selecting Adjustment of Dot Printing Position or Scan Interval Relevant Keys o 5 nee ESC SETUP PRN_ADJ JC INS DEL Select Setting Parameter CHART PRN ADJ SCAN INTVL RECORD ALARM A D INT EYLOGI cuart ser enter mrunc 2 Cuin UE Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept
80. a Computation Equation Relevant Keys series EDS r ESC RECORD SET MATH DE Func print JJ C Freep INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST TREND TIMER LOG 1 EXLOCH rares ine cuart set enter 2 Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET MATH ENTER A01 01 MODE ON D gt Select Channel No A01 01 MODE ON D gt Select Channel No 4 A01 30 MODE ON ENTER OFF ON i CALC 001 002 n 23456789 CGMA NE CALC 001 002 D n 23456789 CGMA NE CALC 001 002 ENTER 0123456789 CGMA NE 4 LEFT 3000 000Kg ENTER gt Span limit 9999 999 9999 999Kg 4 RIGHTz 3000 000Kg ENTER Span limit 9999 999 9999 999Kg 4 SET OK End of setting ESC 12 4 IM DR231 01E 12 2 Setting a Computation Equation Explanation A computation equation can be set for up to 30 channels A01 to A30 Setting the mode If A01 30 MODE ON is specified as in the example given on the previous page the same equation can be set for channe
81. alarms can be displayed on sub display 1 and 2 On each sub display the alarms of maximum 30 channels can be monitored which also depends on the number of input channels The display shows _ for channels where no alarm has occurred and shows W for channels where an alarm has occurred The relation between the alarm status display and channel number is as shown below The first character of the setting is always 0 001 zw ere i wy tac eae L Channel 30 Channel 21 Channel 20 Channel 12 Channel 11 Channel 10 Alarm status of channel 3 Alarm status of channel 2 Alarm status of channel 1 r Channel No fixed to 1 in units of 1 Slot No depending on the number of modules 0 1 0 2 0 3 Unit No fixed to 0 A will be displayed in the case of optional computation channels NIE Channel 30 Alarm status of channel 22 Alarm status of channel 21 021 4 10 IM DR231 01E 4 7 Using the RELAY STATUS Display
82. and stopping each time the M FUNC key is pressed MATCH TIME When the set time is reached the action is executed There are three types of applicable MATCH TIMES Select any of them For details see Section 6 8 Setting Match Time Moving Average Interpolation and Groups on page 6 17 provided earlier in this manual n combination with the level action the corresponding action is repeated alternately between executing and stopping for each set time Selecting edge or level action Edge action EDGE This action is executed when an event is detected Level action LEVEL This action is executed when an event is detected When an event is released this action will suonoung 194 0 pue uonounJ uonoyAue 3 be canceled IM DR231 01E 9 9 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of actions An action that can be selected varies depending on the events and edge or level action See the individual procedures The following describe all actions available ALARM ACK This allows alarm acknowledgment For the applicable functions see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 16 ALARM RST This resets alarms When the RELAY is selected for an event this function cannot be selected For the applicable functions see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 16 TIMER RST This resets timers For the applicable functions see Section 2 3 Recording Functions on page 2 9 RECORD ON Starts recordin
83. are excluded from computing Data of positive and negative overflows however are included in the computing of the maximum and minimum INST Faulty data are included in computing SUM Faulty data are excluded from computing suoneoyi2ods IM DR231 01E 14 11 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S3 Information on and Process in Case of Power Failure The DR recorder adds x to the time on a printout provided upon recovery from a power failure It does not print the character however if it has been more than 12 hours since the power failure occurred The DR recorder excludes data occurring during a power failure from its reports If the DR recorder recovers from a power failure after the time to make a report it makes a report immediately after the recovery In an application where the REPORT PRINT menu item is set to on for automatic printing the DR recorder prints a report only immediately after it recovers from a power failure if the power failure time is less than 12 hours and the recorder has recovered after the preset time for report printing In an application where the REPORT PRINT menu item is set to on for automatic printing the DR recorder prints a report at the scheduled time for report printing if a power failure time is less than 12 hours and the recorder has recovered before the preset time for report printing If a power failure time is longer than 12 hours the DR recorder stops report making even
84. automatic report printing is turned on If the power failure time covers the given period of report making no report for that period is made Handling of Faulty Data If data being computed contain any faulty data the DR recorder treats the data as summarized in the following table depending on the type of computing and faulty data Type of Faulty Data Average Minimum Maximum Instantaneous Value Sum Positive overflow Excluded from computing Negative overflow Excluded from computing Channels included in Excluded from measurement set toSKIP computing No channel included Excluded from in measurement computing Error Excluded from computing Output of data disabled Excluded from computing Included in computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from data Type of Data Positive overflow Negative overflow Channels included in measurement set to SKIP No channel included in measurement Error the result of computing computing Included in computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from the result of computing computing Excluded from computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from the result of computing computing Excluded from computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from the result of computing computing Excluded from computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from the result of computing computing Excluded from computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from the result of computing computing S The DR recorder
85. be used whereas with R1 option is installed two external output relays transfer contact can be used These relays will be operated when an alarm occurs For details concerning their settings and their relation with alarms refer to page 2 15 2 16 Fail Output When R1 option is installed one external output relay transfer contact is used for fail output This relay will change to the de energized status when a failure of the recorder occurs T Usually In case of failure In case of power OFF 2 IN 5 NO C NC NO NC NO NC Chart End Output When R1 option is installed one external output relay transfer contact is used for chart end outout When the chart has only 2cm or less paper the CHART indicator at the right of the display will light and recording will stop The relay will change to the energized status Usually In case of Chart end In case of power OFF NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC Controlling Recording Functions by Remote Control The recording functions can be controlled by the input of up to 12 contact signals when R1 option is installed You can choose one of the following operations for each of the 12 signals The remote control function can be one of the events of the event action function described on the previous page Alarm acknowledge Alarm reset Timer reset Recording start stop Manual printout Digital printout Message printout Message display Chan
86. below Set the event action function if you want to reset the results after computation is carried out for a certain period of time then resume computation 1 Set TIMER RST for the MFUNC KEY 1 event 2 Set MATH START for the same MFUNC KEY 1 event 3 Set MATH RESET for TIMER 1 event 4 Set the mode for TIMER No 1 to RELATIVE and TIME to 00 01 00 After the above settings have been made press the MFUNCI key Timer 1 will be reset according to the above steps 1 and 2 then computation starts After elapse of one hour computation results will be reset according to step 3 but computation will still continue When a further hour elapses computation results will be reset The above operations will be carried out repeatedly until computation is stopped For a detailed description of the event action function refer to 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions page 9 1 Refer to pages 2 9 6 2 and 6 3 for a description of timers Status display during computation The following status symbols are displayed in the sub display 2 lowest display section A Computation is in progress EA Incomplete measurement has occurred If this status occurs frequently reduce the number of equations or reduce the measurement period The number of equations may be too large for computation to be carried out within the specified measurement period Restrictions during computation The following settings cannot be made while computation is in progress
87. can be entered here using up to 60 characters for each line for DR130 or 80 characters for each line for DR231 DR241 and thus up to 300 characters for DR130 or 400 characters for DR231 DR241 for the entire header Characters and numerals can be selected from the menu The default setting is all spaces Entering a Title One title can be set The configurable number of characters is 1 to 32 Characters and numerals can be selected from the menu The default setting is all spaces Inserting Deleting a Character or Numeral Press the PRINT DEL key to delete a set character or numeral The digit at the location of the cursor will be deleted Press the FUNC INS key to insert a character or numeral The digit at the location of the cursor will become a space while all the characters numeral at the right side of the cursor will move one digit to the right IM DR231 01E suonipuo eui Dunes 6 8 Setting Match Time Moving Average Interpolation and Groups Relevant Keys mero DSH neces ESC 222020 TIME O Cre gt Select Setting Parameter CHART TE lTLE MATCH TIME MOVE AVE INTERPOL GROUPT EU set LEwrER 2 Operating Procedure Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu Select set using the keys To escape from a lowe
88. can be specified for each channel Digital printout black Alarm printout red however alarm release mark blue Logging mode purple Recording accuracy DR130 Trend recording 0 2 of recording span measurement accuracy DR231 DR241 Trend recording 0 1 of recording span measurement accuracy Max recording resolution Trend recording 0 1mm Recording interval Recording interval for analog trend recording FIX Min2s and same as measurement interval AUTO Min 2s and Linked to measurement interval and chart speed Digital printout interval for analog trend recording MULTIPLE Specify for each channel from 6 kinds of intervals SINGLE Determined automatically from the chart speed and the number of channels used to print digital values Digital value printing interval in the logging mode MULTIPLE Specify for each channel from 6 kinds of intervals SINGLE Common to all points Recording interval change 2 kinds changes by event action function Recording modes Analog trend mode and logging mode Chart paper feed chart speed 1 to 1500 mm hour chart speed change 2 kinds changes by event action function chart feed method by pulse motor chart feed accuracy 0 1 of length when recording is performed continuously for at least 1000mm does not include elongation or shrinkage of paper Recording start stop Usually starting and stopping of recording is done by means of key operation However this can also be done by the event ac
89. characters each on 5 lines DR231 241 and its recording can be executed by key operation Additional Printouts While recording analog trends it is possible to have engineering units tags scales alarm title messages etc printed along with the measurement values and the date time Engineering units these will be printed in combination wiht the linear scaling function refer to suonounJ page 2 17 Channel No or tag a preset tag can be printed for each channel the selection whether to print the channel No or the tag refer to page 2 8 can also be done Scale printout values corresponding to the scales will be printed refer to page 2 10 Alarm printout alarm information refer to page 2 16 will be printed upon occurrence or release of an alarm You can also set a message to appear upon occurrence of an alarm Title printout A title of up to 32 characters can be printed Furthermore the title can be set to be printed at regular intervals refer to title pitch on page 2 8 Message printout Recording of messages of up to 16 characters can be executed by key operation or event action function Time will also be printed together with the message Up to 20 different messages can be entered Set Up List Printout Each item as described in Ch 10 will be printed Match Time Function You can preset a time when you want recording to start stop using the event action function refer to page 2 18 When this time is reach
90. for DC power Before turning on the power always ground the protective ground terminal so that the grounding resistance is 100 Q or less Do not use the function grounding terminal marked terminal under the power connecting part as the protective grounding terminal For AC power and ground wiring use crimp on lugs for 4mm screws with insulation sleeves Make sure that the crimp on tool must be one specified by the crimp on lugs manufacture and that the crimp on lugs and tool must be matched to the wire size To prevent electric shock do not touch the terminals after wiring Make sure to apply a power switch in the power supply cord with the following characteristics rated power current gt 3 A rated rush current 90 A Connecting procedure for AC power supply 1 Check that the power switch is turned off 2 Remove the cover protecting the power terminals 3 Connect the power supply wires and the protecting ground wire to the power terminals 4 Replace the cover Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC free power supply operating supply voltage 90 to 250 V AC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption About 130 VA max Power terminals Protective ground wire Power supply wires 3 22 IM DR231 01E 3 6 Connecting the Power Cable and Turning the Power ON OFF Connecting procedure for DC power supply 1 Check that the power switch is turned off 2 Remove the co
91. keys and indicators to carry out the operation ed LCD Cru The procedure is explained by a flow diagram For the meaning of each operation refer to the example below The operating procedures are given with the assumption that you are not familiar with the operation Thus it may not be necessary to carry out all the steps when changing settings Explanation Describes settings and restrictions relating to the operation IM DR231 01E 10 IM DR231 01E Contents Foreword secs oak aA anes ae Pa dee eine tn BR 1 Checking the Contents of the Package ssssssssssssseeeeete ettet teet 3 Safety Precautions ee VERI IURE tna e etes e 7 How to Use this Manuals ic se eee eee d e beide tue le tae ee rete 8 Conventions Used in this Manual sse tentent nter ttes 9 List of Menus and Set up Data occ cssessessesseesnesnscsnesneesscsnsenscuscsnecuscsscsuseuecseesuseuesseesuecseeenecueeaneeneaneees 14 Chapter 1 System Configuration Ia CAboutDARWIN za52525 5 diete bn cer nee hen od cene dr t aded ene aer een de niet 1 1 1 2 Names of Parts ID du ADIqe Chapter 2 Functions 2 1 Display Functions 2 2 Measurement Input FunctiOrns EE TE rt e irae pes 2 3 2 3 gt Recording Euncti ns e dedos ede moe eer da n S REIR 2 5 24 Alarm Funct On o eoo mg een ERROR HR aaa ie eee 2 14 2 5 Sta
92. mm larger than that of the left stop No decimal points are allowed If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A30 Partially Expanded Recording PARTIAL This setting specifies whether to carry out partially expanded recording and if so which percentage of the recording span will be compressed and the corresponding boundary value If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A30 Selecting Partial Recording ON OFF ON Partial recording will be carried out OFF Partial recording will not be carried out The default setting is OFF Specifying the Compressed Part and Boundary Value RATE This setting specifies which percentage 1 to 99 of the full recording span will be compressed The default value is 50 Boundary value This setting specifies the boundary value which corresponds to the previous set compressed part The setting lies within the recording span but when linear scaling is being used the setting lies within the left right scale range The default value is 0 Note If boundary values are to be set for succeeding channels the decimal point is handled as shown below If succeeding channels are set the decimal point position of boundary values when the measurement range for each channel setting is diff
93. of 2 14 8 2 REFLASH Reflashing ee 2 15 10 10 POLE ASC eiecti ce e ete bee 2 14 to 2 16 TeSet iret thiet nil C UIT E ERR 2 16 8 4 9 15 Settitig ose pe IER HERE UHR 6 11 8 1 trend recording upon occurrence 2 10 10 4 Type ordo ves alten ees se ALIAE 2 14 8 2 upper limit high 2 14 8 2 See also Alarm output 3 3 18 4 12 8 3 9 17 EE 4 2 4 3 Ambient temperature and humidity 3 2 4 13 4 14 Analog Trend Mode sse 2 5 2 8 2 16 6 2 6 3 ANDIOR M M 2 15 10 10 ASCII conversion 11 18 to 11 20 Asterisk for the meaning of excess of alarm or message records H 6 11 7 3 Attenuation 5 9 eerte e ati 2 4 AUTO for recording interval See also Display 2 9 6 2 teet dei tertia See Moving average B Backup of set val s eee 14 15 Bargraph Display 2 1 4 9 Basic Setting SET UP sese Chapter 10 B d rate 5d iecore iiie 3 12 3 13 14 16 14 17 Boundary value for partial expanded recording 2 11 6 7 Buffer Mr 6 11 9 17 Alarm ecce ROTARUM TEES AERE 6 11 Cl aring e EC ERROR E 9 17 Digital ice 2 5 to 2 8 6 9 7 1 10 5 10 6 number of columns for sssesseeee 2 8 10
94. previous page HEADER OQ ENTER TITLE Explanation ENTER HEADER LINE No 1 ENTER 12345 4 LINE1 ___ a ____ 1 M iene 49 8 0123456789 ABC KLT 4 SET OK ESC TITLE ____ 1968 4 0123456789 ABC KLT 4 GET OK ESC gt Entering a Message MESSAGE No selection of the message No Up to 20 messages can be entered 5 01 to 20 entering the message The message contents can be entered here using up to 16 characters Characters and numerals can be selected from the menu The default setting is all spaces COPY copying messages The contents of an entered message message No at the left side of the setting can be copied to another message number at the right side of the setting You cannot copy to the same message number Printing out a message A message can be printed out on the occurrence of an alarm refer to 6 5 on page 6 11 for details using the FUNC menu refer to 7 3 on page 7 3 for details or using the event action function refer to 9 1 on page 9 1 for details Displaying a message A message can be displayed on the main display using the even action function Entering a Header HEADER LINE No selection of the header line One header can consist of up to five lines LINE 1 to 5 entering one line of the header The header contents
95. printout message display changing chart speed recording interval group trend recording Input signal No voltage contact open collector driven by a TTL or transistor Rated voltage 0 to 5 V DC input impedance 4 7kO 5 V DC pull up Maximum input voltage allowable range 2to 7 V DC Input conditions ON voltage 0 5V max 30mA DC Leakage current at OFF state 0 25mA max Duration of input signal one second or longer input signal detection internal approx 0 5 seconds Dielectric strength Between the output terminal and ground 1500V AC 50 60Hz for one minute IM DR231 01E 14 19 suoneoyi2ods 14 3 Dimensional Drawings DR130 Number of input channels 30 Unit mm Rear Panel AC power supply model
96. prints the results of computing as shown in the following table if they are special 2 o Printout Format E sk Q c XXXXXX I O00000 Output of data disabled If data being computed contain faulty data the DR recorder prints each digital data item beginning with an or x as the status indication 1 Power failure x In the case of a power failure the DR recorder prints the time for report making also beginning with an x 2 Channels included in measurement set to SKIP no channel included in measurement error output of disabled data x IM DR231 01E 10 33 10 12 Working with the Report Function 3 Positive overflow negative overflow If more than one faulty data item occurs at the same time the DR recorder prints them while giving priority to a data item with a smaller number among the numbers noted above Notes on daylight savings time When the function to shift the time scale between standard time and daylight savings time is specified the report for the day to shift from standard time to the daylight savings time seemingly includes data for only a 23 hour day and at the same time the report for the day to shift daylight savings time to standard time seemingly includes the data for a 25 hour day If you specify the time to make a report at the same time as the shift from standard time to daylight savings time or vice versa the report will be generated based o
97. r Number of pieces of data per channel Data No in effect when the trigger event took place Always 1 if saving was carried out without DIRECT or PRE TRIGGER settings made MODEL STAND ALONE 2396 07 07 00 00 00 LENGTH 20000 gt SAMPLE 10 Sec TRIG DATA No 1 ENTER key gt CHANNEL 001 60 gt ON m COIN BREE RRR BERR RRR BERR eee gt ONm 0O31000000M0O00 0 IL O 0 measured data A computed data L Status of channel Nos 001 to 030 m Data available 1 No data available Displaying recording the read data To display or record the read data it is necessary to assign the read data to computation channels A01 to A30 using the SET menu To view or record read data you must set the data you want displayed on a computation channel for example set CALC MO001 on 01 to make computations To make computations select MATH START from the menu shown either by a momentary press or a 3 second press of the FUNC key depending on the settings given in Section 10 8 Setting FUNC FUNC3 Menu See Section 12 2 Setting a Computation Equation and Section 12 4 Starting Stopping Computation for more information This assignment is still possible even if the instrument is not equipped with the optional computation function Assign t
98. relay end relay Set it under the condition that the first relay number end relay number First relay number The first character is a unit number For the second and third characters a number from 01 to 60 can be set but the effective setting range is as shown in the following examples Check which slot the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted in using its mounted position Slot numbers are set in the order of slot 0 slot 1 as viewed facing the rear Ex 1 When the alarm module is mounted in slot 3 31 to 40 Ex 2 The DI DO module is mounted in slot4 41 to 42 Endrelay number The same settings of the second or third characters in the first relay number The default setting is 001 01 Selection of energizing deenergizing ENERG energizing DE EN deenergizing The default setting is ENERG Setting Relay Hold HOLD This is a menu displayed for the A4 option or R1 option However the internal switches are set simultaneously with relays OFF No relays internal switches hold ON all relays internal switches hold The default setting is OFF Note n order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 24 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 24 IM DR231 01E 10 11 dN Las sbumes oiseg 10 5 Setting Burn out Reference Junction Compens
99. resistance The voltage at the DC power supply connector may be lower than the operating supply voltage range due to the wire resistance Data indicates xxxxxx Input module connected improperly Connect input properly Recorder does not work even with Key lock not released Disable key lock functions in setup mode operation key pressed Recorder set in remote mode Set recorder in local mode Other cause Contact your nearest sales representative 13 4 IM DR231 01E 13 4 Error Codes If servicing is necessary or if the recorder does not operate correctly even though the following corrective actions have been taken contact your nearest Sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual Error Code Error Corrective Action 001 System error Contact your nearest Sales representative 002 Set data out of range Set numeric data correctly 003 Time set incorrectly Set time correctly 004 Channels set incorrectly Set channels correctly 005 Invalid setting function parameter Set parameter correctly 006 Invalid character string Set character string correctly 007 Invalid type of input for input module Set the type of input correctly 008 Invalid range setting for input module Set range correctly 009 Numeric values out of range Set numeric values correctly 011 Attempted to do manual header list or Install new chart paper
100. respective channels The values that are shown and recorded are not those of the voltage and current being actually measured through each channel but the values of the parameters you set here A combination of parameters being measured is fixed for each group of channels 1 2 3 4 and 5 6 within the same module For example setting channel 1 to P1 active power 1 sets channel 2 to VAI apparent power 1 In addition the configurable parameters being measured varies depending on the wiring method selected See the lists on the next page for more information 2 seaulq ueds jndu ay Buas The respective mnemonics in the lists should be interpreted as noted below Vi i 1 2 3 effective voltage Ii G 1 2 3 effective current V13 V1 V3 2 I13 112L3 2 VO 1 2 3 3 IO 11 12 13 3 Pi i21 2 3 active power Vari i21 2 3 reactive power P13 P1 P3 Var13 PF1 PF3 PO P1 P2 P3 Var 0 Varl Var2 Var3 VAi i21 2 3 apparent power PFi i21 2 3 power factor VAI3 VAI VA3 PF13 132 132 2 13 VAO VAI VA2 VA3 PFO AO PHi i21 2 3 phase FREQ frequency PH13 tan Var13 P13 PHO tan Var0 PO IM DR231 01E 5 7 5 3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel Single phase two wire configuration CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6
101. see page 10 16 Enter a password A CODE NUMBER and then press the ENTER key to actuate the keylock functions The KEY LOCK OFF menu then appears Enter the FUNC menu select KEY LOCK OFF and then enter a password A CODE NUMBER Press the ENTER key to release the keylock functions The menu returns to KEY LOCK ON To set a password see page 10 16 When the keylock functions are actuated the KEYLOCK lights up Message printout MSG PRINT Prints out messages For details see Section 7 3 Starting Message Printing on page 7 3 Select a message from the corresponding code 01 to 20 IM DR231 01E suonoung 194 0 pue uonounJ uonoyAue 3 9 4 Clearing Alarm Message Buffers and Displaying and Initializing Module Communications Information ALM_BUF_CLEAR BE OD S gt Select Function item AEE MSG BUF CLEAR MODULE INFT kenocd OD cuart ser Entren mrunc 2 Press the FUNC key for three seconds to enter the FUNC3 menu To enter the FUNC menu from the RANGE ALARM CHART or SET SET3 menu press the DISP key Select set using the keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept There may be some menus that are not displayed due to basic settings as described in Chapter 10
102. seen 9 17 T Tag 2 13 6 9 10 4 obser stonon ORE C ERROR eR 2 8 6 9 10 4 Number of character of sss 2 8 10 4 StOp en eee reete eate i vn eto 7 1 Termitial COVED nb 3 16 ThermocoUple 2m er REPERI NU RAE E Rd 2 3 5 3 TIME m de en an e antes e s RECHNER EI 6 3 Rt eR eR e tendere 2 9 Timer P i 2 9 6 3 Timer TESOL era OR DRE EORR NDA 2 9 9 14 9 15 Title title printouts 2 6 to 2 8 2 13 6 15 Trend recording eene 2 5 to 2 7 2 10 6 2 meth d f a S c Ed ee eek vera cecus 2 10 10 4 gpl 11 4 11 9 THIS Sr fecording ote e IRR I RR NOTER RUE RUE Tei See also Alarm trend recording upon occurence 2 10 Tro bleshoOtIng tinet eor EA et tede 13 4 U Urit NO eden ts 4 2 to 4 4 Universal input module essere 4 3 17 Upper limit alarm eerte See Alarm V Value R RS 2 6 2 7 2 10 Printout ec aaa ae 2 8 Reference point for eese d Log SR VERE See also scale check mark 2 6 to 2 8 Vertical printing sse See Recording direction Volta se level ER 5 3 W E ERES 3 24 WARNING for safety precautions esee 7 hun 3 1
103. set to either use Internal RJC INT or External RJC EXT per channel Burnout function can be set OFF per channel or it can be selected in which direction the trend line will move if burnout occurs right or left Resistance Temperature Detector Measurements can be done after selecting the type of resistance temperature detector RTD per channel The available 17 types are Pt100 1mA Pt100 2mA JPt100 1mA JPt100 2mA Pt50 2mA Nil00 1mA SAMA Nil00 1mA DIN Nil20 1mA J263 B Cul0GE Cul0L amp N CulOWEED Cul0BAILEY Pt100 1mA high resolution Pt100 2mA high resolution JPt100 1mA high resolution and JPt100 2mA high resolution Contact Input The type of contact input can be selected from voltage level input or contact input and recording can be set ON or OFF per channel In case of the voltage level input a voltage level up to 2 4 V results in recording OFF whereas a voltage level of 2 4V or more results in recording ON AC Voltage Current The effective voltage effective current active power reactive power apparent power frequency power factor and phase angle can be measured The measuring range is common to all terminals The input terminals of the module with this input mode are not consistent with a setup screen in terms of the channel number Skipping Input Channels This function allows skipping measurement recording and display of channels you are not using Measurement recording and display will not be don
104. setup list printout at the end of chart paper 030 There may be a module that cannot be set Re set ranges or channels with in channels with continuous ranges continuous ranges 031 There may be an invalid module in channels Change channels in which with continuous ranges continuous ranges are set 040 Reference channel number greater than Change the reference channel number that of the channel for interchannel differential computations 041 Skipped range in the reference channel for Change the range in the reference channel interchannel differential computations 042 RPJC range in the reference channel for Change the range in the reference channel interchannel differential computations 043 SCALE in range setting in the reference Change the range in the reference channel channel for interchannel differential computations 044 The reference channel for interchannel Change the reference channel number differential computations does not exist 045 The left and right spans are identical Change the scale setpoint 046 The left and right scale values are identical Change the scale setpoint value 060 The alarm setting was made in the channel Change ranges where SKIP was set 061 The alarm was set to a channel with ranges Change ranges where alarm setting cannot be set 062 The alarm setpoint is out of range in a Set correct alarm setpoint channel with continuous ranges 063 Relay number set incorrectly Set relay number correctly
105. speed Recording interval for digital printouts This recording interval can be selected from MULTIPLE or SINGLE MULTIPLE Six preset recording intervals Timer 1 to 6 can be set and a recording interval can be selected per channel The timer setting can be selected from relative and absolute Relative time Time will be counted from the point of turning the power switch ON or of resetting the timer Each time the preset length of time is reached and thus when time is up recording will start Absolute time A reference time is set and from that time recording will start at preset time intervals each time when time is up SINGLE The logging interval is decided automatically depending on the chart speed and the number of columns for digital printouts Recording interval in logging mode This recording interval can be selected from MULTIPLE or SINGLE MULTIPLE Same as for the analog trend mode SINGLE From the above mentioned six preset recording intervals the interval set as Timer 1 will become the recording interval Resetting the Recording Interval Timer Reset This function will reset the elapsed time of the above mentioned MULTIPLE recording interval to zero Usually recording will start according to the recording intervals but when you reset the elapsed time using this function the results are the same as for time up IM DR231 01E 2 3 Recording Functions Recording Span The maximum value and the mi
106. te te le d ge ne be de nt c eds eee dee Setting Displaying and Recording Alarms 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches 8 27 Alarm Display and Prin tg ue o Event Action Function and Other Functions 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions ic ics desl coco tei e 9 1 92 CODyIDg ier een rmn ERE n RO EU RR 9 12 9 3 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Reset Timer Reset Computation Keylock and Message Printout 9 14 9 4 Clearing Alarm Message Buffers and Displaying and Initializing Module Communications Information A 9 5 Fail Chart End Output and Remote Control Signal Input eere 9 18 9 6 Summer Wintet TIMES eena eee a A e nie eer a a ee a a eaae 9 19 Basic Settings SET UP 10 1 Selecting Adjustment of Dot Printing Position or Scan Interval eee 10 1 10 2 Setting Recording Formiat nete pte ee dre todo ER RERO RO n de ERE Re RS 10 3 10 3 Select Alarm Interval Hysteresis Hold A D Converter Integration Time Filter 10 7 10 4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal Switch esee 10 9 10 5 Setting Burn out Reference Junction Compensation essent 10 12 10 6 Setting Recording Colors aee eie ete ug ote too dac ety i Tee rette 10 14 10 7 Se t ng Key Lock e e ates dessin Ee bn e e ped ib ee eve ER 10 15 10 8 Setting FUNG EUNCS Menu r
107. the TIMER field Configure the DR recorder so an event occurs every hour with reference to the hour 00 00 Main menu item SET Submenu items TIMER ENTER TIMER No 1 ENTER 123456 4 1 TIMER MODE ABSOLUTE ENTER Absolute time 4 1 TIME 1h ENTER One hour interval 4 _ Sets the t REF TIME 00 00 ENTER reference time SET OK configuration complete ENTER Setting the EVENT ACTION fields Configure the DR recorder so it clears computed values at the time set on the timer Main menu item SET __ Submenu items LOGIC ENTER LOGIC BOX No 1 ENTER 01 to 30 4 EVT TIMER 1 ENTER Selects timer 1 4 Resets the ACT MATH CLEAR ENTER computed value SET OK configuration complete ENTER Computation equation CALC TLOG SUM 001 To start computing press the FUNC key and select MATH START from the FUNC menu The values and the behaviors of the event action functions when computing is done with the above configuration are as follows of computing 8 00 9 00 10 00 11 00 00 00 13 00 14 00 15 00 16 00 17 00 l l End of setting Reference time Start of computing Resetting of computed value IM DR231 01E 12 11 uoneinduio IPPON LIN 12 5 Setting Actions to be Carried out in Case of Co
108. the currently selected mode is shown for a specific display Status Display Indicators at the right side of the display will light up to show that recording is in progress refer to page 2 5 alarms are occuring refer to page 2 14 keys are locked refer to page 2 18 and chart needs to be replaced refer to page 2 19 Remote Local Status Display The status of remote local control will be shown on sub display 2 Keys cannot be operated in remote control IM DR231 01E 2 1 Display Functions Display for Setting the Type of Input Computation and Recording Conditions Menus for setting each of the following functions will be displayed measurement input functions refer to page 2 3 recording functions refer to page 2 5 alarm functions refer to page 2 14 computation functions refer to page 2 17 event action function key lock function and external in output function refer to page 2 18 19 Display for Setting Fundamental Functions Menus for performing fundamental settings will be displayed 2 2 IM DR231 01E 2 2 Measurement Input Functions Input Type DC Voltage Measurements can be done after selecting the measurement range per channel The minimum range is 20mV the maximum range is 50V Thermocouple Measurements can be done after selecting the type of thermocouple per channel The available types are R S B K E J T L U N W and KPvsAUTFE Reference Junction Compensation RJC can be
109. the information recognized as the system module REAL Displays the real module information when the recognized system module is replaced by another one or removed If the SYSTEM or REAL module has displayed different information and if the recorder is still used an operation error may occur or the recorder may display measured values incorrectly If such problems develop contact your rearest sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual The information on individual modules is displayed as follows Module Display ID inside the display Description Input module INPUT 00 to 3F DI DO module REMOTE 57 With R1 option Alarm module RELAY 5C to 5F With A4 option Communication module COMM 48 to 4F With communication option Module not installed FF Invalid module installed FE Module error XXXXXX Displays error code 80 to FF Displaying communications information COMM INF When the communication module is recognized as a system module communications information is displayed For details on the communication information see Section 3 4 Connecting the Interface Cables on page 3 11 or the separate DR130 DR231 DR232 DR241 DR242 Communication Interface User s Manual IM DR231 11E Initialization RAM INIT This initializes information other than the basic information set in Chapter 10 or calibration set in Chapter 11 For details on initial setting see the appropriate sect
110. the same error occurs again even though you turn on the power switch contact your nearest sales representative RESET ERROR An error occurs between the main unit Same as above and communication module 13 6 IM DR231 01E 13 5 Calibration Overview We recommend that you calibrate at least once a year to assure its measurement accuracy When calibrating please contact your nearest Sales representative at its address on the back cover of this manual Press and hold the MODE key and then turn on the power switch to place the recorder in the calibration mode Select the module to calibrate the recorder on a module basis After completing the calibration turn off the power and then turn it back on when resuming the measurements CAUTION You can use the DISPLAY mode only for a calibration adjustment If it is maladjusted the recorder may become faulty For details please contact your nearest Sales representative Calibration needs selection of a module and the calibration mode Once the module has been selected it is no longer selected again as long as the calibration END mode is not executed Calibration mode CAL EXEC mode This mode enables specified ranges to be calibrated DISPLAY mode This mode enables current calibrated values to be displayed END mode This mode enables calibrated values to be stored in the internal nonvolatile memory and terminates the calibration mode If ABORT is sele
111. to 500 The set value 1 corresponds to about 0 1 mm of the dot printing position Adjustment of Full scale Position FULL If a line composed of printed dots shifts from the scale line at the right end of the chart have the line of dots just overlap the scale end line by adjusting the FULL setting The configurable range is as follows DR130 1400 1600 DR231 241 2400 2600 The set value 1 corresponds to about 0 1 mm of the dot printing position Selection of Scan Interval SCAN INTVL Select 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 20 30 and 60 seconds as the interval The default setting is 2 seconds The shortest selectable scan interval varies with the setting of the number of input channels A D converter integration time or filter ON OFF For details see chapter 12 Note n order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 24 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 24 10 2 IM DR231 01E 10 2 Setting Recording Format Relevant Keys RECORD ESO SETUP RECORD russo GO INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter SUN VIVI PRN ADJ SCAN INTVL RECORD ALARM A D INT KEYLOCR cuart ser enter Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display
112. when the recorder is in the default state 9 14 IM DR231 01E 9 3 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Reset Timer Reset Computation Keylock and Message Printout Explanation Any of the following functions are executed by pressing the ENTER key After that the recorder returns to the operation mode Alarm acknowledgment ALARM ACK When the alarm display hold ALARM HOLD on page 10 8 is set to ON the alarm acknowledgment menu appears For the alarm display hold functions see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 16 Alarm reset ALARM RST When the relay hold function on page 10 11 is set to ON the alarm reset menu appears For the alarm reset functions see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 16 Timer reset TIMER RESET For the timer reset functions see Section 2 3 Recording Functions on page 2 9 Computation start MATH START Starts computation For details refer to Chapter 12 Executing Computation Computation clear start MATH CLR START Clears computation results then re starts computation Computation stop MATH STOP Stops computation Clearing Incomplete Measurement Status MATH ACK Clears the status indication displayed due to incomplete measurement which occurred during computation Keylock function KEY LOCK ON For the keylock functions see Section 2 6 Other Functions on page 2 18 The KEY LOCK ON is displayed after selecting the keylock
113. 0 1A resistive load 250V AC 2A resistive load 30V DC 2A resistive load Dielectric Strength Between the output terminal and ground 2300V AC 50 60Hz for one minute Failure Output using DI DO when equipped with R1 Function The output relay for a failure becomes de energized when an error is detected in this instrument Contact mode Transfer contact normal open common normal close type Energize de energize not switchable Contact rating 250V DC 0 1A resistive load 250V AC 2A resistive load 30V DC 2A resistive load Dielectric Strength Between the output terminal and ground 2300V AC 50 60Hz for one minute 14 18 IM DR231 01E 14 2 Specifications of Optional Functions Chart end Output using DI DO when equipped with R1 Function The output relay for chart end becomes enerigized when the recorder runs out of chart paper Contact mode Transfer contact normal open common normal close type Energize de energize not switchable Contact rating 250V DC 0 1A resistive load 250V AC 2A resistive load 30V DC 2A resistive load Dielectric Strength Between the output terminal and ground 2300V AC 50 60Hz for one minute Remote control of recorder functions using DI DO when equipped with R1 Function The following functions can be controlled by contact input alarm acknowledge alarm reset timer reset starting stopping recording manual printout digital printout message
114. 00 000 10000 000 10000 000 R07 A02 INST 200000 00 9999 99 9999 99 200000 00 RO8 A03 SUM 2 400000E 01 4 800000E 01 1 000000E 0 1 000000E 00 1 000000E 00 R09 R10 Enhanced format section of report R60 list of the result of computing at respective preset times Standard format section of report results of computing on a report channel basis IM DR231 01E 10 29 10 12 Working with the Report Function Time to Make Report START TIME Set the time to make a report in the format day of month time Define the day of month field within a 01 28 range and the time field within a 00 23 range Hourly reports The DR recorder makes reports every hour on the hour 1 00 2 00 23 00 24 00 For cumulative summation it resets the cumulative sum at a preset time Daily reports The DR recorder makes reports at a preset time or times For cumulative summation it resets the cumulative sum at the preset time of a day Monthly reports The DR recorder makes reports at a preset time of the day Report Channels There are sixty report channels from R01 to R60 DR231 DR241 or thirty report channels from R01 to R30 DR130 You can assign channels for measuring objects being computed or computation channels and the type of computing on a report channel basis When making a report of computed data let computing start before letting the report making start Types of Computing Menu Item Data Item for Computin
115. 001 01 AC iPh3W gt Select Channel No Submenu items 001 01 ACAIPh3W _ gt gt 001 01 1 gt Select Channel 001 01 SCL AC 1Ph3W Reaching the step showing the message SET OK confirms the latest settings Press twice 001 01 SCL AC 1Ph3W 2k 20k 200k 4 RNG 250V 0 5A P13 250V 0 5A 250V 5A 25V 0 5A 25V 5A 4 RNG 250V 0 5A P13 P1 P2 P3 P13 4 SPAN 125 0 125 0W Span limit 125 0 to 125 0W 4 SCL 0 00 100 00 4 SET OK configuration complete ENTER D ENTER ENTER ENTER ESC IM DR231 01E 5 3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel Explanation Setting the Channel Number This procedure sets the channel number for which you want to show and record the values of a parameter selected from the effective voltage effective current active power reactive power apparent power frequency power factor and phase angle which were calculated using the measured data Therefore it does not correlate with the terminals of an input module In this procedure determine from which channel starting channel to which channel ending channel you want to include in your configuration Starting Channel Number The first three digits on the main display constitute the starting channel number The first digit is the un
116. 1 2 3 13 0 Phase PHi i 1 2 3 13 0 80 0 to 80 0 deg 80 0 to 80 0 deg 80 0 to 80 0 deg 80 0 to 80 0 deg Frequency FREQ 45 00 to 65 00 Hz 45 00 to 65 00 Hz 45 00 to 65 00 Hz 45 00 to 65 00 Hz Ranges of Indication Measured Data Item 25 V 0 5A 25 V bA 250 V 0 5 A 250 V 5 A Effective voltage 0 00 to 26 25 V rms 0 00 to 26 25 V rms 0 0 to 262 5 V rms 0 0 to 262 5 V rms Vi i 1 2 3 13 0 Effective current 0 0000 to 0 5250 Arms 0 000 to 5 250 Arms 0 0000 to 0 5250 A rms 0 000 to 5 250 A rms liG 1 2 3 13 0 Active power 13 75 to 13 75 W 137 5 to 137 5 W 137 5 to 137 5 W 1375 to 1375 W P1 P2 P3 Active power 27 50 to 27 50 W 275 0 to 275 0 W 275 0 to 275 0 W 2750 to 2750 W P13 Active power 41 25 to 41 25 W 412 5 to 412 5 W 412 5t0412 5 W 4125 to 4125 W PO Apparent power 0 00 to 13 75 0 0to 137 5 VA 0 0 to 137 5 VA 0 to 1375 VA VA1 VA2 VA3 Apparent power 0 00 to 27 50 VA 0 0to 275 0 VA 0 0 to 275 0 VA 0 to 2750 VA VA13 Apparent power 0 00 to 41 25 0 0 to 412 5 VA 0 0 to 412 5 VA 0 to 4125 VA VAO Reactive power Varl Var2 Var3 0 00 to 13 75 Var 0 0 to 137 5 Var 0 0 to 137 5 Var 0 to 1375 Var Reactive power Var13 0 00 to 27 50 Var 0 0 to 275 0 Var 0 0 to 275 0 Var 0 to 2750 Var Reactive power Var0 0 00 to 41 25 Var 0 0 to 412 5 Var 0 0 to 412 5 Var 0 to 4125 Var
117. 10 ENTER 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 4 ESC WRITE START End of setting Saving files repeatedly using the event action function The action in the event action function must be configured as MEMRY WR_TRIG before you can perform this task SET ERI T Q MEMORY ENTER MEMORY WRITE ENTER CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE T INIT WRITE MODE REPEAT ENTER DIRECT TRIGER REPEAT STOP 4 WRITE file ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 WRITE FILE DDDD ENTER i WRITE SAMPLE INTVL ENTER INTVL 1min 2min 5min 10min LOGIC 1 WRITE LENGTH 1k ENTER 10 20 30 40 50 100 200 300 400 500 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 10k 20k 30k 40k 50k 4 WRITE PRE TRIG 10 ENTER 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 4 ESC WRITE START End of setting IM DR231 01E 11 3 ejeg dn jas pue payndwog peanseejy 11 1 Saving Measured and Computed Data Main menu Stopping saving SET ON MEMORY ENTER MEMORY WRITE ENTER CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 WRITE MODE STOP ENTER DIRECT TRIGER REPEAT STOP 4 WRITE STOP YES ENTER NO YES 4 Main menu WRITE STOP Ena of setting ESC Example of configuration of event action SET d Lower menu LOGIC ENTER LOGIC BOX NO 01 ENTER CSKA EV
118. 10 32 O C REP RECALL START gt Starting report printing D page 10 30 m KEY LOCK ONG Keylock page 9 14 C O MSG PRINT gt Starting message printing page 7 3 FUNC3 menu S U LIST START Printing set up lists page 7 4 aI ALM BUF CLEAR gt clearing alarm buffer aD 16 MSG BUF CLEAR Clearing message buffer page 9 O 16 MODULE INF gt Displaying module information page 9 CSKA n COMM Displaying communications information C O cL RE SYSTEM Structuring system modules ID RAM INIT initializing RAM page 9 16 REP PRINT STOP Stopping report printing page 10 e SET UP menu SETUP PRN ADJ Selecting adjustment of dot printing page 10 1 CSKA SCAN INTVL Selecting scan interval page 10 1 CSKA RECORD Setting recording format page 10 3 CSKA MATH Setting action to be carried out in case of computation C O error and setting the units for TLOG SUM page 12 12 FLOPPY Saving reading set up data chapter 11 CY lt REPORT gt setting report format page 10 27 CSKA ALARM Selecting alarm interval hysteresis hold page 10 7 lt INTG selecting A D converter integration time CSKA page 10 7 FI LTERo Selecting filter page 10 7 OQ RELAY Setting operation mode of relay internal switch a page 10 9 BURN OUT Setting burn out page 10 12 CSKA RIC Setting reference junction compensation page 10 12 C lt COLOR Setting recording
119. 10 4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal Switch Relevant Keys SETUP RELAY gt Select Setting Parameter RECORD ALARM A D INTG FILTER RELAYT Operating Procedure Main menu SETUP p AD RELAY o AS recens ESC Coxe Jern C INS DEL cuart ser enter w ruwc 2 Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O Q keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Lower menu ENTER RELAY SET REFLASH REFLASH AND ENERG HOLD REFLASH RELAY No 1 OFF 123456 4 a BEFEASH RELAY No 1 OFF OFF 0 CX REFLASH RELAY No 1 001 4 REFLASH RELAY No 1 001 RELAY SET AND 4 AND RELAY S NONE 4 CX AND RELAY S NONE RELAY SET ENERG 4 RELAY 001 01 ENERG eK 4 RELAY 001 01 ENERG ENERG DE EN RELAY SET HOLD 4 RELAY HOLD OFF OFF ON ENTER D ENTER REFLASH SET D ENTER ENTER E
120. 10 8 REINES 2 17 Display sese id eee ete t 2 1 Eyent action jose vaso a od FORERO SEATS 2 18 9 1 to 9 11 External input output esee 2 19 Interpolation ee e rsen eee eene 2 11 6 17 Key lock keylock 2 18 9 14 10 15 10 16 Match Time function 2 13 6 17 9 9 Measurement input sess 2 3 2 4 ReCording ssc ee rdi ee VERE S 2 5 to 2 13 Relay hold See also HOLD NON HOLD 2 16 10 11 Function Grounding Terminal function ground terminal ER 7 3 11 3 13 3 35 Full scale position 10 2 USES ME 5 huh 13 2 13 3 replacement eto ERR HORDE Rees 13 2 13 3 GP IB anterfaee ueste s o a REA ii 3 2 20 3 11 GPIB module csse on RS ania uae NERO ORE 4 3 11 Gic See Bargraph display Grounding protective grounding essere M 7 3 17 3 22 3 23 3 28 3 34 3 35 G oup settini ceo 2 12 6 17 10 4 Group trend recording sss 2 10 9 10 10 4 H Handshake 3 12 14 16 Handle for carrying esse See Carrying handle Header printout printing sse 2 13 6 15 7 2 Heat sink Aseissa 1 2 to 1 4 High limit alarm retenti ennt enn See alarm High resolution yen a a aa 14 2 HOLED NON HOEL
121. 14 15 14 2 Specifications of Optional Functions GP IB Communication when equipped with C1 Electrical and mechanical specifications conform to IEEE Standard 488 1978 Code ISO ASCII code Address to 15 Functions Talker functions Output of measurement values ASCII binary output of setting parameters ASCII Listener functions Setting of measurement conditions controls of starting and stopping measurement specifying causes of interrupts excluding setting and control of power ON OFF Causes of interrupts Syntax error chart end completion of A D conversion operations of internal timer end of data saving reading incomplete measurement during computation RS 232 C Communication when equipped with C2 Electrical and mechanical specifications conform to standard EIA RS 232 C Connection method point to point Communication method half duplex Synchronization mode Start stop synchronization synchronized by a start and a stop bit Baud rate 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 bps Start bit Fixed at 1 bit Data length 7 or 8 bits selectable Parity Selectable from even odd or none Stop bit 1 or 2 selectable Transmission distance max 15m Connector D sub 25pin Handshake hardware transmission and reception control by DTR RTS CTS signal enabled Software transmission control by XON and XOFF enabled Capacity of receiving buffer 200 bytes Escape sequence f
122. 2 4 Alarm Function Recording Alarm Information Analog Trend Mode When an alarm occurs or releases the occurrence release mark message channel No or tag and time of occurrence release will be printed on the right side of the chart Logging Mode f an alarm occurs the type of alarm will be printed together with the measured value f an alarm occurs or is canceled the alarm occurrence cancellation mark channel No TAG the type of alarm time when the alarm occurs cancels and messages are printed after all the measured values Displaying Alarm Information Alarm Reset Alarm Indicator ALARM Indicator When at least one alarm occurs the ALARM indicator at the right of the display will light Display per Channel In sub display 1 or 2 the alarm statuses of a maximum of 30 channels according to the specifications can be displayed refer to page 2 1 Besides when the measurement value of a channel where an alarm occurred is being displayed the type of alarm will appear between the channel number and the measurement value Channel No Type of alarm Measurement value 001 H 10 000mV Alarm Display Hold Function This function allows the alarm display to remain even when the alarm has already been released This function can be selected ON or OFF and applies to all alarms When the function is set to ON if an alarm occurs the alarm display flashes Alarm Acknowledge Function This function only
123. 2 9 10 14 direction horizontal or vertical printing 2 8 10 5 EXAMPLE e functions Intetv l 2422 obstinate ite impudens Normal NORMAL 2 10 10 4 Partially expanded oe eed 2 11 6 7 La E 2 10 5 3 starting stopping of to start stop 2 10 7 1 to 7 4 starting stopping time of sss 2 6 to 2 8 10 5 ZONES sce ti ederet hs reed eda See also Zone 2 10 6 7 IM DR231 01E Index 5 X3QNI INDEX Re failure or re alarm sss See Alarm reflashing Reference channel for difference between channels 2 17 5 3 Reference junction compensation ssseeeen See RJC REFLASH Reflashing alarm Registration of details set selected with SET UP menu 10 24 RELATIVE relative time esee nr entm or eee veces 2 0 6 3 Relay for alarm output nyaran See Alarm energizing de energizing setting 2 15 10 11 Remote control REMOTE eee 2 19 3 18 9 9 Replacement period for parts essere 13 1 PEN URE 10 27 to 10 34 Reset ZA Tam fod e Re se eme lege See Alarm EIE Rec e EE RR See Timer reset Resistance temperature detector sss See RTD Ribbon cassette iic e as er P e n Re YR RU 4 3 6 to 3 10 e rette eet ee es 2 3 10 13 RRJC OR ONE ENC
124. 2V 6V 20V 50V Pt 1mA PT 7 Enter the rated value in the selected range 8 Press the ENTER key to execute calibration During the calibration the following display appears A D Adjusting gt MODULE No 0 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V 50V Pt imA PT 9 After the calibration is completed the following display appears CALC END gt MODULE No 0 gt AD JUST RANGE 20mV 10 Press the ENTER key IM DR231 01E 13 9 eoueuojuire J pue Punoous e qnou 13 5 Calibration Checking calibrated values in the DISPLAY mode Use this mode only for checking calibrated values In this mode you can adjust a calibrated value but if this value is invalid the instrument may be inoperative For details contact your nearest Sales representative 11 With GS amp 2 select the DISPLAY mode AD JUST MODE DISPLAY gt MODULE No 0 DISPLAY CAL EXEC END 12 Press the ENTER key to display the calibrated value display items The following shows where the universal input modules are calibrated The calibrating procedures for DC V TC DI input modules are those except RTD in universal input modules 13 The calibrated values are displayed as follows 20mV ZERO 1 gt MODULE No 0 gt 14 Press the ENTER key 15 Display the calibrated value display items in the following order Repeat steps 13 and 14 above 20 mV SPAN gt 60 mV ZER
125. 3min 4min 5min 6min 10min 12min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h 6h 8h 12h and 24h The reference time is set by the hour and minutes The default value is 00 hrs 00 min suonipuo Dunes IM DR231 01E 6 3 6 2 Setting the Chart Speed Relevant Keys mero PES neces SET CHART gt Select Setting Parameter ESC GO Cre INS DEL EYL CHART CLOCK Setting Chart Speed 1 Press the CHART key to enter the SET menu Main menu Select set using the O Q keys charr set LEwrER 2 To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Lower menu H CHART ENTER CHART SPEED 100mm H Chart Speed Max 1500mm H 4 GET OK Setting Chart Speed 2 ENTER ESC Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu Select set using the keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting
126. 5 Connecting the Signal Lines To prevent electric shock always make sure that the power supply is turned OFF before connecting When 30VAC or 60VDC and more is applied to the output terminal of the alarm module or the output terminal of the DI DO module use double insulated wires withstand voltage performance more than 2300VAC for those wires which apply 30VAC or 60VDC and more All other wires can be basic insulated withstand voltage performance more than 1350VAC Furthermore use lugs for 4mm screws with insulation sleeves for connecting to the screw terminal Make sure that the crimp on tool must be one specified by the crimp on lugs manufacture and that the crimp on lugs and tool must be matched to the wire size To prevent electric shock do not touch the terminal after wiring and make sure to re apply the cover CAUTION Do not apply an input voltage exceeding the following levels to each terminal of each module Otherwise the internal circuits may be damaged Allowable input voltage Universal or DCV TC DI input module 2 VDC range or less RTD TC and DI CONT 10 VDC 6 to 20 VDC range DI LEVEL 60 VDC DI DO module 2 to 7 VDC Max common mode noise voltage Universal or DCV TC DI input modules 250 VACrms 50 60 Hz Output contact rating for DI DO or Alarm input modules is 250 VDC O 1 A resistive load 250 VAC 2 A resistive load 30 VDC 2 A resistive load The overvol
127. 5 For carriage with a screw shaft Motor DR241 B9233EF 5 For carriage with a screw shaft Motor B9233GR 2 For ribbon cassette Lithium battery DR130 B9231XG 10 For backup of information that has been set Lithium battery DR231 DR241 B9234XZ 10 For backup of information that has been set Fluorescent lamp DR231 DR241 B9628ZN 3 4 Internal assembly lighting 30 000 hours Printer head B9233HA 3 1 5 x 10 dots depend on the set conditions Carriage B9233GA 5 Depends on the set conditions eoueuojuire y pue Punoous e qnou IM DR231 01E 13 1 13 2 Replacing the Fuse The fuse must be of the specified rating current voltage type to prevent a fire hazard When replacing the fuse be sure to turn off the AC power switch and check that the source of the DC power supply is turned OFF also Next remove the AC power cord power supply wires and DC power supply connector Then replace the fuse Never short circuit the fuse holder AOO BD Fuse Rating The fuse must have the following specifications For AC power supply Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 2 5 A Type time lag Standard IEC VDE certified Part number A1350EF For DC power supply Maximum rated voltage 250V Maximum rated current 6 3A Type time lag Standard IEC VDE certified Part number A1354EF Replacement procedure To replace the fuse proceed as follows DR130 DR231 in cas
128. 50Var 0 0 to 125 0Var 0 0 to 125 0Var 0 to 1250Var Reactive power Var13 0 00 to 25 00Var 0 0 to 250 0Var 0 0 to 250 0Var 0 to 2500Var Reactive power Var0 0 00 to 37 50Var 0 0 to 375 0Var 0 0 to 375 0Var 0 to 3750Var Power factor PFi i 1 2 3 13 0 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 Phase PHi i 1 2 3 13 0 80 0 to 80 0deg 80 0 to 80 0deg 80 0 to 80 0deg 80 0 to 80 0deg Frequency FREQ 45 00 to 65 00Hz 45 00 to 65 00Hz 45 00 to 65 00Hz 45 00 to 65 00Hz Precautions in Measurement Input the voltage or current being measured at a level between 10 and 100 of the measuring range The DR recorder bases its calculations of all other parameters on the frequency of V1 Extra care must therefore be taken when setting the input level of V1 If the input level fails to fall within the given limits there is no guarantee that the measurement of any other parameters will be reliable IM DR231 01E 5 9 2 1eeurqyueds 1ndu ay 6umes 6 1 Setting the Recording Mode Engineering Unit Recording Channel and Recording Interval Relevant Keys SET SYSTEM gt Select Setting Parameter SYSTEM UNIT TREND TIMER LOGIC COPY Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the O Q keys To escape from
129. 6 Y 2 DOSIUOR e ete e e de eet 10 2 calibrated values of 1 n does 13 12 See also recording 2 10 6 7 Left position Of 2 10 6 7 Right position 2 10 6 7 Index 6 IM DR231 01E
130. AC power supply Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC free power supply operating voltage 90 to 250 V AC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption About 130 VA max Use a three pole power outlet provided with a protective ground terminal For models with P6 option Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC 100 200 V auto switch operating voltage 90 to 132 180 to 250 V AC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption About 130 VA max Use a three pole outlet provided with a protective ground terminal DR130 DR130 with P6 DR231 DR231 with P6 option option Power connector Power connector Power connector Power connector Power cable Power cable Power cable Power cable IM DR231 01E 3 21 pue uonejeisu 3 6 Connecting the Power Cable and Turning the Power ON OFF DR241 when connecting wires to screw terminals Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument Connect the power wires after checking that the power supply is turned off to prevent electric shock To prevent fire use 600 V PVC insulated wire AWG18 for both power and ground wiring cross section of 0 83 mm or thicker anti galvanic corrosion finish insulation thickness more than 0 8 mm insulation resistance more than 50 MQ km at 20 C approved EN60 320 VDE0625 for AC power or equivalent cables Also use wires with cross sectional area of 0 3 mm AWG22 or more
131. AC power supply for P6 option for DR130 DR231 only 90 to 132 180 to 250 VAC Supply frequency 50Hz 2 60Hz 2 Ambient temperature 0 to 50 C 5 to 40 C when using floppy disk Ambient humidity 20 to 80 RH for 0 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C no condensation Vibration 10 to 60 Hz 0 2m s Shock Not allowed Magnetic field 400 A m max 50 60Hz Position Unit should be positioned left right horizontally Installation location Room suoneoyi2ods IM DR231 01E 14 13 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S3 Installation height Altitude up to 2 000 m Installation category based on IEC 1010 1 II 1 Pollution degree based on IEC 1010 1 2 2 Warm up time At least 30 minutes after power switch on Installation category is the specification of the inpuls withstanding voltage which is also called as overvoltage category 2Polution degree is the level of foreign body adhesion such as the solid liquid and gas which decrease the withstanding voltage 2 means general indoor atmosphere Effect of Operating Conditions Ambient temperature Variation for a temperature change of 10 C within 0 1 of rdg 1 digit 0 2 of span 1 digit for Cul0Q Voltage variation power supply within 1 digit over the range of 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC AC power supply frequency 50 60Hz 10 to 32 VDC DC power supply External magnetic field variation with respect to AC 50 60Hz and DC magne
132. Alarm modules Terminals DI DO module Alarm module NO C NC NO C DT200 21 Terminal arrangement NO C NC ne o 7 CHART e e ey hart end outpu TE o transfer contact 4 ATIRA C S9 eee i11 KY IS Remote control FEM P 8 o Alarm output QE ignali oss SSRS signal input V obe 9 make contact 12 contact terminals ecc o 11 C 12 G ALM output 1 i 9 ONS 1 transfer contact o 6 2 ALM output 2 H T transfer contact Wiring AC Input Signal Lines Power Monitor Module For hazard prevention ALWAYS provide protective grounding before connecting measuring leadwires When connecting any object being measured ALWAYS turn off the power to the object It is extremely dangerous to connect or disconnect interconnecting leadwires with the power to the object left on Exercise utmost care to avoid connecting any current mode circuit to a voltage input terminal or any voltage mode circuit to a current input terminal Wrong connection may result in damage to the circuit or equipment being measured or the DR232 or DR242 recorder itself as well as bodily injury Fuses are not built into voltage and current input terminals ALWAYS i
133. Alarm printout will not be carried out ONI Alarms will only be printed out on occurrence The alarm occurrence mark channel No or tag type of alarm alarm heading or time of occurrence will be printed with trend recordings ON2 Alarms will both be printed out on occurrence and release The alarm occurrence release mark channel No or tag type of alarm alarm heading or time of occurrence release will be printed with trend recordings Alarm Printout Buffer Analog Trend Mode Up to 30 alarm occurrences releases can be stored in memory Information on more than 30 alarm occurrences releases will be discarded After one alarm printout 29 alarm occurrences releases are stored and another alarm occurrence release can then be stored f 31 alarm occurrences releases exceeding the allowed number of 30 are entered an asterisk will be printed at the top of the alarm message when 30 alarm printouts are executed The alarm buffer clear function is available for canceling the stored alarm printout information see page 9 17 Logging Mode Up to 10 alarm occurrences releases can be stored in memory Information on more than 10 alarm occurrences releases will be discarded f 11 alarm occurrences releases exceeding the allowed number of 10 are entered an asterisk will be printed at the top of the alarm message when 10 alarm printouts are executed The alarm buffer clear function is available for canceling the st
134. C DI input module is selected RTD in the universal input module is not displayed Displaying error messages The following error messages are displayed Attempted to remove the module during calibration Or hardware error ERROR145 Invalid calibrated data ERROR144 Note When calibrating a high precision RTD Pt H do so after calibrating the voltages to maintain accuracy When a calibrated data error appears the error data are stored in memory If ERROR145 appears turn off the power and then back on to restart operation If the same error occurs again the recorder may be defective If ERROR 144 appears check the electrical connections and input data If the same error occurs again the module to be calibrated may be defective eoueuojure y pue Punoous e qno IM DR231 01E 13 11 13 5 Calibration DISPLAY mode to display and adjust the calibrated value Use this mode only for checking the calibrated value In this mode you can adjust the calibrated value but if it is invalid the instrument may be inoperative For details contact your nearest Sales representative Calibrated value display items Calibrated value display items vary depending on the type of module to be calibrated For use with universal input modules display calibrated value display items in the following order 20 mV ZERO 20 mV SPAN gt 60 mV ZERO gt 60 mV SPAN 5 200 mV ZERO gt 200 mV SPAN 52 V ZERO 52 SPAN gt
135. C less than 400 C is not specified K 1 2200 0 to 1370 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C However K attains an accuracy of 0 1 C 0 05 of rdg 1 C within the range between 200 to 100 C E 1 200 0 to 800 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 5 C J 1 2200 0 to 1100 0 C However J and L attain an accuracy of T 1 200 0 to 400 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C within the L 2 200 0 to 900 0 C range between 200 to 100 C U 2 200 0 to 400 0 C N 3 0 0 to 1300 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C WwW 4 0 0 to 2315 0 C 0 05 of rdg 1 C KPvsAu7Fe 0 0 to 300 0K 0 05 of rdg 0 7K 0 1K RTD Pt100 1mA 5 200 0 to 600 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C Pt100 2mA 5 200 0 to 250 0 C JPt100 1mA 5 200 0 to 550 0 C JPt100 2mA 5 200 0 to 250 0 C Pt50 2mA 5 200 0 to 550 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 C Nil00 1mA 6 200 0 to 250 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C SAMA Nil00 1mA DIN 6 60 0 to 180 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C Nil20 1mA 7 70 0 to 200 0 C J263 B 0 0 to 300 0K 0 05 of rdg 0 3K 0 1K Cul0 GE 8 200 0 to 300 0 C 0 2 of rdg 0 7 C Cul0 L amp N g 0 1 C Cul0 WEED g Cul0 BAILEY 8 High resolution RTD Pt100 1mA 5 140 00 to 150 00 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C Pt100 2mA 5 70 00 to 70 00 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 019C JPt100 1mA 5 140 00 to 150 00 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C JPt100 2mA 5 70 00 to 70 00 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C Contact Voltage input OFF for
136. D irer itt t nn eite 2 15 10 11 Horizontal or vertical printing See Recording direction Ici eC 2 14 10 8 Initialization 9 17 Input eat b a E Rp Dd ER 3 1 2 to 1 4 hc See filter temminals 1 2 to 1 4 3 16 to 3 20 ED 3 2 3 5 1 to 5 3 Inserting deleting a character or numerical 6 15 Installation method essen 3 2 to 3 5 Instr ment number 3 Integration time See A D converter integration time Internal illumination eerte 2 19 Internal RIG ceca ete o I e See RJC Internal switches onere ER ERROR Gk 2 14 8 3 10 9 to 10 11 Interpolation rere reete eee ree Rex ert 2 11 6 17 Interval Display update ue eere ene rien 2 1 10 24 for recording eret 2 9 6 3 6 5 10 6 14 4 for scan measurement sss 2 4 2 9 10 2 Index 4 IM DR231 01E for rate of change alarms sess 2 14 10 8 INT Es nene Idee Ee oe 11 5 J K Key lock keylock function esse 2 18 9 15 Setting OF Lii ee e ERU Pert entes 10 15 10 16 KEY LOCK KEYLOCK See Key lock function L eene ree ee vain Mee 5 2 Level action Life of lithium battery sess 3 24
137. DR230 Set up data for SET mode up to approximately 50 KB 30 measurement channels and 30 computation channels Set up data for SETUP mode up to approximately 15 KB 30 measurement channels and 30 computation channels Note Saving will be displayed during saving During this period key board operations are not possible No data saving is possible during computations During saving GP IB RS 232 C RS 422 A RS 485 communication remains inactive 11 12 IM DR231 01E 11 4 Reading Set up Data Reading set up data for the SET mode Relevant Keys Gr wore SS o ESC RECORD SET FLOPPY GO INS DEL Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TRI ken reser REM n cuart ser enter mrunc a Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the O Q keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET ma vdd MEMORY ENTER MEMORY LOAD ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE LOAD MODE DIRECT ENTER lt 2 DIRECT TRIG_1 TRIG 2 TRIG 3 4 LOAD FILE AAA EN
138. E Any time between 00 days 00 hrs 00 min and 31 days 23 hrs 59 min can be set in 1 minute units The default setting is 01 days 00 hrs 00 min If 00 is set to day DD HH MM every day shows the set time If day DD is set to a value other than 00 HH MM on DD day every month shows the set time DD HH and MM give the set numeric values respectively The match time setting is used with the event action function Refer to 9 1 on page 9 1 for details Moving Average MOVE AVE This setting can be set for each channel individually The number of samples used for the moving average can be set from 2 to 64 The default value is 0 which means that no moving average is carried out The result of the moving average is being displayed printed Interpolation INTERPOL This setting can be set for each channel individually If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A30 The default setting is OFF OFF no interpolation will be carried out ON interpolation will be carried out according to the priority of recording colors The priority of recording colors is black gt purple gt redish purple gt navy blue gt red gt blue gt brown gt green gt orange gt yellowish green Group setting GROUP GROUP No selection of the group number Up to seven groups can be set G01 to G07 This setting specifies which channel numbe
139. E unitO6 20000 000 10000 000 30000 000 10000 000 10000 000 10000 000 INST 200000 00 9999 99 9999 99 200000 00 SUM 2 400000E 01 4 800000E 01 1 000000E 0 1 000000E 00 1 000000E 00 Types of Results of Minimum or Enhanced format section of report R60 Channels included in printing Axx computing channel Printing Reports on a Recording Chart You can print created reports on a recording chart If you set the REPORT PRINT menu item to on during the configuration of the report function the DR recorder starts printing automatically at the same time it finishes making a report You can also print reports by pressing the FUNC key opening the FUNC menu and then selecting the REP RECALL START menu item In that case take note of the following You can print the latest report only irrespective of whether it is an hourly daily or monthly report Neither daily nor monthly reports are printed if you print immediately after an hourly report was created Care must be taken when the REPORT PRINT menu item is set to automatic printing If the time for automatic printing arrives while printing is enabled from the FUNC menu the DR recorder will no longer print reports automatically Even if you have configured the DR recorder so it prints a daily report in the enhanced format it prints the report in the standard format if it has been more than an hour since the report was created Even if you have configured the DR recorder so it pri
140. ENT ADARIM ENTER C O ACT EDGE ALARM ACK D C O ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR D O C ACT EDGEMEMRY AVRETRIIG ENTER SET OK ESC Explanation Measured computed data is saved to the internal RAM disk The memory size of the RAM disk is 512 KB Saving method WRITE MODE The following three methods are available DIRECT Measured computed data is saved immediately after setting has been completed Saving is complete when data of the specified length has been saved TRIGGER The event action function is used to save only one file of measured computed data when an event takes place This function is useful when you want to save measured computed data in case of an alarm REPEAT Same as TRIGGER except that measured computed data is saved each time an event takes place until the RAM disk is full or saving is stopped by the operator Events which occur during saving will be ineffective IM DR231 01E 11 1 Saving Measured and Computed Data When TRIGGER is selected as WRITE MODE Event Event Event Event y Y Y RAM disk File 001 Specified data length Start of saving of saving When REPEAT is selected as WRITE MODE Event Event Event ineffective Event Event y Y y y RAM disk File 001 File 002 File 003 Specified Specified Specified data length data length data length Start of saving End of saving Start of saving End of saving Start of saving End
141. F COMM INF FUNC3 CON FUNC FUN3 OFF PANEL RE SYSTEM RE SYSTEM FUNC3 FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL RAM INT RAM INT FUNC3 CO FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL ALL ITEM ALL ITEM FUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF INIT To previous page ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER 10 18 IM DR231 01E 10 8 Setting FUNC FUNC3 Menu Setting FUNC FUNC3 FUNC PARM Select the menu to be displayed by pressing the FUNC key whether in the FUNC menu or the FUNC3 menu The FUNC menu is displayed by pressing the FUNC key at a touch and the FUNC3 menu is displayed by pressing the FUNC key for about 3 seconds continuously Select any of the following FUNC displayed in the FUNC menu e FUNC3 displayed in the FUNC3 menu OFF not displayed in either menu The default setting is as shown in the operating procedure diagram on pages 10 17 and 10 18 The last operation menu PANEL ALL ITEM is the menu that globally set all menus However the selection of INIT selects the default setting The COMM IN
142. F menu is displayed for instruments with the communication option Note n order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 24 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 24 IM DR231 01E 10 19 dN Las sbumes oiseg 10 9 Setting SET SET3 Menu Relevant Keys SETUP SET_PARM RECORD ALAR gt Select Setting Parameter CHART l1 OUT RJC COLOR LOCK FUNC PARM SET PARMT EHI Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure Co GOS C ESC recor GO INS DEL cuart ser enter 2 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds although new settings selections will not be kept Main menu SETUP C O Lower menu SETPARM ENTER PANEL SYSTEM ENTER D2 SYSTEM SET ENTER SET PARM SET ESC K SETSET3 OFF PANEL UNIT 4 UNIT SET CV set SET3 OFF PANEL MATH 4 MATH SET SET SET3 OFF PANEL CONST 4 CONST SET Ca set SETS OFF PANEL MEMORY 4 MEMORY SET Cr SET SETS OFF PANEL FLOPPY 4 FLOPPY SET COV
143. F OFF Default Setting 10ms OFF OFF ON 20ms OFF ON OFF 50ms OFF ON ON 100ms ON OFF OFF Address No 4 of SW3 and No 1 to 4 of SW4 Address No 4 SW3 No 1 SW4 No 2 SW4 No 3 SW4 No 4 SW4 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON Default Setting 2 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 3 OFF OFF OFF ON ON 4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 5 OFF OFF ON OFF ON 6 OFF OFF ON ON OFF 7 OFF OFF ON ON ON 8 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 9 OFF ON OFF OFF ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF 11 OFF ON OFF ON ON 12 OFF ON ON OFF OFF 13 OFF ON ON OFF ON 14 OFF ON ON ON OFF 15 OFF ON ON ON ON 16 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 17 ON OFF OFF OFF ON 18 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 19 ON OFF OFF ON ON 20 ON OFF ON OFF OFF 21 ON OFF ON OFF ON 22 ON OFF ON ON OFF 23 ON OFF ON ON ON 24 ON ON OFF OFF OFF 25 ON ON OFF OFF ON 26 ON ON OFF ON OFF 27 ON ON OFF ON ON 28 ON ON ON OFF OFF 29 ON ON ON OFF ON 30 ON ON ON ON OFF 31 ON ON ON ON ON 3 14 IM DR231 01E 3 4 Connecting the Interface Cables For details on connectin the RS 422 A RS 485 connector of the RS 422 A RS 485 communication interface module to a personal computer see IM DR231 11E DR231 DR232 DR241 DR242 Communication Interface User s Manual CAUTION When dis connecting the RS 422 A RS 485 cable turn OFF the power of both the personal computer and the instrument If the power is not turned OFF malfunctions may occur and the internal circuitry may be damaged Ether
144. Fuse rating is a 250V2A time lag fuse with IEC VDE certification for an AC power supply It is a 250V6 3A time lag fuse with UL CSA certification for a DC power supply eoueuojuire y pue IM DR231 01E 13 3 13 3 Troubleshooting If an error code appears on the display see Section 13 4 Error Codes If servicing is necessary or if the instrument is not operating correctly though the following corrective actions have been taken please contact your nearest sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action Recorder does not operate Power switch is off Turn on the power There is also an AC power switch on the back panel on the DC power supply model The recorder carriage and chart do Power supply is not not move connected properly Connect properly Supplied power does not meet powerrequirements Use power meeting its requirements Fuse blown Replace fuse If the fuse blows immediately after turning on the power servicing will be required Output beyond its limits Input specifications are not Fluctuating indication correct Carriage swung over Correct input specifications Incorrect measuring range or recording span Change measuring range or recording span Noise superimposed Connect input wiring far away from noise source Ground recorder Gr
145. GE MSG DISP 01 4 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 CVO 010203 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11121314 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START 4 ACT EDGE MATH START START STOP CLEAR RESET ACT EDGE FLAG F01 4 lt ACT EDGE FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR 4 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR DATA WR WR_TRIG RD_TRIG LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 4 cvo ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 LD TRG1LD TRG2LD TRG3 ACT EDGE REPORT START 4 ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP ACT LEVL RECORD 4 ACT LEVL RECORD ao Aw ACT LEVL SPEED CHG ACT LEVL GR TREND G01 4 avo ACT LEVL GR TREND G01 G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 ACT LEVL MATH ao ACT LEVL FLAG F01 4 ACT LEVL FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 4 ACT LEVL REPORT To the next page OQ To the previous page ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER From the following page IM DR231 01E 9 3 suomnoung J19u1o pue uono
146. Instruction DR130 DR231 DR241 DARWIN Manual Hybrid Recorder Stand alone model IM DR231 01E a YOKOGAWA 4 IM DR231 O1E i 9th Edition Yokogawa Electric Corporation Foreword Notes Trademarks Revisions Disk No REO4 9th Edition October 2000 YK Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA Hybrid Recorder DR130 DR231 or DR241 This User s Manual contains useful information regarding the instrument s functions and operating procedures as well as precautions that should be observed during use To ensure proper use of the instrument please read this manual thoroughly before operating the instrument Keep the manual in a safe place for quick reference whenever a question arises The following manual is provided with the instrument in addition to this manual if communication is specified Manual Name Manual No DR130 DR231 DR232 DR241 DR242 Communication Interface IMDR231 11E DARWIN is a system comprising a number of data acquisition equipment components In the course of system growth new models software and optional features are added to the family to enhance the systems expandability and flexibility You can check the versions of your equipment and software by referring to the style number Sn and release number Rn respectively which are shown on the nameplate of the main unit When configuring a system you must confirm that the style number of each component unit and software meets the following requireme
147. MATCH TIME 1 4 ACT EDGE MATH START 4 SET OK configuration complete 4 LOGIC BOX No 3 01 to 30 4 EVT MATCH TIME 2 4 ACT EDGE MATH STOP 4 SET OK configuration complete Computation equation CALC TLOG SUM 001 ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER Selects match time 1 Provides the setting for clearing computed values Selects match time 1 Provides the setting for starting computing Selects match time 2 Provides the setting for ending computing If in the event action functions you have assigned the same event to more than one LOGIC BOX number at the same time the DR recorder executes computing beginning with the smallest LOGIC BOX number In the above configuration the DR recorder clears computed values at 8 00 and starts computing The values and behaviors of the event action functions when computing is done with the above configuration are as follows 12 10 IM DR231 01E 12 4 Starting Stopping Computation Results of computin 9 8 00 9 00 e 9 00 of the next day ii fe Logic box 1 Resetting of computed value Resetting of computed value Logic box 2 Start of computing Start of computing Logic box 3 End of End of computing computing Sum the values measured on channel 001 every hour Setting
148. Measuring range Computation equation constant Group Copying when range copying is on IM DR231 01E 12 9 uoneinduio IepoiN LW 94 ejqereA v 12 4 Starting Stopping Computation Main menu ite SET MATCH TIME m Examples of Setting Using the Event Action Functions Sum the values measured on channel 001 from 8 00 to 9 00 every day Setting the MATCH TIME field Configure the DR recorder so events occur at 8 00 and 9 00 every day Submenu items ENTER MATCH TIME No 1 Main menu item SET LOGIC ENTER 123 4 1 TIME 00 08 00 gt Set Day amp Time DD HH MM 00 4 SET OK configuration complete 4 MATCH TIME No 2 123 4 1 TIME 00 09 00 gt Set Day amp Time DD HH MM 00 4 SET OK configuration complete Setting the EVENT ACTION fields ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER Selects match timer no 1 Sets the date to 00 and time to 8 00 Selects match timer no 2 Sets the date to 00 and time to 9 00 Configure the DR recorder so it uses the match time as the event to clear computed values and then start computing at 8 00 and ends computing at 9 00 Submenu items LOGIC BOX No 1 01 to 30 4 EVT MATCH TIME 1 4 ACT EDGE MATH CLEAR PEL OK configuration complete LOGIC BOX No 2 01 to 30 4 EVT
149. NNEL 001 60 ENTER ONM OO NEENENEENENENE SER L1 o ONm 0310 o o 000000 INFO END End of setting ESC n Assigning the read data to a computation channel to display or record the data SET Main menu 1 mu Q MATH ENTER 01 01 ON D gt Select Channel No 4 A01 01 MODE ON D gt Select Channel No 4 A01 01 MODE N ENTER OFF ON 4 CALC M001 ENTER Cd So o CBS CUT LEFT 3000 000Kg ENTER n limit 9999 999 99999 999Kg RIGHT 3000 000Kg ENTER Span limit 9999 999 99999 999Kg 4 SET OK End of setting ESC IM DR231 01E 11 2 Reading Measured and Computed Data Explanation Measured computed data is read from the internal RAM disk Reading methods READ MODE The following two methods are available DIRECT Data is read at the measurement intervals immediately after setting has been completed TRIGGER The event action function is used to read data at the measurement intervals when an event takes place This function is useful when you want to compare data before an event with data after an event Displaying the contents of the file The following information of the read file is displayed r Sample rate intervals at which data was saved r Date time on which a trigger event took place Saving start date time in the case where saving was carried out in DIRECT mode r Model type on which data was saved
150. NS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter Conan PRN_ADJ SCAN_INTVL RECORD MATH FLOPPY kno cuart ser 2 Operating Procedure Carry out the following steps to enter the SET UP menu 1 If the SET UP menu is not currently displayed turn the power OFF 2 While holding the DISP key turn the power ON Make sure depression of the DISP key is maintained for approximately another five seconds Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept Main menu SETUP C O Los FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY SAVE ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 SAVE file ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 SAVE FILE AAA ENTER 4 Saving 4 SAVE OK End of saving ESC Explanation Set up data except for date time is saved to the internal RAM disk or a floppy disk Set up data for the SETUP mode can be saved to a floppy disk only Data is always saved in ASCII format The file name must consist of up to 8 characters The following identifier is used Set up data file for SET mode PNL Set up data file for SETUP mode SET Data size DR130 Set up data for SET mode up to approximately 42 KB 20 measurement channels and 30 computation channels Set up data for SETUP mode up to approximately 13 KB 20 measurement channels and 30 computation channels
151. NTER ENTER AND RELAY SET ENTER D ENTER ENTER ENTER ESC RELAY MODE SET ESCH RELAY HOLD SET ESC IM DR231 01E 10 9 dN Las sbumes oiseg 10 4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal Switch Explanation The following operation mode is set to the alarm output relays and the internal switches There are menus which cannot be displayed unless the alarm module A4 option or the DI DO module R1 option is mounted Also there are menus which cannot be set to the internal switches Setting Re failure or Re alarm REFLASH This is a menu for the A4 option or R1 option Setting for the internal switches cannot be done REFLASH setting is available for up to six relays Selection of REFLASH number Select from 1 to 6 Setting of REFLASH relay OFF not set Setting with numerals for 3 characters The first character is the unit number For the second and third characters a number from 01 to 60 can be set but the effective setting range is as shown in the following examples Check which slot the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted in using the model number of modules mounted see page 3 15 and their mounted positions Slot numbers are set in the order of slot 0 slot 1 n as viewed facing the rear Ex 1 When the alarm module is mounted in slot 3 31 to 40 Ex 2
152. O gt 60 mV SPAN gt 200 mV ZERO 200 mV SPAN 22V ZERO 2 V SPAN gt 6 V ZERO gt 6 V SPAN gt 20 V ZERO gt 20 V SPAN 50V ZERO 50 V SPAN gt Pt 1 mA ZERO 9 Pt 1 mA SPAN gt Pt 2 mA ZERO 9 Pt 2 mA SPAN Pt 1 mA H SPAN Pt 2 mA H SPAN gt Cu 2 mA ZERO gt Cu 2 mA SPAN 16 After checking the Cu 2 mA SPAN calibrated value in the above calibrated value display items press the ENTER key DISPLAY END gt MODULE No 0 gt 17 Press the ENTER key 13 10 IM DR231 01E 13 5 Calibration Completing the selected module calibration with the END mode 18 With GS 2 select the END mode AD JUST MODE END gt MODULE No 0 DISPLAY CAL EXEC END 19 PRESS the ENTER key 20 With GS select STORE or ABORT A D ADJUST END ABORT gt MODULE No 0 ABORT STORE 21 Press the ENTER key Return to operation 2 Terminating the calibration mode 22 When you return to normal measurement after completing calibration turn off the power and then back on CAL EXEC mode for calibration of a specified range Items for calibration range Items for the calibration range vary depending on the type of module to be calibrated For use with universal input modules select the items for the calibration range from among the following 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2 V 6 V 20 V 50 V Pt 1 mA Pt 2 mA Pt 1 mA H Pt 2 mA H Cu 2mA When the DC V T
153. ORE UH HEAR TE 2 20 5 3 R5 232 C Interface sedeo e ra ner D e 3 2 20 3 12 RS 232 C module see eg Pn REA HA ARRA ERR ERAN 4 3 12 RS 422 A RS 485 Interface 3 2 20 3 13 14 17 RS 422 A RS 485 module sse 4 3 12 RID te ri ete ere e 2 3 5 3 S Scan interval See Interval Scale checkmark ect p eei See also Values 10 5 Scale value iR See value ouo er RU QU PME HERD M M da RE 3 8 13 1 Screw terminals RR EAR 3 3 16 3 22 Set up data Q 11 11 to 11 12 Radin os oie ee Rr 11 13 to 11 15 Deleting RR RES meek 11 21 CODVIDg Licet nee e e E 11 16 to 11 20 Set up list printing ase ede pn tede se ee e ERRARE 7 4 Shunt resistor resistance sese 6 3 17 SINGOLE notet ERRORI ete SKIP skipping Nib EE SO IWATE eoat onrera EENE 6 Span for recording eere erg us AAEE 2 10 5 3 calibrated values of sse 13 12 Spates M 6 Sprocket 3 7 eO e eer 3 12 14 16 14 17 RR HERE I Nae 2 Sub display 1 2 coe etes 1 2 to 1 4 2 1 4 3 Suffix CODES 5 eite een See Model and Suffix Codes Symbols fof conyentions io eee etit eee tee len de eda 9 for safety See also WARNING 7 System module recognition of
154. P1 VA1 V1 1 1 1 Var1 PF1 FREQ V1 Single phase three wire three phase three wire configurations dual voltage dual current modules for three phase use only CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 P1 VA1 v1 n PF1 PH1 P3 VA3 I3 PF3 PH3 P13 VA13 PF13 PH13 V1 n V3 13 V13 113 FREQ V1 Var1 PF1 Var3 PF3 Var13 PF13 Three phase three wire configuration triple voltage triple current modules for three phase use only CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 P1 VA1 V1 n PF1 PH1 P2 VA2 V2 12 2 2 VAS3 V3 I3 PF3 PH3 P13 VA13 PF13 PH13 V1 n V2 12 V3 I3 V13 113 FREQ V1 Vari PF1 Var2 PF2 Var3 PF3 Var13 PF13 v o wu n wn V1 n V2 12 v2 l2 v2 12 I3 V3 I3 v3 I3 Three phase four wire configuration modules for three phase use only CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 PO VAO V1 n PFO PHO P1 VA1 V2 12 1 1 2 VA2 V3 I3 PF2 PH2 P3 VA3 PO VAO PF3 PH3 P1 VA1 V1 n P2 VA2 V2 l2 P3 VA3 I3 FREQ V1 Var1 PF1 Var2 PF2 Var3 PF3 PO VAO P1 VA1 P2 VA2 vo 10 V1 n V1 n V1 n V2 12 v2 12 V2 12 V3 I3 v3 I3 I3 Select from these combinations Select from these combinations Select from either of the two gro
155. R231 01E 4 4 Using the ALARM SEARCH Display Relevant Keys DISP MODE C RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT 0 FEED INS DEL RANGE ALARM CP M FUNC 1 CHART SET ENTER mrunce2 CU ALARM SEARCH Display for the Main Display 1 Select the main display using the DISP key 2 Select SER using the MODE key Sub display 1 003 0 0054V 004 0 0319V ASER ALARM SEARCH Display for Sub display 1 1 Select sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select SER using the MODE key Sub display 1 004 H 0 0269V 005 RH 0 0248V SER ALARM SEARCH Display for Sub display 2 1 Select sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select SER using the MODE key Aejdsig spo 101100Jy 34 6umes B Sub display 1 005 0 2108V X 006 0 0951V wSER ALARM SEARCH Display for the Main Display Only the channels in which an alarm occurred will be displayed When an alarm occurs in several channels the channels will be displayed consecutively Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms Measurement Values and Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO mode refer to page 4 2 Others When the input types of all channels are set to SKIP or no alarms occur NO ALARM will be displayed ALARM SEARCH Display for the Sub display 1 and 2 Only the channels in which an alarm occurred will be displayed Two c
156. R231 01E Main Menu Pressing the relevant key causes a menu the main menu to appear in the main display If the instrument is equipped with a floppy disk drive and option codes C or C2 and A4 or R1 and M1 are set at the factory prior to shipment the menu will indicate that alarm display hold and relay hold functions are turned on e RANGE menu 001 01 VOLT 2V Selecting the type of input setting the recording span setting linear scaling pages 5 1 and 5 4 e CHART menu SET CHART Setting the chart speed page 6 4 C O CLOCK Setting the date and time page 3 24 PRINT menu MAN PR START Starting manual printing page 7 2 CY lt LIST START Printing list page 7 2 C lt HEADER START Printing header page 7 2 ALARM menu 001 01 1 0FF Setting alarms and relays including internal switches page 8 1 e SET menu SET SYSTEM Setting the recording mode page 6 1 c lt UNIT Setting the engineering unit page 6 1 lt TREND Setting the recording channel page 6 1 C lt TIMERsetting the recording interval timer page 6 1 cy lt MATH Setting computation chapter 12 c lt CONST gt Setting constant page 12 7 C lt MEMORY Saving reading data chapter 11 c lt gt saving reading set up data chapter 11 c lt LOGIC setting event action functions page 9 1 C A COPY Copying page 9 11 e SET3 menu SET CHART2 gt Set
157. SAGE SET3 ENTER C SET SET3 OFF m PANEL HEADER ENTER o M 2 HEADER SET3 ENTER a SET SET3 OFF 7 m PANEL TITLE ENTER H 4 c TITLE SET3 ENTER 3 al SET SET3 OFF m PANE LL TIMER ENTER 4 TIMER SET ENTER al SET SET3 OFF F PANEL MATCH TIME ENTER 1 D O MATCH TIME SET3 ENTER SET SET3 OFF To next page From the following page IM DR231 01E 10 21 10 9 Setting SET SET3 Menu From previous page To previous page I PANEL LOGIC ENTER 4 LOGIC SET ENTER al SET SET3 OFF m PANEL MOVE AVE ENTER 4 MOVE AVE SET3 ENTER Ol SET SET3 OFF PANEL INTERPOL ENTER 4 INTERPOL SET3 ENTER al SET SET3 OFF PANEL GROUP ENTER 4 GROUP SET3 ENTER al SET SET3 OFF PANEL DST ENTER 4 D O DST SET ENTER m PANEL COPY ENTER 4 a c COPY SET ENTER SET SET3 OFF PANEL ALL ITEM ENTER 4 ALL ITEM SET ENTER SET SET3 OFF INIT 10 22 IM DR231 01E 10 9 Setting SET SET3 Menu Setting SET SET3 SET PARM Select the menu to be displayed by pressing the SET key whether in the SET menu or the SET3 menu The SET menu is displayed by pressing the SET key at a touch and the SET3 menu is displayed by pressing the SET key for about 3 seconds continuously Select any of the following SET displayed in the SET menu SET3 displayed in the SET3 menu OFF not displayed in either menu
158. SET key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP SET UP FLOPPY key SET MEMORY SET FLOPPY SET MEMORY SET MEMORY SET MEMORY SET MEMORY Section 11 1 11 2 Section 11 3 11 4 Section 11 5 Section 11 6 Section 11 9 Section 11 10 Section 11 3 11 4 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Perform manual print PRINT key MAN PR START Section 7 2 Perform list print PRINT key LIST START Section 7 2 Perform header print PRINT key HEADER START Section 7 2 Perform message print FUNC key MSG PRINT Section 7 3 Perform setup list print Press the FUNC key for about three seconds S U LIST START Section 7 4 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key see section 10 8 Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Timer SET key SET TIMER Section 6 1 Event Action SET key SET LOGIC Section 9 1 Copy between channels SET key SET COPY Section 9 2 Match time Group Relay internal switch operation mode Burnout Reference junction compensation Key lock Menu configuration of FUNC key Menu configuration of SET key Report function Reset timer Lock keys Start report Stop report Start report print Stop report print Clear message buffer Display module settings Display communication settings Initialize setting information Press the SET key for about three seconds Pr
159. Select FLOPPY from the SETUP menu Main menu SETUP O C FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY DELETE ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 DELETE FILEZAAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC 1 DELETE OK End of setting ESC Note During deletions GP IB RS 232 C RS 422 A RS 485 communication remains inactive IM DR231 01E 11 21 ejeg dn jegs pue peanseejy 11 8 Displaying RAM Disk and Floppy Disk Information Displaying information in the SET mode Relevant Keys Cero SS o ESC RECORD SET M EMORY Func print CO L INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR EYLOGH cuart set Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET 1 C O f MEMORY ENTER MEMORY INFO ENTER CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT CK gt MEMORY 20000 BYTES ENTER 4 INFO END End ESC FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY INFO ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE
160. T EVL RECORD i C ACT LEVLIRECORD ACT LEVL SPEED CHG TREND Go1 4 ACT LEVL GR TREND G01 G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 ACT LEVL MATH ao ACT LEVL FLAG F01 4 ACT LEVL FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 4 ACT LEVL REPORT To the next page ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER To the previous page From the following page IM DR231 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event ALARM actions The MATH menu is displayed only with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 and models with the M1 option The MEMRY and FLOPY menus are displayed only with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 The REPORT menu is displayed only with M3 option From the previous page EVT ALARM ACT EDGE ALARM i ACT EDGE ALARM ACK AQ ACT EDGE ALARM RST AQ I ACT EDGE TIMER RST C ACT EDGE RECORD OFF 4 ACT EDGE RECORD OFF OFF ON I ACT EDGE MANUAL PR AQ l ACT EDGE DIGITAL PR avo ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 4 iS ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 aM 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT ED
161. T Section 9 3 Clear alarm buffer Press the FUNC key for about three seconds ALM BUF CLEAR Section 9 4 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key see section 10 8 14 IM DR231 01E List of Menus and Set up Data Computation Settings Settings for Saving Loading Measured Setup Data Floppy Disk Perform Printing Other Settings Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Computation equation SET key SET MATH Section 12 2 Constant SET key SET CONST Section 12 3 Perform computation FUNC key MATH START Section 12 4 Clear measured data and FUNC key MATH CLR START Section 12 4 perform computation Stop computation FUNC key MATH STOP Section 12 4 Clear incomplete FUNC key MATH ACK Section 12 4 measurement status Handling of computation Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP MATH error time axis setting of TLOG SUM Section 12 5 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key see section 10 8 Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Save Load measured data SET key Save Load set up data of SET mode Copy measured data between built in RAM disk and floppy disk Convert data and copy Initialize built in RAM disk Initialize floppy disk Save Load set up data of SET UP mode SET key SET key SET key SET key
162. TER AAA BBB CCC 4 Loading 4 Operation status displayed FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY LOAD ENTER Main menu SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 SET L__ LOAD MODE DIRECT ENTER DIRECT TRIG_1 TRIG_2 TRIG_3 C O MEHORY LOAD FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 Loading 4 Operation status displayed IM DR231 01E 11 13 ejeg dn 5 pue payndwog peanseejy Buipeeg Dui es 11 4 Reading Set up Data Reading set up data for the SETUP mode SET FLOPPY une Relevant Keys Co rr ESC m DOD Cre INS DEL Select Setting Parameter CHART PRN ADJ SCAN INTVL RECORD MATH FLOPPY ETO CO cuart set enter 2 Carry out the following steps to enter the SET UP menu 1 If the SET UP menu is not currently displayed turn the power OFF 2 While holding the DISP key turn the power ON Make sure depression of the DISP key is maintained for approximately another five seconds Select set using the keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept Main menu SETUP Soa FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY LOAD ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 LOAD FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 Loading 4 Main menu 4 STORE for confirmation 11 14 IM DR231 01E 11 4 Reading Set up Data
163. a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept ESC Gone C INS DEL SET enter m runc 2 New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET 1 Lower menu SYSTEM ENTER SYSTEM LOGGING ENTER d SET OK ESC A V L sYSTEM TREND ENTER 4 TREND FIX ENTER FIX AUTO C O GET OK ESC gt UNIT ENTEH 5001 01 UNIT gt 4 001 01 UNIT ______ D gt Select Channel No C O 001 01 0 gt 19 8 0123 89 ABC KLT 4 ESC n TREND ENTER 001 01 TREND ON D ONB 001 SERRE gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 TREND ON D 00 SER EH Select Channel No 4 CO 001 01 TREND ON ENTER ONB 001 SERRE OFF ON GET OK ESC To the next page IM DR231 01E SUOI IPUOD eui Dunes 6 1 Setting the Recording Mode Engineering Unit Recording Channel and Recording Interval From the previous page TIMER ENTER TIMER 1 ENTER 123456 4 1 TIMER MODE RELATIVE ENTER 4
164. a voltage of less OFF for a voltage of less than 2 4V than 24V ON for a voltage of 2 4V ON for a voltage of 2 4V or more or more TTL TIL Contact input ON OFF of contact ON OFF of contact 1 RS B K EJ T ANSLIEC 584 DIN IEC 584 JIS C 1602 1981 6 SAMA DIN 2 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U Cu CuNi DIN 43710 7 McGRAW EDISON COMPANY 3 N Nicrosil Nisil IEC 584 DIN IEC 584 8 ranges to which accuracy applies 4 W W 5 RE W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co 10 84 4 to 170 0 C 5 Pt50 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1986 Cul0 L amp N 75 0 to 150 0 C Pt100 JIS C 1604 1989 JIS C 1606 1989 IEC 751 DIN 751 Cul0 WEED 200 0 to 250 0 C JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1989 Cul0 BAILEY 200 0 to 250 0 C IM DR231 01E 14 2 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S3 Measurement interval DR130 Selectable from 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 20 30 or 60s max 2s 20ch measured with 20ch filter OFF A D integration time 20ms 50Hz 16 7ms 60Hz DR231 DR241 Selectable from 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 20 30 or 60s max 2s 30ch measured with 30ch filter OFF A D integration time 20ms 50Hz 16 7ms 60Hz Noise rejection Rejection by integration type A D lowpass filter or moving averaging Input resistance Min 10MQ at 2V DC or lower and thermocouple range Approx IMQ at 6V DC or higher Insulation resistance Min 20MQ at 500V DC between the input terminal and ground Input bias current max 10nA Dielectric strengt
165. act In addition to the above measure reduce power supply Diode the rated voltage of the relay circuit as connect to the relay much as possible for higher reliability c ei terminal socket e It is necessary to choose a diode that directly matches the relay Generally a diode BS whose rated rectifying current is at least 1 Relay three times the current flowing through the relay coil rating must the relay coil must be used be as low as possible And the rated reverse voltage must be at least three time the operating voltage Note Across the relay or solenoid coil a counter electromotive force is produced by an inductive load This phenomenon may damage the contact or as the noise source cause a malfunctioning of the equipment and have an unfavorable effect on the entire system AC relay Surge suppresser circuit If a relay contact is connectd to the input connect to the of the system components apply the relay socket measure shown in the figure at the right _ terminal directly to the relay coil Otherwise a counter AJ e C 0 01 to 1uF electromotive force produced across the Up a Must withstand a voltage coil may be induced on the contact side al of at least three times through the relay s internal coupling or 4 i coupling between the lines and may the operating voltage Sox R 0 3Re to 1Re cause a malfunctioning of the equipment Re Relay coil s DC resistanc
166. age 9 1 to OFF so that recording does not start while loading the ribbon cassette If applicable turn off the power Note Do not perform recording without the chart cassette loaded otherwise the platen may be scratched or the chart paper may break Load the Ribbon Cassette into the DR130 DR231 1 Open the front door and remove the chart cassette from the main unit 2 Press the red lever at the bottom of the carriage The ribbon cassette holder moves to the right Ribbon cassette holder Screw shaft Red lever 3 Touch the ribbon cassette holder with a finger and tilt the housing downward 4 Turn the ribbon cassette rotating knob in the direction of the arrow counterclockwise to take up the ribbon slack 5 Fit the projection of the housing into the slot of the ribbon cassette and insert the cassette fully into the holder 6 Bring up the front part of the cassette until it latches and make sure it is horizontal IM DR231 01E 3 3 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette 7 Push the ribbon cassette to the left until the latch engages Check that the three white lines of the printer head are not visible when viewed from the front If the white lines can be seen the ribbon cassette is not properly loaded Push the cassette to the left again 8 Turn the ribbon cassette rotating knob once more in the direction of the arrow counterclockwise to take up the ribbon slack 9 Return the chart cassette to th
167. age shows the propagation paths using practical examples IM DR231 01E 3 27 3 8 Countering Noise Example of a high frequency D z induction furnace Due to electromagnetic induction current i flows through the conductor creating joule heat which heats the furnace J i2r Furnace Inverter power supply 20 to 3500kW Power supply 0 2k to 10kHz ay ee RE Electro magnetic induction noise Electrostatic induction noise inside Room furnace temperature Hot line conduction noise Electro magnetic induction noise Electrostatic induction noise Line noise The instrument Power supply Inputs Basics of Anti Noise Measures part 1 Common Mode Noise and Normal Mode Noise Signal source resistances Normal mode noise qw i lt Ri pm 57 _Floatingamp Signal component 1 re 4 Signal NW voltage E T R2 NM Jg E Eo t Me W TAA i T Circuit Output Aid Ld common Eonm 23 22 Zi N I I y Case Normal mode noise AD component Common mode noise 7 xl Common Mode Noise Noise generated between the signal source and the ground of a measuring instrument Since it is applied to both the H and L input terminals in phase with one another it is also called in phase voltage Normal Mode Noise Enm This i
168. ailable upper limit alarm H and lower limit alarm L Hysteresis is always set to 0 For a detailed description of alarm setting refer to 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches page 8 1 Event action function The event action function can be used to start stop computation and clear computation channels in case an event takes place refer to 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions page 9 1 Actions to be taken in case of overflow and computation error Actions to be taken in case of an error during computation can be specified Error display OVER or OVER is displayed Error data during TLOG or CLOG The operator is asked to select whether to display the data as a computation error or ignore the error and continue computation Overflow data during TLOG or CLOG The operator is asked to select whether to display the data as a computation error or ignore the error and continue computation The operator is also asked to select whether or not the data be used as the upper lower limit value Description of the upper lower limit value is given below Measurement channels to which linear scaling is applied Specified scaling upper lower limit Measurement channels to which no linear scaling is applied Upper lower limit of the measuring range Computation channels Specified LEFT RIGHT value uoneinduio OPO LW 94 ejqereA v IM DR231 01E 12 3 12 2 Setting
169. ain sub displayl or sub display 2 NO ALARM appears other displays which may have been set to ALARM SEARCH will turn blank Only the selected display mode on sub display 1 and the status display on sub display 2 will appear IM DR231 01E 4 5 Using the BARGRAPH Display Relevant Keys DISP C RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT CO FEED INS DEL RANGE ALARM CP M FUNC 1 CHART SET ENTER mrunce2 Operating Procedure 1 Select the sub display 1 using the DISP key Explanation 2 Select BAR using the MODE key Display 003 0 0172V 1 50002 2 0000 BAR 004 0 0153V 005 0 0123V Bargraph Display Sub display 1 can be turned into a bargraph display The measurement data on the main display are displayed as a bargraph on sub display 1 The bargraph shows a graph corresponding to the measurement value showing the recording span divided into 40 equal parts The left side of the bargraph shows the left span the right side of the bargraph shows the right span When you are using the linear scaling function the left and right side of the bargraph show the left scaling and right scaling value respectively Engineering units are not displayed When the main display shows SKIP ALL SKIP NO ALARM XXXXXX the bargraph will not appear Onl
170. als available Select any control signal from these numbers for event setting Remote control signal terminal numbers are applicable for this selection See page 3 15 for the remote control terminal numbers ALARM If an alarm occurs the action is executed See Section 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches on page 8 1 for setting alarms RELAY If the selected internal switch or relay is operating the action is executed When the alarm module or the DI DO modules are not recognized as system modules see page 9 17 the relay is set the to OFF See Section 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches on page 8 1 for setting internal switches and relays CHART END When the end of the chart is detected the action is executed TIMER f the selected timer s set time is up the action is executed Six timers are available Select any from among these timers See Section 6 1 Setting the Recording Mode Engineering Unit Recording Channels Recording Interval on page 6 3 for the timer setting provided earlier in this manual n combination with the level action the action is repeated alternately between executing and stopping each time the timer s set time is up MFUNC KEY When the M FUNC key on the operation panel is pressed the action is executed Select either M FUNC 1 or M FUNC 2 n combination with the level action the action is repeated alternately between executing
171. and Recording Span on page 5 3 Only H upper limit alarm and L lower limit alarm are available for computation channels Setting alarm values Set one alarm value for each alarm number within the following range depending on the type of input The default value is 0 zero HandL VOLT TC RTD DI and DELTA Within the measuring range in the related channel DI can be set to either 0 or 1 SCALE Within a linear scaling value Computation channel Within the range specified by the computation function RHand RL VOLT TC RTD DI and DELTA Within 1 to maximum measuring range minus minimum measuring range in the related channel For example set 30000 without using a decimal point if the maximum value exceeds 30000 DI can be set to only 1 SCALE Set 1 to 30000 without using a decimal point dH and dL When the standard channel uses VOLT Within the measuring range When the standard channel uses other than VOLT maximum measuring range minus minimum measuring range to maximum measuring range minus minimum measuring range For the type of input see Section 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span on page 5 3 Note When setting alarm values in continuous channels use the decimal point as follows The decimal point of an alarm value when the continuous channels have different measuring ranges should be in the position determined by the individual measuring range If the decimal point i
172. and monthly report making separately You can set hourly daily and monthly report making all to at the same time In addition you can set daily and monthly reports to either the standard format ON1 or the enhanced format ON2 of output Note that the enhanced format can only be set for either daily reports or monthly reports Output Formats The format of output is available in either the standard or enhanced format Hourly reports can have the standard format only Standard format Prints the results of computing configured on a report channel basis Enhanced format Daily reports the results of computing configured on a report channel basis plus information on the result of computing given at each preset time Monthly reports the results of computing configured on a report channel basis plus information on the result of computing given simultaneously with the preset time for making each report The following shows the format of daily reports UU Time to make report Starting time o DAILY REPORT 03 97 00 00 START Jan 01 97 00 00 RCH CH TAG MODE UNIT Jan 03 00 00 MIN TOTAL MAX Jan 02 01 00 Jan 02 02 00 Jan 03 00 00 a ROl TAG O001CH AVE V 1 0000 2 0000 1 0000 2 0000 2 0000 2 0000 7 RO2 002 INST V 10 000 9 000 9 000 10 000 003 SUM L 2 400000E 01 4 800000 01 1 000000 0 1 000000E 00 1 000000 00 R04 n ROS R06 0 1 ___ AVE unit06 20000 000 10000 000 30000 000 100
173. anel and turn it back ON again Permissible supply voltage AC power supply 90 to 250 VAC DC power supply 10 to 32 VDC AC power supply for P6 option 90 to 132 180 to 250 VAC Rated supply frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption AC power supply Max approx 130 VA DC power supply Max approx 80 VA AC power supply for P6 option Max approx 130 VA Fuse Ratings Main unit AC power supply Maximum rated voltage current 250 V 2 5 A Type Time lag Standard IEC VDE DC power supply Maximum rated voltage current 250V 6 3A Type Time lag Standard IEC VDE n the case at the rear side of the main unit where the input output module is connected The fuse may not be replaced by the customer AC power supply Maximum rated voltage current 250 V 2 A Type Time lag Standard IEC VDE DC power supply Maximum rated voltage current 250V 6 3A Type Time lag Standard UL CSA AC power supply Maximum rated voltage current 250V 2 5A Type Time lag Standard IEC VDE Priority on the use of the AC and DC power supplies on models with the P6 option when both AC and DC powers are supplied DC power supply terminal voltage Power supply input with higher priority Less than 20 V AC power supply 20 to 28 V Indefinite 28 to 32 V DC power supply Normal Operating Conditions Supply voltage AC power supply 90 to 250 VAC DC power supply in case of DR130 231 with P6 option or DR241 with 2 power supply cord 10 to 32 VDC
174. annel e Input Copper lead wire T Thermocoupler terminals gt Cee Ere e Thermocoupler ET ns 86 Thermocouplers of the same type must be used Computing amp Report Function Option This function can print the results of a statistical calculation of data on a specified channel measurement or computation channel in a format predetermined for a preset time date or month or send out the results to a communication line The types of computations are averaging mean value maximum and minimum instantaneous value calculation and summation sum cumulative sum 2 20 IM DR231 01E 3 1 General Precautions for Installation Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions Make sure to read the safety precautions described on page 4 before using the instrument for the first time Do not remove any covers from the instrument For internal inspection or adjustment contact your nearest sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual In case of malfunctioning Never continue to use the instrument if there are any symptoms of malfunctioning such as unusual sounds smell or smoke coming from the instrument Immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord When using an adapter for direct wiring to the power supply immediately turn OFF the power supply Also disconnect the power to the equipment under measurement Contact your sales representative or nearest
175. approx 438 W x 291 H x 336 D mm DR231 with P6 option approx 438 W x291 H x381 D mm DR241 approx 444 W x 288 H x 343 D mm Weight DR130 approx 9 3kg 10 8kg DR231 approx 13kg 14 5kg DR241 approx 16kg with 20 input channels and alarm output A4 installed 2 with 30 input channels and alarm output A4 installed 3 with P6 option Clock with calendar function Clock accuracy 100ppm However this does not include the delay less than 1 second caused when the power is switched ON and OFF once Fail Output Contact output when R1 option is selected Set value backup Lithium battery backup approx 10 years at ambient temperature of 23 C Insulation resistance At least 20M OQ between the power supply and ground between each terminal and ground and between each input terminal measured with 500 VDC Dielectric Strength Between power supply terminal and ground of DR130 DR231 DR241 main unit 1500 VAC 50 60Hz for one minute Between input terminal and ground of DR130 DR231 DR241 main unit 1500 VAC 50 60Hz for one minute Between output terminal and ground of DR130 DR231 DR241 main unit 2300 VAC 50 60Hz for one minute Between DC power supply terminal and ground of DR130 DR231 main unit 500 VAC 50 60Hz for one minute with P6 option Between DC power supply terminal and ground of DR241 main unit 1000 VAC 50 60Hz for one minute in case of power supply code 2 suoneoyi2ods
176. arried out for this channel The recording interval can be selected from the following For details on LOG INTERVAL refer to 10 2 page 10 6 If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A30 When LOG INTERVAL is set to SINGLE The recording interval is decided automatically depending on the chart speed and the columns of channels to be printed When LOG INTERVAL is set to MULTIPLE The recording interval can be selected from six timer settings The default value is 1 For details on the timer setting refer to 6 1 page 6 3 Columns Selecting Refer to 10 2 page 10 5 Manual Printout Setting MANUAL PR This setting can be selected from the following The default setting is ON If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels 01 to A30 OFF Manual printout will not be carried out for this channel ON Manual printout will be carried out for this channel IM DR231 01E suonipuo eui Dunes 6 5 Setting the Alarm Printout Relevant Keys mero PES neces ESC SET ALARM PR m EMI C INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART JTIAL TAG DIGITAL PR MANUAL PR ALARM PRT Cre A charr ser LEwrER 2
177. ase of computation error Time axis scale for TLOG SUM TLOG TIME SCALE For TLOG SUM of time series data is added at each measurement interval However in the case of an input having unit of s min or h like flow rate the computation result will differ from the actual value if addition of data is carried out In this case setting TLOG TIME SCALE according to the unit of the input will cause the data measured at measurement intervals to be processed according to the unit of the input For instance if the measurement interval is 2s and input value is 100 m min the computation result will be 30000 after the elapse of one minute since 100 is added every 2 seconds Setting TLOG TIME SCALE to min will cause the measured data to be multiplied by 2s 60s at each measurement interval thus making the result close to the actual input value If this function is set to OFF simple addition of data will be carried out Process of abnormal data during TLOG or CLOG TLOG CH ERROR Used to select the process method for abnormal data obtained during TLOG or CLOG ERROR Abnormal data is processed as a computation error e SKIP Abnormal data is ignored and computation is continued Process of overflow data during TLOG or CLOG TLOG CH OVER Used to select the process method for overflow data obtained during TLOG or CLOG ERROR Overflow data is processed as a computation error e SKIP Overflow data is ignored and computation is continued
178. asured computed data from the RAM disk using the event action function SET Era CA MEMORY ENTER MEMORY READ ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE Pa INIT READ MODE TRIGER ENTER DIRECT TRIGER STOP INFO 4 READ FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC DDD 4 READ START DATA 1 ENTER a limit 1 200000 READ START End of setting ESC d IM DR231 01E 11 7 ejeg dn jegs pue payndwog peanseejy Buipeeg Dui es 11 2 Reading Measured and Computed Data Stopping reading SET Main menu OQ MEMORY ENTER MEMORY READ CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY INFO INIT 4 READ MODE STOP DIRECT TRIGER STOP INFO 4 READ STOP YES NO YES 4 READ STOP End of setting ENTER DELETE ENTER ENTER ESC Displaying the contents of the file SET ____ Main menu O MEMORY ENTER MEMORY READ ENTER CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 READ INFO ENTER DIRECT TRIGER STOP INFO 4 INFO FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC DDD 4 gt MODEL STAND ALONE ENTER gt 96 07 07 00 00 00 LENGTH 20000 gt SAMPLE 10 Sec TRIG DATA No 1 4 gt CHA
179. asurement Apply a rated voltage in the voltage range that is to be calibrated to channel 3 S9 CH3 9 oooo 000008 el 88 e en Oo Input terminal ug DC Voltage Generator Short circuit between and terminals in channel 2 S9 CH2 Input terminal Temperature Measurement Using RTD apply the 100Q resistance to channel 5 Input terminal Short circuit the resistance input terminals A B and b in channel 4 b B A Input terminal Decade Resistance Box 13 8 IM DR231 01E 13 5 Calibration Entering the calibration mode 1 While pressing and holding the MODE key turn on the power Selecting the module numbers 2 With 2 select the module number MODULE No 0 012345 3 Press the ENTER key Calibrating in CAL EXEC mode 4 With GS select the CAL EXEC mode AD JUST MODE CAL EXEC gt MODULE No 0 DISPLAY CAL EXEC END 5 Press the ENTER key 6 With amp 3 amp X 2 select the calibration range AD JUST RANGE 20mV gt MODULE No 0 20mV 60mV 200mV
180. ated value in the internal nonvolatile memory Select one of the following two STORE Stores data in the internal nonvolatile memory ABORT Cancels the storage of data in the internal nonvolatile memory 13 12 IM DR231 01E 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style DR130 DR231 DR241 Modules specified at time of order and cannot be increased at a later time Input module universal DC voltage RTD TC DD DCV TC DI dedicated input Alarm module 10ch make contact Communication interface module selectable from GP IB or RS 232 C DI DO module alarm 2 point output transfer contact fail output chart end output input signal for remote control Max number of modules DR130 4 DR231 241 6 alarm module in combination with A4 option only 1 communication output module in combination with C _ option only 1 DI DO module in combination with R1 option only 1 Input Input type Universal or DCV TC DI input Number of channels terminal type DR130 Selectable from 10 20 ch and screw clamp terminal DR231 DR241 Selectable from 10 20 30ch and screw clamp terminal Input method floating unbalanced input each channel mutually isolated channel independent The RTD range has a common potential terminal b A D resolution 20000 A D integration time 20ms 50Hz 16 7ms 60Hz 100ms 10Hz selectable or automatically switched between 50 60Hz
181. ation Relevant Keys SETUP BURN_OUT gt Select Setting Parameter 0 ALARM A D INTG FILTER RELAY BURN OUTT Cuo EOS econ ESC xxm rcm MEME C C cHART ser Enter runc JC Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP Main menu SET UP L__ S lt 2 menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the CS amp keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept Lower menu New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting f BURN OUT ENTER 001 01 BURN OUT OFF gt Select Channel No i 001 01 BURN OUT OFF Select Channel No 4 001 01 BURN OUT 0FF OFF DOWN UP BURN OUT SET ENTER ESC ENTER gt 001 01 RJC INT gt Select Channel No i 001 01 RJC INT gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 RJC INT INT EXT 4 CO RJC 001 01 RJC EXT INT EXT EXTVALUE gt Ext Value Limit 20000 20000yV 4 RUC SET ENTER ESC ENTER
182. ator r I 1 o Oo a cc B ESSE T Operation panel 3 Se See chapters 3 to 12 Oo Handle to open close the front door c D Front door o 5 I ro oes aa Power switch See page 3 18 Floppy disk drive Only for DR231 1 Rear Example of DR231 with 30 input channels AC power supply model Heat sink fins Power fuse A See page 13 2 Power connector See page 3 21 Function grounding terminal TT 2 MOI S Terminals DC power supply model DC Power fuse See page 13 3 DC Power connector See page 3 23 AC Power connector See page 3 21 AC Power fuze A See page 13 2 AC Power switch See page 3 24 Function grounding terminal TOMS TOO LT33 oso Terminals IM DR231 01E 1 3 1 2 Names of Parts DR241 Panel mount hybrid recorder component type Front Ma
183. bumes oiseg 10 12 Working with the Report Function Sending the Sum to a Report Output Main menu item SETUP p CK Submenu items REPORT ENTER MODE SET ENTER SET CH SET PRINT 4 HOURLY REPORT OFF ENTER OFF ON 4 c 2 DAILY REPORT 0N1 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 4 MONTHLY REPORT ON1 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 4 START TIME 01 00 00 ENTER 4 CA REPORT SET ontiguration complete ESC MODE CH SET ENTER SET CH SET PRINT 4 REPORT CH R01 ENTER R01 R02 R03 R04 R05 RO6 R07 RO8 ROY R10T 4 R01 0N 001 D OFF ON 4 R01 0N 001 ENTER 4 CALC MODE SUM ENTER INST AVE SUM 4 SUM UNIT sec ENTER INTVL sec min hour day 4 REPORT CH SET configuration complete ESC END ENTER SETUP ABORT J ABORT STORE ENTER Completes the configuration of the SETUP menu Printing Reports Main menu item SETUP E AG O O Submenu items REPORT ENTER MODE PRINT ENTER SET CH_SET PRINT 4 REPORT PRINT ON ENTER OFF ON i T REP PRINT SET contiguration complete ESC END ENTER SETUP ABORT ESC ENTER Completes the configuration of the SETUP menu 10 28 IM DR231 01E
184. can be defined as follows Inverter noise commercial power supply pulse noise high density variable low frequency noise Since the density of pulse noise is high compared to that of a thyristor and in addition there is variable frequency noise it is difficult to consider a countermeasure for inverter noise Commercial power supply Rectifier output DC output Inverter output Commercial i Rectifier Inverter Motor power supply OH Principle of inverter 3 26 IM DR231 01E 3 8 Countering Noise Propagation of Noise INVERTER MOTOR 86 04 10 19 30 SRMPLE 0 05 ms 300 0 V Voltage waveform 300 0 0 00 25 00ms 2 000 R 5 Current m waveform m 5 5 2 000 E 0 09 Voltage current waveforms of an inverter 25 00ms 2 Relay A relay is frequently used to amplify alarm and temperature controller outputs However since a counter electromotive force counter e m f is produced by coil inductance when the relay is turned off and the e m f becomes noise care must be taken Due to chattering at the relay contact tens to hundreds of kHz noise occurs mainly in bursts Thus the noise energy often becomes high Transceiver In large scale plants transceivers are often used for communications between the field and the control room Although W G of the Japanese Electric Measuring Instruments Manufacturers Association recommends to use transceivers covering a wave band of 27MHz smaller sized trans
185. ceivers for the 140 or 470MHz wave band are often used Noise Simulator To test the immunity to pulse noise mainly thyristor noise a noise simulator is often used A test noise of approximately 1kV for 0 8us is used synchronously with the power supply frequency Since data acquisition equipment is often used for measurements of equipment subjected to the pulse noise test the influence of noise must be considered Noise is propagated in the following three ways Conduction noise is conducted through a power line input wiring etc Electrostatic induction noise leaks through capacitances between wires and instruments Electromagnetic induction a loop in the input line etc induces an AC voltage by detecting the AC magnetic field In real applications the above three propagation paths are not independent of each other Their combination propagates noise to the equipment and causes problems Examples of noise propagated through each of these paths are given below Conduction inverter noise relay noise thyristor noise and noise caused by surface temperature measurement of a power transistor etc Electrostatic induction commercial power supply noise such as the hum of audio equipment relay noise etc Electromagnetic induction magnetic leakage flux from a power transformer or motor magnetic field from a high frequency induction furnace the rotating magnetic field of a power generator Cu10Q etc The figure on the next p
186. cept that is based on modular architecture this group of next generation data acquisition systems is called DARWIN Data Acquistion and Recording Windows Today many data acquisition networks are increasingly being linked together More than ever before large volume high speed accurate easy to use communication functions are essential in many disciplines In the world of measurement and control where the number of measurement points has increased sharply the ability to acquire information from a large number of points easily and economically is crucial Interfacing to a personal computer allows simplified utilization of the information while improving quality and efficiency DARWIN is based on a unique new concept to meet these needs The art of measurement is revolutionized by DARWIN which integrates functions of conventional recording and data logging Most existing data acquisition equipment has been the all in one type in which the measurement section and display recording section are contained in one box While this simplifies operation on the one hand it is difficult to adapt to changes in the measurement environment and also makes expansion difficult DARWIN uses a data acquisition engine and remote I O modules which are completely separate from each other It is an entirely new product line which quickly and flexibly copes with various restrictive conditions and changes in specifications Supported by a personal computer a whole lin
187. clusive OR XOR 001XORO002 when channel 001 0 and channel 00220 0 when channel 001 nonzero and channel 00220 1 when channel 00120 and channel 002 nonzero 1 when both channel 001 and channel 002 are nonzero 0 Logical negation NOT NOTO001 when channel 00120 1 when channel 001 nonzero 0 Relational operators Type Operator Example Description Equal EQ 001 EQ 002 when channel 001 channel 002 1 when channel 001 z channel 002 0 Not equal NE 002 NE 001 when channel 001 channel 002 1 when channel 001 channel 002 0 Greater than GT 003 GT K1 when channel 003 gt constant K1 1 when channel 003 lt constant K1 0 Less than 004 LT K10 when channel 004 lt constant K10 1 when channel 004 2 constant K10 0 Greater than or GE 003 GE K1 when channel 003 2 constant constant K1 1 equal to when channel 003 lt constant K1 0 Less than or LE 004 LE K10 when channel 004 constant K10 1 equal to when channel 004 gt constant K10 0 Specified channel statistical operators m Dx Type Operator Example Description Maximum value TLOG MAX TLOG MAX 001 Obtain the maximum value of the measured data of channel D 001 7e Minimum value TLOG MINQ TLOG MIN 002 Obtain the minimum value of the measured data of channel 9 002 5 3
188. colors page 10 14 C lt Loc Ko Setting keylock page 10 15 C lt FUNC PARM setting FUNC FUNC3 menu page 10 17 CSKA SET PARM setting SET SET3 menu page 10 20 OQ DISPLAY selecting display update interval page 10 24 C A END Registering details set selected with set up menu and terminating set up menu page 10 24 Index 2 IM DR231 01E INDEX A ABSOLUTE Absolute time essere 2 0 6 3 5 ER 5 AC power eee eee e mette eee 3 24 Lang H 2 18 setting selection cederet eas 9 0 9 10 Additional printouts essent 2 13 A D converter integration time een 2 4 10 8 Alarm acknowledgment of 2 16 9 15 Search Display 2 eerte eid 2 1 4 7 4 8 Status Oe itia 2 1 4 10 COPY EE See also Copying 9 13 clearing DUPER ives invece ciae et veneer cludes deletes 9 17 Difference high low limit eee cece 2 14 8 2 high limit upper limit esee 2 14 8 2 low limit 2 14 8 2 occurrence of occurrence mark sssseseerert See also Trend recording upon occurrence 2 6 2 14 to 2 16 output output relays nennen See also Alarm module 2 14 to 2 16 2 19 3 18 4 11 4 12 8 3 9 9 10 9 to 10 11 printing recording see 2 6 2 7 2 16 rate of change high low limit
189. compressed The points A B C D E and F before compression correspond to the points A B C D E and F in the figure after compression The 25 left of the boundary shows 6 to OV whereas the 75 right of the boundary shows 0 to 6V Before compressing 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 V 1 11 gt Measurement value oa Recording span N is D Pigo ao 5 E M EA T gt F T span Y i 96 of full recording of compression RATE span After compressing 25 of recording span 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 V ae h 1 1 i i gt Measurement value uu 4 Bounda value Recording span H i 7B i 4 p i 5 6 E 4 i i g S et 9 v N i x 4 Sy i S i 9 lt Recording s span 1 Yi i gt of full recording 0 25 100 of compression RATE span Interpolation Function When carrying out trend recording and a measurement value differs greatly from the previous one the track of the recording changes stepwise in the dot printing In cases like this interpolation will be carried out on the horizontal line to connect the two divergent trend tracks When the horizontal lines of several channels are to be recorded on exactly the same location only the recording color with the higher priority will be used The priority
190. cted the calibrated values are not stored in memory Module selection error The following error messages are displayed The specified module remains disconnected ERROR141 The specified module is such that it cannot be calibrated ERROR143 Calibrated data error The following error messages are displayed Attempted to remove the module during calibration Or hardware error ERROR145 Invalid calibrated data ERROR144 Attempted to set invalid numeric values in the DISPLAY mode ERROR145 Note When a calibrated data error appears the error data are stored in memory eoueuojuire y pue Punoous e qnou IM DR231 01E 13 7 13 5 Calibration Required Equipment Name Measurement Accuracy Recommended Range DC Voltage Generator OV to 50V 0 005 of setting 1u V Yokogawa 9000 4808 DMM OV to 50V 0 005 of setting 1u V HP3458A Decade Resistance 0 10 to 1000Q 0 0196 Yokogawa 2793 For OV input it is necessary to either short the input terminals or to monitor the output voltage using the DMM Calibrating Conditions Ambient temper 23 C42 C Ambient humidity 55 10 RH AC power supply voltage 100 to 240 VDC DC power supply voltage 12 to 28 VDC Power supply frequency 50 60 Hzt1 for AC power supply model only Warm up time at least 30 minutes for this recorder and necessary warm up time for the used equipment Connection terminal screw connections DC Voltage Me
191. d Functions As Classified by the Style Number The following functions are not available for style number S1 Computation function including remote RJC Saving and reading of measured data computated data and set up data FDD function Summer Winter time RS 422 A RS 485 communication module Report function Ethernet module Measurement of active power and apparent power on ch3 to ch6 for power monitor modules Flag for M1 option Group reset for M1 option The following functions are not available for style number S2 Summer Winter time RS 422 A RS 485 communication module Report function Ethernet module Measurement of active power and apparent power on ch3 to ch6 for power monitor modules Flag for M1 option Group reset for M1 option The following functions are not available for style number S3 Report function Ethernet module Measurement of active power and apparent power on ch3 to ch6 for power monitor modules Flag for M1 option Group reset for M1 option The following functions are not available for style number S4 Report function Ethernet module Measurement of active power and apparent power on ch3 to ch6 for power monitor modules Flag for M1 option Group reset for M1 option The following functions are not available for style number S5 Ethernet module Measurement of active power and apparent power on ch3 to ch6 for power monitor modules
192. d J263B J263 B Refer to chapter 14 for the measurement range of each setting The default setting is PT1 DI voltage level LEVL contact CONT This input type can be selected from LEVL and CONT In case of LEVL a voltage of less than approx 2 4 V will be recognized as 0 OFF whereas a voltage of approx 2 4V or more max allowable voltage is up to 60 VDC will be recognized as 1 ON In case of CONT an open externally connected contact to which no voltage is applied will be recognized as 0 OFF whereas a closed contact will be recognized as 1 ON The default setting is LEVL DELTA difference between channels Destination channels should lie within the first channel No to the last channel No range The number of the reference channel should be lower than the number of the distination channels The default setting for the reference channel is 01 The type of input and the measuring range in the distination channel are the same as for the reference channel After setting the DELTA difference between channels if you attempted to change the rype of input and the measuring range setting the difference between channels is released thereby the type of input and the measuring range in the destination channel are returned to their original settings and the recording span is returned to its initial value RRJC Remote RJC available if the instrument is equipped with the optional MATH function Reference channe
193. d ee red eei tede cette ien 10 17 10 9 Setting SET SET3 MEHU iion nnn ete ERI ee ne eer deberse 10 20 10 10 Selecting Display Update Interval Registering SET UP Menu and Terminating SET UP Menu 10 24 10 11 Selecting the temperature unit from C or F option 10 25 10 12 Working with the Report Function tenerte 10 27 Saving Reading Measured Computed and Set up Data 11 1 Saving Measured and Computed Data eese 11 1 11 2 Reading Measured and Computed 11 7 11 3 Saving Set up Data sss 11 4 Reading Set up Data 11 5 Copying a Data File 11 6 Copying in ASCI Format ac core t 11 18 11 7 Deleting a D ta File oerte tenerent ee itti re Ene et e eren edle Eee ena eas el eed esa ee 11 21 11 8 Displaying RAM Disk and Floppy Disk Information eese 11 22 11 9 Initializing the RAM Disk rro inocente e p E RE 11 24 TITO Formattng a Floppy DISK 5e reet r tib etre ti RE i D EE PE RET 11 25 12 IM DR231 01E Contents Chapter 12 Executing Compuration Available with the M1 Model 12 1 Overview of the Computation Function 12 1 12 2 Setting a Computation Equation dese rece ap eere RD R nde i e eant 12 4 12 3 Set rng d Co
194. d here Alarms Two characters are used for displaying alarms One characters is used in the case of optional computation channels When an alarm occurs the kind of alarm will be displayed When in one channel several alarms occur at the same time the priority of display becomes H L dH dL RH RL For details on H L dH dL RH and RL alarms refer to page 8 2 Measurement Values Seven characters are used for displaying the measurement values The decimal point uses up one character Nine characters is used in the case of optional computation channels When a measurement value does not reach the following value will be displayed DC voltage a minimum value of the measuring range max value min value x 0 05 TC RTD min value of the measurement range 10 C e Linear scaling 32000 or a minimum value of the recording span max value min value x 0 05 When a measurement value exceeds the following value will be displayed DC voltage a maximum value of the measuring range max value min value x 0 05 TC RTD min value of the measurement range 10 C Linear scaling 32000 or a maximum value of the recording span max value min value x 0 05 If the input module is not connected properly XXXXXX will be displayed While waiting for an input signal will be displayed Engineering Units If the channel number has been selected to appear on the display
195. d in some cases Ambient temperature 25 to 60 C 20 to 60 C with floppy disk drive Humidity 5 to 95 RH Vibration 10 to 60Hz 4 9m s max Shock 392 m s max in packed condition 14 14 IM DR231 01E 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S3 General Specifications EMC Conformity Standard Emission EN55011 Class A Immunity EN50082 2 IEC1000 4 2 Electrostatic Discharge Performance Criteria A 8k V Air 4k V Contact IECIOO0 4 3 Radiated fields Performance Criteria A 80 1000MHz 10V m IEC1000 4 4 Fast Transients Performance Criteria B Power line 2kV The others 1kV IEC1000 4 6 Conducted Disturbance Performance Criteria A 0 15 80MHz 10V Effect on accuracy 10 of range except for 50V range 20 of range 50V range When the extender module is used 20 of range except for 50V range 40 of range 50V range Installation Desk top type DR130 DR231 Panel mount type DR241 Regardless of which installation method you use be sure to install the units in an upright position Materials Steel plate aluminium plate plastic moldings Color Display Slate Gray light equivalent to Munsell 0 1 PB 4 6 0 2 DR130 DR231 main unit Lamp Black equivalent to Munsell 0 8 Y 2 5 0 4 DR241 main unit Ice White equivalent to Munsell 6 6 Y 7 9 0 5 External dimensions DR130 approx 338 W x 221 H x 335 D mm DR130 with P6 option approx 338 W x221 H x381 D mm DR231
196. d in the first round of report making after the start of report making are fewer in number than those included in the second and subsequent rounds of report making The DR recorder samples data before stopping report making The report created when the DR recorder stops making reports thus includes those data Ifthe time when report making is started coincides with the time the report is created the start of report making precedes Thus no report is created The data sampled at the same time report making started are included in first round of report making The report created when the DR recorder stops making reports thus includes those data If you have defined timer and match time signals as events using the event action functions so the time report making starts matches the time the report is created data items included in the first round of report making are one data item greater in number than those included in the second or any subsequent round of report making Processing Against Absence of Measurement Measurement may not take place if the DR recorder is loaded beyond its processing capability If absence of measurement occurs the DR recorder compensates for the missing data with the data it measures immediately after recovering from the absence of measurement the data for the period with no measurement thus match those acquired immediately after recovering from the absence of measurement 10 32 IM DR231 01E 10 12 Wo
197. e Others isolation from noise source for hot line measurement Mylar isolation film 7 Adhesive copper foil tape At low temperatures _ Wrap Hot line Power transistor Vcc ten Adhesion At high temperatures Anti Noise Measures for PC Connection When connecting the The instrument to a PC it is recommended to apply ferrite cores e g ZCAT3035 1303 from TDK to the interface cable as a noise countering measure Apply a ferrite core on both sides of the cable as shown below when the noise persists apply more ferrite cores Function Function grounding grounding Personal terminal Personal terminal computer DR130 computer DR231 DR241 Ferrite core g Ferrite core cn zi ERE iB t IM DR231 01E 3 35 pue uonejeisu 4 1 Using the AUTO Mode DISP MODE C RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT CO FEED INS DEL RANGE ALARM C2 M FUNC 1 CHART SET ENTER mrunce2 AUTO Mode for the Main Display 1 Select the main display using the DISP key Direct the arrow mark on the Sub display upward 2 Select AUT using the MODE key Sub display 1 003 0 0045V 004 0 0931V AAUT AUTO Mode for Sub display 1 1 Select sub display 1 using the DISP key Direct the arro
198. e This mode can be set for the main display When choosing this display the measurement values of 5 consecutive channels will be displayed as a page using also sub display 1 and 2 The display update interval is the same as the measurement interval refer to page 2 4 Alarm Search Mode This mode can be set for the main display sub display 1 and sub display 2 Channels at which an alarm occurred will be searched for and their measurement values displayed The display update interval is 2 seconds Bargraph Mode This mode can be set for sub display 1 Measurement values which are shown on the main display will be shown as a bargraph The display update interval is the same as the interval of the main display Alarm Status Mode This mode can be set for sub display 1 and 2 The display will show per channel whether or not an alarm occurred refer to page 2 14 On one display the alarm status of a maximum of 30 channels can be monitored depending on the number of input channels The display update interval is 0 5 seconds Relay Status Mode This mode can be set for sub display 1 and 2 The display will show the operating status of internal switches alarm output relays refer to page 2 14 On one display a maximum of 30 relay statuses can be monitored The display update interval is 1 second Clock Mode This mode can only be set for sub display 2 The current date and time are shown Displaying the Selected Mode To the right of sub display 1
199. e Measures part 2 Decreasing and Increasing Impedance As described in the previous section conversion of common mode noise into normal mode noise pue uonejeisu causes an error in the measured output In other words prevention of such a conversion is the key to anti noise measures As can be understood from the previous section it is important to take the following measures to reduce normal mode noise reduce the wiring resistances Ri and Ro including the resistance of the wires increase the coupling impedance of common mode voltage Ecm These are called the decrease and increase of impedance as basics of anti noise measures In the above discussions anti noise measures have been described on the assumption that common mode noise has already been given In real applications common mode noise often occurs owing to grounding resistance as shown in the figure below gt Signal source The instrument L gt One point grounding X 7 7 7 7 7 7 Grounding resistance and Ecm Ground current In such a case perform one point grounding as indicated by the dotted line as an extreme example of decreasing impedance to equalize the potentials of the signal source and the instrument Rejecting common mode noise in this way is the basics of anti noise measures Anti Noise Measures in the Instrument Itself Pulse width modulation type A D converter PWM type A D
200. e Recording Span Linear Scalling 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span sess 5 2 Setting Linear Scaling and the Recording Span 5 3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring E 5 6 IM DR231 01E 11 Contents Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Setting the Recording Conditions 6 1 Setting the Recording Mode Engineering Unit Recording Channel and Recording Interval 6 1 62 Setting the Chart Speeds iunc cete RE UR be cere deeds 6 4 6 3 Setting Recording Zones and Partially Expanded Recording see 6 6 6 4 Setting Tag Digital Printout and Manual Printout esses 6 8 6 5 Setting the Alarm Printo t etre tbe RT Fn pter 6 10 6 6 Setting Scale Printout List Printout and List Format eese 6 12 6 7 Entering Messages Headers and Title sessi 6 14 6 8 Setting Match Time Moving Average Interpolation and Groups eee 6 16 Executing Recording 7 1 Starting Dot Printing Digital Printing and Printing in Logging Mode sees 7 1 7 2 Starting Manual Printing List Printing and Header Printing eese 7 2 7 3 Starting Message Printing TA Printing Setup Lists yes iy eidcm
201. e for the skipped channels Reference Junction Compensation RJC This function is to be used when measuring temperatures using thermocouples The voltage generated by a thermocouple depends on the temperature of the spot of measurement and the reference junction temprature Reference junction compensation is a function which compensates the temperature at the side of the measurement instrument to 0 degrees C To compensate for the environmental temperature an internal circuit can be selected or compensation by a fixed compensation voltage value external can be set IM DR231 01E suonounJ 2 2 Measurement Input Functions Scan Interval A D Integration Time Input Filter The duration of time one scan in which the measurement of all channels is carried out is called the scan interval This interval can be set to any value from 2 to 60s and this range is the same for the 10ch 20ch and 30ch model This instrument measures the input signal after putting it through an A D converter In order to minimize the noise imposed on the input signal specific integration times exist The integration time can be selected from 20ms 50Hz 16 7ms 60Hz and 100ms 10Hz When AUTO is selected the integration time will be automatically decided according to the 50 60Hz frequency of the power supply AUTO does not function if the instrument is a DC power supply model Selecting AUTO will set the A D integration time
202. e from the noise source lines power and alarm lines Step 1 Install a separator Separator Power lines d aS Wi Special class 3 ground 100 or less Step 2 Keep the signal cables at least 15cm above the power lines using a bracket If the power lines are not shielded the operating voltage is 220V or less and the operating current is 10A or more the distance between the signal cables and power cords must be 60cm or more Signal lines Power at least lines v 15 cm Step 3 Leave a clearance of at least 15 cm between the signal lines and power lines If the power lines are not shielded the operating voltage is 220V or less and the operating current is 10A or more the distance between the signal cables and power cords must be 60cm or more at least 15 cm Signal lt gt Power CES COE Step 4 Lay the signal lines at right F to the power lines If the power lines are not shielded separate the signal lines and power lines where they cross using steel sheeting at least 1 6mm thick n Signal lines eS X CODO OO am 1 Power lines Separate analog signal lines and communication cables in the same manner as from power cords When there is influence from a magnetic or electrical field an increase of impedance Step 1 Keep the noise source as far away as possible Magnetic field strength H NE s 400 A m 2nr E Example 1 2 400
203. e main unit 10 Feed the chart paper by pressing the FEED key on the operation panel to prevent a delay in starting the chart paper feed Note Check that the ribbon cassette is properly loaded in the carriage f a ribbon cassette is used for a long time the ribbon may become wavy and move of the dot printing range of the printer head If this happens replace the ribbon with a new one pue uonejeisu Load the Ribbon Cassette into the DR241 1 Open the front door and open the display door The ribbon cassette can be loaded without removing the chart cassette from the main unit 2 When the chart cassette is removed press the red lever 1 at the bottom of the carriage When the chart cassette is not removed pull forward the red lever 2 then the ribbon cassette holder moves to the right Red lever 1 3 Turn the ribbon cassette rotating knob in the direction of the arrow counterclockwise to take up the ribbon slack 4 Fit the projection of the holder into the slot of the ribbon cassette and insert the cassette fully into the holder IM DR231 01E 3 9 3 3 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette 5 Push the ribbon cassette to the left until the latch engages Check that the three white lines of the printer head are not visible when viewed from the front If the white lines can be seen the ribbon cassette is not properly loaded Push the cassette to the left again 6 Turn the ribbon cassette r
204. e of AC power supply 1 Turn off the power switch Turn off the AC power switch also on the rear panel of the DC power supply model 2 Unplug the AC power cord from the power outlet 3 Remove the fuse holder at the side of the AC power connector on the rear panel 4 Remove the blown fuse from the holder 5 Insert a new fuse into the holder and then install the holder in place DR130 DR130 DC power DR231 DR231 DC power model model 13 2 IM DR231 01E 13 2 Replacing the Fuse DR241 1 Turn off the power switch 2 Disconnect the power connections 3 Open the front and display doors to gain access to the fuse holder Use a standard screwdriver to turn the fuse holder screw counterclockwise Then remove the fuse holder 4 Remove the blown fuse from the holder 5 Insert a new fuse into the holder and then install the holder in place s DR130 DR231 DR241 in case of DC power supply 1 Turn off the power switch 2 Disconnect the power connections 3 Use a standard screwdriver to turn the fuse holder screw counterclockwise located next to the DC power terminals Then remove the fuse holder 4 Remove the blown fuse from the holder 5 Insert a new fuse into the holder and then install the holder in place DR130 DR231 9 S Note The fuse is located in the case at the rear side of the main unit where the input output module is connected This fuse may not be replaced by the customer
205. e the same Change the span 106 Attempted to make range setting during Stop making range setting computation 110 Syntax error for computation constant Set the constant correctly 111 Out of constant setting range Set the constant within the range 120 Floppy disk not inserted or not formatted Insert a formatted floppy disk into the drive 121 Insufficient memory Delete unnecessary files 122 Incorrect file name or volume name Set the correct file name or volume name 123 Attempted to make settings Stop making the settings which are not allowed to be made during saving or reading of measured data 124 Too many files in the media Delete unnecessary files 125 Attempted to read data which was saved Select data which has been saved by another instrument model by DR DA 127 Attempted to save data in a write protected file Cancel write protection 128 No event action has been set Set the desired action 130 Incorrect channel found during saving Set the correct channel or reading of measured data 132 Attempted to format the disk while a file is open Close the file 134 Set up data saving error 135 Internal data error 136 Incorrect copy channel Set the correct copy channel 139 Other media related error 141 Disconnected modules were selected Specify correct modules 143 Modules selected which cannot be calibrated Specify correct modules 144 Calibration done improperly Check electrical connections Calibrate again If the same error occurs a
206. e up can be created starting with the data acquisition systems DA series which performs data logging For example using a printer as the output device the equipment becomes a hybrid recorder DR series Three models are available in the DR series the DR130 DR230 and DR240 The DR130 is a portable hybrid recorder the DR230 is a desk top hybrid recorder and the DR240 is a panel mount hybrid recorder component type Personal Subunit e 885 Input output modules FD nH y Extension cables max length 500 m d d em E rem y 3 ma IM DR231 01E 1 2 Names of Parts DR130 Portable hybrid recorder Front Main display See chapter 4 Sub display 1 See chapter 4 Sub display 2 See chapter 4 Status indicator I 1 5 OC E e00 Cor g Operation panel See chapters 3 to 12 Handle to open close the front door Front door IET Power switch See page 3 18 YOKOGAWA gt 2 Floppy disk drive Only for DR130 1 Rear Example of DR130 with 20 inpu
207. eaving the name blank WRITE SAMPLE Interval between file savings WRITE LENGTH Size of file being saved WRITE PRE TRIG Pre trigger not configurable if MEMORY DIRECT 4 Copying Files Saved on Built in RAM Disk to Floppy Disk Menu Item Setting MEMORY in SET menu MEMORY COPY COPY MODE TO FDD COPY TYPE DATA COPY FILE Name of file being copied COPY CONVERT OFF Saved as binary data file ejeg dn jegs pue peanseejy Buipeeg Dui es See the following pages for more information on how to configure these menu items IM DR231 01E 11 1 11 1 Saving Measured and Computed Data Relevant Keys series EDS eens ESC RECORD SET MEMORY m Func print b Fee INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR EWLOCH cuart set mrunc2 Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the O Q keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Selecting the channel to be saved SET Main menu ae CA MEMORY ENTER MEMORY CH SET ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE ve
208. ecorded recording color refer to page 2 9 recording interval refer to page 2 9 recording span refer to page 2 10 recording zone refer to page 2 10 partially expanded recording refer to page 2 11 interpolation function refer to page 2 11 Digital Printout Measurement data will be printed as numerical values Digital printout conditions consist of the following channels to be recorded recording interval refer to page 2 9 the number of channels to be recorded on the same line refer to page 2 8 Logging Mode In this mode measurement data are only printed as numerical values Logging recording conditions consist of the following channels to be recorded the recording direction vertical or horizontal recording interval refer to page 2 9 IM DR231 01E suonounJ 2 3 Recording Functions Recording Example The numbers in parentheses refer to reference pages ues jo uonisod 8 2 euin Buyers 8 2 jo euin Buipu3 1 z 8 2 s z peeds HE xpi 9 51 tH G 1 z Wey FH ED St 5i Z4 p 0
209. ection 6 5 Channel to print scale Press the SET key for about three seconds SET SCALE PR Section 6 6 values Channel to list print Press the SET key for about three seconds SET LIST PR Section 6 6 Items to list print Press the SET key for about three seconds SETZLIST FMT Section 6 6 Message Press the SET key for about three seconds SET MESSAGE Section 6 7 Header Press the SET key for about three seconds SETZHEADER Section 6 7 Title Press the SET key for about three seconds SET TITLE Section 6 7 Interpolation Press the SET key for about three seconds SETZINTERPOL Section 6 8 Adjust dot printing Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UPZPRN ADJ Section 10 1 position Recording format Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP RECORD Section 10 2 Dot print color Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP COLOR Section 10 6 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Display Settings Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Switch display DISP key and MODEKey Chapter 4 Display update interval Turn ON power while pressing the SET UP DISPLAY Section 10 10 DISP key Alarm Settings Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Alarm alarm output ALARM key 001 01 1 OFF Section 8 1 relay Alarm Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SETUP ALARM Section 10 3 interval hysteresis hold Execute alarm FUNC key ALARM ACK Section 9 3 acknowledge Reset alarm FUNC key ALARM RS
210. ed recording in the analog trend or logging mode will start stop IM DR231 01E 2 13 2 4 Alarm Function This function will show an alarm on the display or generate an alarm output signal with A4 or R1 option when the measurement conditions of a channel exceed fall below preset values Up to four alarms can be set for each channel Type of Alarms Six types of alarms are available namely high limit alarm low limit alarm high limit on rate of change low limit on rate of change difference high limit and difference low limit Interval for Rate of Change Alarms In case of high low limit on rate of change alarms variation is measured over a preset interval and if the variation exceeds a preset value an alarm occurs This interval can be set and applies to all channels High limit on rate of change Low limit on rate of change Measured ps variation Measur Measur ement 72 ement et variation value Set variation Malus Th T Ta T Y N Measured variation t Time 2 Time k h Set interval Set interval 12 11 t2 ti Alarm Hysteresis You can set the width between the value of alarm occurrence and its release This setting prevents frequent alarm occurrences releases in an unstable environment Hysteresis values can be set in the 0 1 percentage range of the recording span The hysteresis setting is used for high and low limit a
211. ed computed data to a floppy disk Data measured or computed using the instrument cannot be saved to a floppy disk directly It must be saved to the internal RAM disk first then copied to a floppy disk It is not possible to change the file name when copying the file Displaying recording measured computed data saved on a floppy disk using the instrument To use the instrument to display or record measured computed data copied to a floppy disk the file containing measured computed data must be copied from the floppy disk to the RAM disk However data in ASCII format cannot be copied It is not possible to change the file name when copying the file Note No file copying is possible during computations During copying GP IB RS 232 C RS 422 A RS 485 communication remains inactive IM DR231 01E 11 17 ejeg dn jegs pue payndwog peanseejy Buipeeg Dui es 11 6 Copying in ASCII Format Relevant Keys series EDS aeons ESC RECORD SET MEMORY DE Func print C Freep INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR EVLOCH cuart set enter TCU Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be k
212. ed for each equation is 16 or smaller Setting the recording span Set the recording span for computation results The setting range is from 9999999 to 99999999 A decimal point can be placed in such positions as shown in and The unit specified in 6 1 Setting Recording Mode Engineering Unit Recording Channel and Recording Interval page 6 1 will be used LEFT Sets the left limit value of the recording span RIGHT Sets the right limit value of the recording span Note If the computation ON OFF computation equation or span setting is changed the alarm and partial compression recording settings for the corresponding channel will be reset uoneinduio IPPON LIN 34 IM DR231 01E 12 5 12 2 Setting a Computation Equation Example of Settings of CLOG When computing the maximum minimum maximum minus minimum sum and average of data measured at the same time on multiple channels you must configure groups beforehand Example of settings where the averages for channels 001 002 003 004 006 and 008 are computed Configuration of groups In the SET menu assign channels 001 002 003 004 006 and 008 to group G01 as shown below SET GROUP GROUPNo G01 G01 001 004 006 008 Define the computational expression that computes the average of group 1 as shown below CALC CLOG AVE G01 IM DR231 01E 12 6 12 3 Setting a
213. ed up by the lithium battery in the main unit IM DR231 01E 3 25 pue uonejeisu 3 8 Countering Noise Types and Features of Noise Sources Commercial Power Supply It is necessary to consider both 50 and 60Hz as noise components It is important to note that a power supply line in which a thyristor or inverter is incorporated functions not only as an energy surplus line but also as a supply surplus line Thyristor SCR A thyristor is used to control power through ON OFF modulation of commercial power by controlling the phase angle O Voltage noise 50Hz Load CN 60Hz O Thyristor A Unit heaters etc phase angle Current Thyristor waveform When the thyristor turns ON or OFF a pulse noise is superimposed on commercial power supply and its pulse width is approximately 115 Accordingly thyristor noise can be defined as follows thyristor noise commercial power supply pulse noise Inverter Commercial power supply is converted to direct current by a rectifier sometimes the thyristor is used as the rectifier to stabilize direct current and then modulated by a switching transistor and finally converted into alternating current at the desired frequency from tens to hundreds of Hz to drive a motor for example If the load to be driven is a fluorescent lamp the frequency is tens of kHz Accordingly inverter noise
214. een the Relay Status and Alarm Output Relay optional If the relay status of the alarm output relays is being displayed a 0 will be displayed as the first character The next character shows the slot number at which the alarm module A4 option or DI DO module R1 option is connected This number depends on the number of input channels and whether or not the communication interface option is present The display of the relay status for the alarm output relays depends on the installed options and is as follows When the alarm module is installed A4 option 10 indicators are reserved for or MI display When the DI DO module is installed R1 option 10 indicators are reserved for or II display although the alarm output relays correspond to the first two indicators on the left whereas the other eight indicators are not used When both the alarm module and the DI DO module are connected 20 indicators are reserved or WI display The left 10 indicators are used for displaying the status of alarm output relays for the alarm module whereas the right 10 indicators are used for displaying the status of for the alarm output relays for the DI DO module In this case the first two indicators of the second batch correspond to the alarm output relays whereas the other eight are not used rDisplay for alarm module for DI DO module module r 1 he r Not used 011
215. el 9 and ORANGE for channel 0 Enter a unit number and a slot number in the two boxes Note n order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 24 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 24 10 14 IM DR231 01E 10 7 Setting Key Lock Relevant Keys SETUP LOCK ALARM gt Select Setting Parameter FILTER RELAY BURN OUT RJC COLOR LOCKT EYLOGI Operating Procedure Main menu SETUP Cy LOCK Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure AS recens ESC Fone Co INS DEL cuart ser enter 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O Q keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Lower menu ENTER KEY LOCK NOT NOT USE KEY LOCK SET KEY LOCK USE NOT USE RECORD KEY LOCK
216. elect the action item REPORT IM DR231 01E suonoung 194 0 pue uonounJ uonoyAue 3 9 2 Copying Relevant Keys meros PS neces ESC SET COPY gt Select Setting Parameter SYSTEM UNIT TREND TIMER LOGIC COPY refe CJ Ce INS DEL RANGE ALARM CD EYL Operating Procedure Main menu Select set Press the SET key to enter the SET menu using the keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting charr set enter 2 SET __ Lower menu e COPY ENTER COPY RANGE ON ENTER OFF ON 4 COPY ALARM ON ENTER OFF ON 4 COPY OTHER ON ENTER OFF ON 4 COPY 001ch TO 002 10ch D 4 COPY 001ch TO 002 10ch D COPY 001ch TO 002 10ch ENTER 4 SET OK ESC 9 12 IM DR231 01E 9 2 Copying Selecting range copying COPY RANGE ON Copies the type of input measuring ranges recording spans linear scaling engineering units and tags set OFF The copying of ranges is disabled Selecting alarm copying ON Copies the type of alarm alarm values and relay internal switch setting OFF The copying of alarms is disabled Selecting c
217. election of Alarm Display Hold ALARM HOLD Select whether the alarm display is held or not when the alarm is reset OFF hold ON not hold The default setting is OFF Selection of A D Converter Integration Time A D INTG Select the A D converter integration time Select it from the following AUTO the frequency of 50 60 Hz is automatically switched corresponding to the power frequency of this instrument However AUTO does not function when using DC power supply Selecting AUTO will set the A D integration time to 50 Hz 20 ms 50 Hz the integration time is set to 20 ms 50 Hz 60 Hz the integration time is set to 16 7 ms 60 Hz 100 ms the integration time is set to 100 ms 10 Hz The default setting is AUTO If the model is a DR130 DR231 with P6 option or a DR241 with 2 power supply voltage specification it is set to a default value of 50 Hz 20 ms If you are using the instrument on a 60 Hz power supply change the A D integration time to 60 Hz 16 7 ms Selection of Filter FILTER Select whether the input filter is operated or not Select it from the following OFF Not operated ON Operated The default setting is OFF Note n order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 24 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 24 10 8 IM DR231 01E
218. ength 30 m grid 10mm for DR231 DR241 B9627AY 10 Recording width 250mm length 30 m grid 25mm for DR231 DR241 B9855AY 10 Recording width 150mm length 20 m grid 10mm for DR130 IM DR231 01E Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class I instrument provided with terminal for protective grounding The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument If this instrument is used in a manner not sepecified in this manual the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired Also YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The following symbols are used on this instrument IN To avoid injury death of personnel iL Function grounding terminal This or damage to the instrument the terminal should not be used as a operator must refer to an Protective grounding terminal explanation in the rs Manual Bes Users Manua N Alternating current or Service Manual Protective grounding terminal ON power OFF power Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions Noncompliance might result in injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument Power Supply Ensure the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power Power Cord and Plug To prevent an electric shock or fire be sure to use the powe
219. ent at the same point Do not turn the power of other equipment ON OFF during operation Do not use the burnout function Wiring Input Signal Lines Universal and DCV TC DI input modules Terminals Screw type terminal Clamp type terminal DC voltage TC contact Measurement using b B A RTD RTD s cannot be made with DCV TC DI modules CH1 may A H2 0 0 CH1 CH2 S ws E CH4 E CH3 1 q 3 TT H Low T a 1 o e i 3 H1 P H amp CH10 ene 4 0 CH9 Wiring Diagram DC voltage input DI input contact DC input DC voltage input Ne DC current input L Shunt resistor Note For 4 to 20mA input shunt resistance value should be 2500 0 1 TC input RTD input non AWI Compensation lead 10Q max leadwire Three wire resistances should be approx equal 10Q max for Pt100Q and Pt50Q 10 max for Cu10Q IM DR231 01E 3 17 pue uonejeisu 3 5 Connecting the Signal Lines Wiring Output Signal and Remote Control Signal Lines DI DO and
220. ept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET ENTER MEMORY COPY ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 COPY MODE TO FDD ENTER TOFDD FROM FDD 4 COPY TYPE DATA ENTER DATA PANEL 4 COPY FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC DDD 4 COPY CONVERT ON ENTER OFF ON 4 COPY CH 001 A05 D gt Select Channel No 4 COPY CH 001 A05 ENTER gt Select Channel No COPY DAT 1 200 D gt Start limit 1 200000 4 COPY DAT 1 200 ENTER gt End limit 1 200000 4 Copying 4 COPY OK End of setting ESC gt 11 18 IM DR231 01E 11 6 Copying in ASCII Format Explanation Measured computed data in the internal RAM disk is converted to ASCII data then copied to a floppy disk The identifier is CSV Conversion channel COPY CH Used to select a channel whose data is to be converted to ASCII data The measurement and computation channels are arranged in order as shown below DR130 001 002 020 A01 A02 A30 Setting 020 A02 for example converts data on channels 020 A01 and A02 DR231 241 001 002 030 A01 A02 A30 Setting 030 A02 for example converts data on channels 030 A01 and A02 Conversion data COPY DAT Used to specify the conversion range for the channels speci
221. er menu SCALE PR ENTER 9001 01 SCALE PR ON2 gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 SCALE PR ON2 D OQ gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 SCALE PR ON2 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 ON3 i ESC i LIST PR ENTER 001 01 LIST PR ON gt ON 00 RRR HEN Select Channel No 4 001 01 LIST PREON D O ONB 0010 BERR HEB Select Channel No H 001 01 LIST PRZON ENTER ONB oo NMEEEENENE HEB OFF ON 4 ESC LIST FMT ENTER LIST RANGE ON ENTER OFF ON 4 LIST ALARM ON ENTER OFF ON i LIST PRINT ON ENTER OFF ON 4 LIST OTHER ON ENTER OFF ON 4 ESC IM DR231 01E 6 6 Setting Scale Printout List Printout and List Format Scale Printout SCALE PR This setting can be assigned to each channel individually The scaled values will be printed out with trend recordings This printout will not occur when a zone of 49mm or less is set The scaled values of the following channels will be printed For example when the recording zone of ch 1 is set to 49mm and of ch 2 is 150mm the scaled values of ch 2 will be printed at the position of ch 1 The default setting is ON2 If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A30 When Partial Expanded Recording is OFF OFF Scaled values will not be printed ONI when the recording zone is 150mm or more sca
222. erent is that determined for each corresponding range As a result it SUOI IPUOD eui Dunes exceeds the measurable range an error occurs For example if channels whose measurement ranges are 20 mV 2 V and type T thermocouple are set and the boundary value is set to 10000 the following applies The boundary value of the channel whose measurement range is 20 mV 10 000 mV The boundary value of the channel whose measurement range is 2 V 1 0000 V and The boundary value of the channel whose measurement range is type T thermocouple 1000 0 C As the measurement range of type T thermocouple is 200 0 to 400 0 C an error occurs for this channel For decimal point positions for each measurement range see Chapter 14 Specifications Points to Note when Using Partially Expanded Recording Partial recording cannot be carried out if the input type of the computation channels is SKIP or DI or if the computation channels are OFF Partially expanded settings will be automatically canceled when either of the following changes occur the input type has been changed the measurement range has been changed the recording span has been changed linear scaling settings have been changed the reference channel for difference between channels has been changed IM DR231 01E 6 7 6 4 Setting Tag Digital Printout and Manual Printout Relevant Keys mero PENSA neces ESC
223. esee 4 2 5 3 MAT er toe eade a eee e o e E 1 2 to 1 4 2 1 4 3 MANUAL 1d teer cune oe 4 4 measurement values esseeeeeeeeeee eene 4 2 4 3 Page PAGE 12 deett at eee 2 1 4 6 remote local control status eee 2 1 Relay status tere EH RE Rs 2 1 4 11 4 12 Display mode See mode Display update interval sse See interval Dot printing 6 ertet REC e E S 10 2 Dot printing recording system See also trend recording 10 4 E Engineering unit MIU 4 2 4 3 Printout 2 13 6 2 Edge action einer ee EURO Ren 9 9 Event event action functions 2 18 9 1 to 9 11 External input output sees 2 19 External RJC EXT ec eite tee ee eene See RJC F Fail failure Output a 2 19 Feed e 7 1 Ferrite uo c eoe EU ERE IRURE QE 3 11 3 13 3 35 Filter Input eo eee trente pee 2 4 10 8 NOISE 4 Lv GF AERE 3 30 Firstchannel oen eR ERE eect 5 2 FIX recording interval esee 2 9 6 2 Floppy disk Handling eec eene ER ERR NET ed URS 1 5 Formatting eoe RR Ua 11 25 Front dOoE i eia eh eg e Ee eg 1 2 to 1 4 Functions Action we 2 18 ze e E RR RENNES 2 14 to 2 16 Alarm display hold ee 2 16
224. ess the SET key for about three seconds Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key FUNC key FUNC key FUNC key FUNC key FUNC key FUNC key Press the FUNC key for about three seconds Press the FUNC key for about three seconds Press the FUNC key for about three seconds Press the FUNC key for about three seconds SET MATCH TIME Section 6 8 SET GROUP SET UP RELAY Section 6 8 Section 10 4 SET UP BURN OUT Section 10 5 SET UP RJC SET UP LOCK SET UP FUNC PARM Section 10 5 Section 10 7 Section 10 8 SET UP SET PARM Section 10 9 SET UP REPORT TIMER RESET KEY LOCK ON REPORT START REPORT STOP REPORT RECALL START REPORT PRINT START MSG BUF CLEAR MODULE INF COMM INF RAM INIT Section 10 12 Section 9 3 Section 9 3 Section 10 12 Section 10 12 Section 10 12 Section 10 12 Section 9 4 Section 9 4 Section 9 4 Section 9 4 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key see section 10 8 IM DR231 01E 15 1 1 About DARWIN What is DARWIN Created from a completely new con
225. event action functions GR TREND This executes the recording in a channel in which the group setting page 6 17 has already been made For this set the dot recording see on page 10 14 to GROUP and start recording by key operations following the RECORD given above e Select any group from G01 to G07 Only one identical group can be set in the event action functions Note If Chart End appears counter actions such as RECORD ON are not executed Actions such as RECORD or SPEED CHG may operate later than an event occurrence For example with RECORD set in the action setting if an alarm occurs the measured values in that condition are not recorded This is because recording operations are delayed due to an action operation 9 10 IM DR231 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions MATH available if the instrument is equipped with the MATH function or floppy disk drive START Starts computation STOP Stops computation RESET Resets computation channel data at the end of completion of the first computation in case an event takes place CLEAR Resets computation channel data immediately in case an event takes place RST 01 to RESET 07 Resets the computing channel data registered in the specified group number to 0 This is invalid for measuring channels The timing for resetting the data is as follows Not reset Computed value 9 DP TE A A x Start computing
226. fied by COPY CH Enter the conversion start data No and end data No Data size When measured computed data is converted to ASCII data 12 bytes will be used for each data set Thus data size can be calculated as follows Data size 178 20 x number of conversion channels 2 24 12 x number of conversion channels 1 x number of data sets to be converted Copying is not possible if destinations memory size is insufficient Note When a file is copied to a floppy disk the file creation date will be replaced by the date on which the file is copied IM DR231 01E 11 19 ejeg dn jegs pue payndwog peanseejy Buipeeg Dui es 11 6 Copying in ASCII Format Sample by Stand alone Data format ASCII converted data is saved in the following format Trigger Time 96 02 14 15 05 07 Trigger date time Sample Rate 2 Saving interval Start Data No 14 ASCII conversion data No Data Length 20 Data length number of data sets Ch Name TURBINE1 TURBINE2 TURBINES TURBINE7 TURBINEO Channel No or tag Unit mV O Kg mm C 4 Unit YY MM DD HH MM SS S 96 02 14 15 05 07 0 12 520 315 00 23 2 5 0 16 3 96 02 14 15 05 09 0 12 322 315 05 23 2 4 9 15 9 96 02 14 15 05 11 0 13 724 315 20 23 3 4 8 15 9 96 02 14 15 05 13 0 13 220 315 12 23 3 4 9 15 8 96 02 14 15 05 15 0 13
227. for CLOG Communication input data Data written to the instrument s memory via communication interface Specified by data No C01 to C30 Data on internal RAM disk Applicable only for the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 equipped with a floppy disk drive Measured computed data saved in the internal RAM disk Use the following numbers to specify data Measured data DR130 M001 to M020 DR231 241 M001 to M030 12 2 IM DR231 01E 12 1 Overview of the Computation Function Computed data DR130 231 241 MAO1 to MA30 Handling of data for computation For computation measured computed data is treated as a value having no unit For instance if the measured data for channel 001 is 20 mV and the measured data for channel 002 is 20 V the computation result of 001 002 will be 40 Priority of Operators Priority of operators when they are used in an equation is shown below Operators are listed in order of priority from the highest to the lowest Type Operator Function ABS SORO LNO EXPO MAX MINO SUMO AVEQ HOLDO RESET Repeated multiplication T Sign logical negation NOT Multiplication division jJ Addition subtraction Greater smaller GT LT GE LE Equal not equal EQ NE Logical AND AND Logical OR exclusive OR OR XOR Alarm Up to 4 alarms can be set for each computation channel Only two types of alarm are av
228. g INST Instantaneous value at the time of making report AVE Average maximum and minimum over the computing period SUM Sum and cumulative sum over the computing period Sum and Cumulative Sum Sum The total sum over an hour for hourly reports the sum over a day for daily reports or the sum over a month for monthly reports The DR recorder resets this value each time it makes any of these reports Cumulative sum The total sum up to the preset time to make a report in the case of hourly reports or the sum up to a preset time of the day to make a report in the case of daily reports The DR recorder resets this value at each preset time or at each preset time of the day for report making The DR recorder does not perform cumulative summation for monthly reports As an example the following illustrates the process of summation and cumulative summation for hourly reports The example shows the case where the preset time to make a report is 8 00 Cumulative summation 2 Summation Results of et beu computing 9 00 10 00 11 00 7 00 8 00 9 00 10 00 A A AWA A Time to make an hourly report A Preset time to make report Unit of Summation SUM UNIT Such input data items as the flowrate that have a unit in sec min hour or day when simply summed give results of computing different from their actual values This occurs because the unit of such a data item differs from that of the measureme
229. g The recording format is set individually For details see Section 10 2 Setting Recording Format on page 10 3 OFF Stops recording The level action does not include record ON OFF functions When the level action is set the ON OFF functions using the RECORD key are disabled The edge and level actions cannot be set simultaneously For the level action only one action is available MANUAL PR This enables manual printing For applicable functions see Section 2 3 Recording Functions on page 2 13 DIGITAL PR Digital printing starts in the analog trend mode The recording intervals depend on the timer setting see Section 2 9 When the event action functions are set normal digital print functions are disabled Only one function can be set in the event action functions MSG PR Prints messages For details see Section 7 3 Starting Message Printing on page 7 3 Select any message from the corresponding codes 01 to 20 MSG DISP Displays messages For details see Section 7 3 Starting Message Printing on page 7 3 Select any message from the corresponding codes 01 to 20 cancel the message display press any key SPEED CHG Changes chart speed 1 to chart speed 2 When the recording interval is set to automatic page 6 2 the recording interval is also changed When the event is released the chart speed and recording interval return to their original positions Only one function can be set in the
230. gain contact your nearest Sales representative 145 Hardware becomes faulty during calibration Turn off the power and then on Calibrate again If the same error occurs again contact your nearest Sales representative 170 The IP address does not belong to any of the Set the correct IP address classes A B or C 171 There is a hole in the mask or the host address Set the correct subnet mask section is not released 172 The net address section including the subnet Set the correct net address does not match the subnet section of the IP address 173 The host address section of the IP address is Set the correct IP address either all zeroes or all ones ROM ERROR System ROM error Contact your nearest sales representative ROM ERROR System ROM error Contact your nearest sales representative RAM ERROR Main memory error Contact your nearest sales representative RAM DISK ERROR RAM disk error Contact your nearest sales representative FLOPPY ERROR Floppy disk error Contact your nearest sales representative MAIN NV READ ERROR Internal nonvolatile memory read error Contact your nearest sales representative MAIN NV WRITE ERROR Internal nonvolatile memory write error Contact your nearest sales representative CARRIAGE CANNOT MOVE Printer eror Contact your nearest sales representative SYSTEM ERROR LI System error O0 number Check whether each unit or O00 number power code is connected properly after turning off the power switch If
231. ge of chart speed recording interval Group trend recording Starting stopping clearing resetting computation Saving reading measured computed data reading set up data Communication Interface Option Either the GP IB interface RS 232 C interface RS 422 A RS 485 interface or ethernet is available as an option and should be specified at the time of ordering For details regarding operation and commands refer to IMDR231 11E Internal Illumination Option Clear internal illumination for easy distinction of traces is available as an option Internal illumination will be provided when the power is turned ON IM DR231 01E 2 19 2 6 Other Functions Carrying Handle Option A carrying handle is available as an option for the stand alone model DR231 for making transport of the instrument easier FDD DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 This function enables saving reading of measured data computed data and set up data for SET mode to from the internal RAM disk and saving reading of set up data for SET and SETUP modes to from a floppy disk This also allows you to use events provided by the event action function as a trigger to save retrieve measured computed data to from the internal RAM or retrieve set up data when an event takes place Computation Function Option This function is available if the instrument is equipped with the computation function M model This function executes the following computations and displays and rec
232. h Between input terminals 1000V AC 50 60Hz for one minute Between an input terminal and ground 1500V AC 50 60Hz for one minute Input source resistance DCV TC 2kQ or lower RTD 10Q or lower per line Pt100 2 50 or lower per line Pt50 2 1Q or lower per line Cu10 2 Temperature coefficient Zero 0 0196 of range C full span 0 01 of range C 0 02 of span C for CU10Q Thermocouple burnout Detected a TC range On Off enabled current of 4A detectable pulse width of approx 5115 2 KQ or lower is considered normal 100 kQ or greater is considered disconnected Detection interval for thermocouple burnout Detected at each measurement interval Input Type Power monitor Terminal Configuration Single phase use one channel each for voltage and current clamp Three phase use three channels each for voltage and current clamp Shortest Measurement Interval 2s Method of Input Transformer isolated input with isolation between channels separated channels Method of Measurement and Computing Digital multiplication Input Ranges Voltage 25 or 250 Vrms Current 0 5 or5 A In three phase measurement or single phase three wire measurement the current voltage ranges are identical between the respective phases or lines the current voltage ranges are set in common between the respective channels Measured Frequency Range 45 to 65 Hz Wiring Methods DU400 12 Single phase two wire DU400 22
233. hannels will be displayed on each sub display Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms Measurement Values Engineering Units and Selected Display Mode Same as for the AUTO mode refer to page 4 3 IM DR231 01E 4 7 4 4 Using the ALARM SEARCH Display Points to Note when Using the ALARM SEARCH Display When all three displays are set to ALARM SEARCH display the main display will start displaying data of the channel with the smallest channel number on sub display 1 data of the next two channels will be displayed while on sub display 2 data of the next two channels will be displayed When the data are updated the display will be replaced with data of the next consecutive channel When the input type of all channels is set to SKIP then depending on the display settings as described below NO ALARM will be displayed When the main display is set to ALARM SEARCH display then this will be displayed on the main display regardless the settings of sub display 1 and 2 When sub display 1 is set to ALARM SEARCH display and the main display is set to any other mode than ALARM SEARCH then this will be displayed on sub display 1 regardless the setting of sub display 2 When sub display 2 is set to ALARM SEARCH display and the main display is set to any other mode than ALARM SEARCH and sub display 1 to any other mode than ALARM SEARCH then this will be displayed on sub display 2 When on any of the m
234. he FEED key is pressed while recording the paper is fed without stopping the recording Notes on starting recording The carriage will stop temporarily at the left or right side for each line as shown below When printing in logging mode or manual printing Printing direction Channel no TAG selection Temporary stop in seconds Horizontal Channel 4 0 TAG of 7 to 8 characters 3 1 TAG of 9 to 16 characters 5 2 Vertical Channel 2 0 TAG of 7 to 16 characters 3 0 The values in are for the DR130 List printing Temporary stop For 0 5 seconds Note In the case of the DR130 the carriage does not come to a pause in manual or list printing IM DR231 01E HB 7 2 Starting Manual Printing List Printing and Header Printing MAN PR START Geneve E ESC regem J 5 INS DEL gt Enter amp Print Start Stop CHART MAN PR START LIST START HEADER START Crea RM urne cuart ser enrter CHIP Press the PRINT key to enter the PRINT menu To display the print menu from the RANGE ALARM CHART or SET SET3 menu press the DISP key MAN PR START ENTER CSKA LIST START ENTER C O HEADER START ENTER Starting the manual print MAN PR START Press the ENTER key to start manual pri
235. he following channels to computation channels A01 to A30 M001 to M030 M001 to M020 for the DR130 Read data for measurement channels MAOI to MA30 Read data for computation channels If the instrument is equipped with the computation function M1 model read data can be calculated in the same way that measured computed data is calculated Like measurement channels it is possible to make the unit alarm zone partial compression tag linear interpolation dot color and recording settings for computation channels 01 to A30 However only the upper limit and lower limit alarms are available Specify channel Nos A01 to A30 when specifying channel Nos ejeg dn jegs pue peanseejy Buipeeg Dui es IM DR231 01E 11 9 11 2 Reading Measured and Computed Data Reading data from a floppy disk To read data from a floppy disk it is necessary to copy the data from the floppy disk to the RAM disk However data in ASCII format cannot be read See section 11 5 Copying a Data File for more information Status display during reading The following status symbols are displayed in the sub display 2 lowest display section It is not possible to make media settings other than reading stop setting while measured computed data is being read See Section 11 5 Copying a Data File for more information Y Reading is in progress ul Awaiting a trigger 11 10 IM DR231 01E 11 3 Saving Set up Data Sa
236. he key lock and how to use the external in output function Chapter 10 Basic Settings SET UP Explains functions which usually do not need to be changed and how to set these Chapter 11 Saving Reading Measured Computed and Set up Data disk Explains how to save measured data computed data and set up data to the internal RAM disk or floppy and read them into the instrument Chapter 12 Executing Computation Available with the M1 Model Explains the computation function optional Chapter 13 Trouble Shooting and Maintenance Explains maintenance procedures error messages and calibration procedures Chapter 14 Specifications Explains specifications for all features of DR Index Gives the index in main menu and alphabetic order IM DR231 01E Conventions Used in this Manual Used Symbols The following symbol marks are used to attract the operator s attention Affixed to the DR130 231 241 indicating that for safety the operator should refer to the appropriate User s Manual For a list of the User s Manuals refer to page 1 injury or death to the user WARNING Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent the danger of Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent damage to the CAUTION DR130 231 241 Note Provides information that is important for proper operation of the DR130 231 241 Relevant Keys Indicates the relevant panel
237. ial operators Type Operator Example Description Previous value PRE PRE 001 Obtain the previous measured data of channel 001 Hold HOLD HOLD 001 TLOG SUM 002 When the measured value of channel 001 changes from 0 to a nonzero value maintain the integrated value of the measured data of channel 002 while the measured value of channel 001 is nonzero Reset RESET Q RESET 001 TLOG SUM 002 When the channel 001 nonzero reset the integrated value of the measured data of channel 002 Previously measured data or computed data In the case of computed data the value is set to 0 when the computation is reset At the start of the computation if the computation was reset the value is 0 If it was not reset the value is the last value of the previous computation The value that can be specified inside the is limited to the input channel number 001 to 030 or the computation channel number A01 to A30 Each computing equation can be used once When specifying HOLD A B or RESET A B A and B are channel numbers or computing equations These can be used once in the beginning of the computing equation Limitations in computing equations Multiple operators can be used in 1 computing equation But there are following limitations Number of characters that can be used 40 characters Total number of channel numbers and constants 16 Computation erroro ccurs when 16 exceeded and the computed res
238. if the power is restored The recorder prints a report for data acquired up to the power failure however immediately after it recovers from the power failure If a power failure time is longer than 12 hours the DR recorder does not print a report even if the menu item for automatic printing is set to on In that case you can print a report from the FUNC menu or send data to a communication output Time Intervals for Printing Type of Report Printing Format Number of Columns Chart Length Printing Time Hourly report Standard TI 20 cm approximately 4 minutes Daily report Standard TI 20 cm approximately 4 minutes Enhanced 437 114 cm approximately 22 minutes Monthly report Standard TI 20 cm approximately 4 minutes Enhanced 542 141 cm approximately 27 minutes The printing time is maximum when you print an hourly report and a daily report each in the standard format and a monthly report in the enhanced format all at the same time Required printing time 4 4 27 35 minutes Format of Output via Communication Binary 14 12 IM DR231 01E 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S3 Power Supply Rated supply voltage AC power supply 100 to 240 VAC freely selected DC power supply 12 to 28 VDC AC power supply for P6 option 100 to 240 VAC 100 200 V auto switch Except if the instrument is operated at 200 V it does not switch back to 100 V In this case turn OFF the AC power switch on the back p
239. ile pressing the DISP key SET UP Section 10 1 SCAN INTVL A D integration time Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP A D INTG Section 10 3 Filter Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP FILTER Section 10 3 Make sure that the total number of setting changes including calibrations does not surpass 100000 2 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Chart Speed Settings Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Chart speed 1 CHART key CHART Section 6 2 Chart speed 2 Press the SET key for about three seconds SET CHART2 Section 6 2 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Recording Settings Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Logging Analog trend SET key SET SYSTEM Section 6 1 switch dot printing cycle Recording channel SET key SET TREND Section 6 1 Recording zone Press the SET key for about three seconds SET ZONE Section 6 3 Partial compression Press the SET key for about three seconds SETZPERTIAL Section 6 3 Tag Press the SET key for about three seconds SET TAG Section 6 4 Channel to digital print Press the SET key for about three seconds SET DIGITAL PR Section 6 4 number of rows to print Channel to manual print Press the SET key for about three seconds SET MANUAL PR Section 6 4 Alarm print Press the SET key for about three seconds SET ALARM PR S
240. ill be displayed using sub display 1 and 2 also Channel No Difference between Channels delta and Alarms Same as for the AUTO mode refer to page 4 2 Measurement Values Same as for the AUTO mode refer to page 4 2 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then SKIP will be displayed When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected appears Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO mode refer to page 4 2 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then no engineering unit will be displayed PAGE Display for the Sub display 1 and 2 In combination with the page display of the main display data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously on each display Other display modes cannot be selected Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms and Selected Display Mode Same as for the AUTO mode refer to page 4 3 Measurement Values Same as for the AUTO mode refer to page 4 3 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then SKIP will be displayed When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected appears Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO mode refer to page 4 3 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then no engineering unit will be displayed IM D
241. impossible 3 32 IM DR231 01E 3 8 Countering Noise Shielded and twisted pair prevention of electromagnetic coupling an increase of impedance If it is difficult to keep the noise source away from the measuring instrument due to space limitations the use of a shielded twisted pair is effective electrostatic coupling can be completely cut off by shielding fora magnetic field shielding with a magnetic material iron permalloy etc can be employed However there are many restrictions on this use and perfect shielding is impossible Therefore use of a twisted pair is preferable Voltage em induced by the coil is proportional to the area of the coil The smaller the area of the coil becomes the smaller the noise becomes Coil em X Magnetic field If the directions of coils 1 and 2 are reversed by twisting as shown if the areas of the two coils are equal the induced voltages of the coils offset each other and total induced voltage em becomes zero em coil 1 coil 2 The above two principles are combined as a twisted pair Even though a shielded twisted pair is used a proper grounding method is still important Signal Source twisted pair shield Connected equipment If the signal source is not grounded Signal Source twisted pair shield Connected equipment Ground the signal cable shields collectively but separately from the power l
242. in display See chapter 4 Sub display 1 See chapter 4 Sub display 2 See chapter 4 Status indicator Operation panel z 2 Located behind the front door See chapters 3 to 12 Handle to open close the front door Front door Sa L Lia Power switch Floppy disk drive Only for DR241 1 Located inside the front door See page 3 18 Rear Example of DR241 with 30 input channels Power fuse Heat sink fins Located inside the instrument See page 13 2 Power terminal with a cover A See page 3 22 Function grounding terminal TINT TM Ss Terminals 1 4 IM DR231 01E 1 2 Names of Parts DR231 Desk top hybrid recorder Front Main display See chapter 4 Sub display 1 See chapter 4 Sub display 2 See chapter 4 Status indicator r I 1 o Oo a cc B ESSE T Operation panel 3 Se See chapters 3 to 12 Oo Handle to open close the front door c D Front door o 5 I ro oes aa Power switch See page 3 18 Floppy disk drive Only for DR231 1 Rear Example of DR231 with 30 input channels AC power supply model Heat sink fins Po
243. ine ground If the separation of grounds is impossible use the guard terminal IM DR231 01E 3 33 pue uonejesul 3 8 Countering Noise Insertion of noise filter and noise killer If the influence from noise cannot be eliminated by the methods described before use noise filter or noise killer Power line noise rejection Step 1 Insert an isolation transformer into the power line Increasing impedance to high frequency Power supply 1 i E The instrument Most of the noise is high frequency noise 100V AC with shield which is grounded Step 2 Insert a power line noise filter available on the market High frequency noise is divided by decreasing impedance to ground through C and increasing impedance through L Power supply e 100V AC The instrument mar C E wart TOT WU lE 31 Note 1 Ground the noise filter and the recorder in common Note 2 Since insertion of a noise filter increases the by pass current regarded as leakage current make sure that the leakage current is within the specified value When the noise contains wide frequency components While one point grounding is effective at a low frequency it sometimes forms a loop and has an adverse effect on a high frequency Ex Connecting a power meter and The instrument grounded at one point to an inverter lt AC t One point Noise so
244. ing the recording refer to page 2 10 on the right side of the chart The first time recording starts after the power has been turned ON only the starting time will be printed After that the current starting time will be printed together with the stopping time of the previous recording To the right of the starting time a bar will be printed as a reference point to the time of starting Selecting the Number of Columns for Digital Printouts You can select how many columns where one column equals data of one channel will be used in one line for printing out measurement data Selection of the Pitch of Channel Printouts You can select at which distance the channel numbers or tags will be printed You can also select this printout OFF When tags have been selected this distance applies to the tag printout Selection of the Pitch of Title Printouts You can select at which distances the title will be repeatedly printed You can also select this printout OFF Selection of the Scaled Values Printout You can select the printing pattern for scaled values refer to page 2 10 You can also select this printout OFF Selection of the Reference Point of Scaled Values You can select whether or not to print a reference point for the positions of the scaled values Items for Logging Mode Selection of the Recording Direction Horizontal Vertical You can select whether printouts will occur in horizontal or vertical direction Example of a printout i
245. ions and explanations AII the files in the internal RAM disk will be lost when the RAM is initialized NO Initialization not executed YES Initializes the information It takes about ten seconds to initialize the information IM DR231 01E suonoung 194 0 pue uonounJ uonoyAue 3 os Fail Chart End Output and Remote Control Signal Input Function See Section 2 6 Other Functions on page 2 19 Connections and Notice See Section 3 5 Connecting the Signal Lines on page 3 16 IM DR231 01E 9 18 9 6 Summer Winter Time Relevant Keys SET DST RECORD ALARM gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT TREND TIMER LOGIC DST COPY Operating Procedure Main menu Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the O Q keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept o OS Recens ESC reper CO C INS DEL COD ened cuart ser enter New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting SET 1 ao Lower menu 4 DST ENTER SET TIME SUMMER ENTER SUMMER WINTER 4 SUMMER 96 05 01 00 ENTER gt Set Data amp Time YY MM DD HH 00 00 4 GET OK ESC
246. is changed in dot recording select whether to print with the changed chart speed or not OFF does not print ON prints The default setting is ON Selection of Printing Record Start Stop Time ON OFF MARK PR In trend recording select whether the record start stop time is printed or not OFF not printed ON printed The default setting is ON Selection of Number of Columns for Digital Printing DIGITAL PR CLMN Select to print measured values for the number of channels in a horizontal line DR130 Select either 1 or 2 columns The default setting is 1 If TAG is defined using 8 or more characters the recorder prints for the option 1 column DR231 241 Select 1 2 3 or 4 The default setting is 1 If TAG has been selected in selecting the channel number TAG choice is 1 2 or 3 when the TAG name consists of 8 characters or more If TAG uses 16 characters the TAG entry is limited to two columns Selection of Channel Number Printing Pitch CHANNEL PITCH In trend recording select how many millimeters are taken as the channel number printing interval When TAG has been selected in channel number TAG selection the TAG corresponding to the channel number is printed OFF not printed 5 0 mm printed every 5 0 mm 12 5 mm printed every 12 5 mm The default setting is 5 0 mm Selection of Title Printing Pitch TITLE PITCH In trend recording select how many millimeters are
247. it number The second digit denotes the module number slot number The configurable range depends on the location where the power monitor module is connected See page 3 8 for more information Ending Channel Number The two digits that follow the starting channel number constitute the ending channel number Normally the starting channel number and the ending channel number should be the same If you want to skip any consecutive number of channels enter the range of those channel numbers When you move the cursor from the starting to the ending channel number the ending channel number becomes the same as the last two digits of the starting channel number Setting the Wiring Method Select from the following methods Single phase two wire 1Ph2W Single phase three wire 1Ph3W three wire input modules only Three phase three wire 2 Voltage 2 Current 3Ph3W 2I three wire input modules only Three phase three wire 3 Voltage 3 Current 3 Ph3W 3I three wire input module only Three phase four wire 3Ph4W three wire input modules only Setting the Input Range Select from the following ranges 250V 0 5A 250V 5A 25V 0 5A 25V 5A This setting is common to all channels Any change to this setting also changes the settings of the rest of the channels Impose a voltage or current signal to the input module within the limits you set here Setting the Parameter Being Shown and Recorded A power monitor module measures the voltage or current through the
248. k drive make sure that channel Nos are set between A01 and A30 when specifying the measurement units for computation channels Setting the Channels to be Recorded TREND Trend recording Recording can be set ON OFF per channel The default setting is ON ON recording will take place OFF recording will not take place The display will show W for channels set to ON and channels set to OFF Refer to page 4 10 on which channel is being displayed If you are installing optional computation channels channel Nos must be set to A01 to A30 Digital Printout in the Analog Trend Mode Refer to 6 4 Setting Tag Digital Printout and Manual Printout on page 6 9 IM DR231 01E 6 1 Setting the Recording Mode Engineering Unit Recording Channel and Recording Interval Setting the Recording Interval TIMER of the Digital Printout for the Logging and Analog Trend Mode TIMER No You can set up to six recording intervals A recording interval can be set for each channel individually Refer to 6 4 on page 6 9 for details TIME MODE The following two modes can be selected The default is RELATIVE RELATIVE the number of days hours minutes can be set to any value between 00 days 00 hours 01 minute to 31 days 23 hours and 59 minutes in one minute steps The default setting is 00 days 01 hours and 00 minutes ABSOLUTE the time interval can be selected from the following settings The default setting is 1h Imin 2min
249. l RJC Within the setting range of reference channel No TC thermocouple must be selected as the type of input to the reference channel If the channel No or type of input for the reference channel or the type of thermocouple is 2 1eeurqyueds 1ndu ay Buas changed the alarm and partial compression recording functions will be turned OFF If the type of input for the reference channel or the type of thermocouple is changed the RRJC settings will be cleared and the type of input and measuring range for the reference channel will be set to the one which was in effect before the change was made The recording span will be set to the initial value of the measuring range Setting the Recording Span The measurement range is decided according to the type of input The recording left and right span must lie within the measurement range However the recording span is 0 to 1 for the DI input type The value on the left side of the SPAN menu shows the left span and the value on the right side of the SPAN menu shows the right span For the remote RJC the setting range for recording span is the same as that for the reference channel IM DR231 01E 5 3 5 2 Setting Linear Scaling and the Recording Span Relevant Keys meros PS neces ESC 001 10 SCL VOLT 2V GO C gt CHART SKIP VOLT TC RTD DI DELTA SCL EY chart ser e
250. l appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SETUP OOQ Lower menu ALARM ENTER ALARM RH TIME 8 ENTER 12345678910111213 14 15 4 ALARM RL TIME 8 ENTER 123456789101112131415 4 ALARM HYS 0 5 ENTER 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 CA 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 0 4 ALARM HOLD OFF ENTER OFF ON 4 ALARM SET ESC g A D INTG ENTER A D INTG AUTO D AUTO 50Hz 60Hz 100ms 4 aD A D INTG SET ESC D 2 o 5 FILTER ENTER FILTER OFF ENTER OFF ON FILTER SET ESC c 5 DR231 01E 10 7 10 3 Select Alarm Interval Hysteresis Hold A D Converter Integration Time Filter Explanation Selection of Interval for High Limit of Rate Of Change Alarm ALARM RH TIME Set the number of measurement repeats in Interval 2 measurement interval x measurement repeats Select 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 or 15 The default setting is 8 Selection of Interval for Low Limit of Rate Of Change Alarm ALARM RL TIME The same selection method as the above Selection of Alarm Hysteresis ALARM HYS Applied to high low limit alarm Select 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 or 1 0 The default setting is 0 5 S
251. larms High limit alarm Low limit alarm Alarm occurrence Set alarm Measurement values Alarm release value 1V n Hysteresis Approx 0 5 1V Hysteresis Approx 0 5 Alarm release Set alarm Measurement values Alarm occurrence value Internal Switches Sixty internal switches are provided which can be operated upon alarm occurrences These switches are only for internal operations and are used in combination with the event action function refer to page 2 18 Alarm Output Relays If both A4 option and R1 option are installed twelve alarm output relays are provided for external output 9 14 IM DR231 01E 2 4 Alarm Function Operation Mode Energizing De energizing Setting The alarm output relays can be selected to be energized or de energized on alarm occurrence Using de energizing the alarm output relay will be activated when the power drops in the same way as when an alarm occurs This setting can be done for each relay individually Relay contacts in case of energizing A contact When power is OFF When powerison When power is on and no alarm has and an alarm has occurred occurred hae 2 c 5 NO C NO C NO C 9 When power is OFF When power is on When power is on and alarm has and an alarm has o occurred occurred NO C NO C NO C C contact When power is OFF When Power isON When Power is ON and no alarm has and an alarm has occurred NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC
252. led values at each 20 interval of the recording span will be printed at positions at 20 intervals of the zone when the recording zone is 50mm to 149mm scaled values at 0 and 100 of the recording span will be printed at 0 and 100 positions of the zone ON2 Scaled values at 0 and 100 of the recording span will be printed at 0 and 100 positions of the zone ON3 when the recording zone is 100mm or more scaled values at 0 50 and 100 of the recording span will be printed at 0 50 and 100 positions of the zone when the recording zone is 50mm to 99mm scaled values at 0 and 100 of the recording span will be printed at 0 and 100 positions of the zone When Partial Expanded Recording is ON OFF Scaled values will not be printed ONI ON2 ON3 when the recording zone is 100mm or more scaled values at 0 100 of the recording span and at the boundary value will be printed at 0 100 and boundary value positions of the zone when the recording zone is 50mm to 99mm scaled values at 0 and 100 of the recording span will be printed at 0 and 100 positions of the zone List Printout LIST PR This setting can be assigned to each channel individually The default setting is ON Starting a list printout can be done at the PRINT menu refer to 7 2 on page 7 2 If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A30
253. ls A01 to A30 To set an equation for one channel only specify for instance A01 A01 MODE ON Computation equation In addition to operators described on page 12 1 the following symbols can be used in equations Used for setting K Used if equations contain constants K01 to K30 M Used to specify the measurement channel No for which the data saved on the RAM disk is to be re generated Applicable for the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 equipped with a floppy disk drive A Used to specify the computation channel No for which the data saved on the RAM disk is to be re generated Applicable for the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 equipped with a floppy disk drive Also used to specify a computation channel number as in A05 C to specify communication input data digital data G Used to specify the group No for which CLOG computation of data of a group measured on the same time is to be used Restrictions in Equations Computation channel No The specified computation equation for a computation channel No can contain only computation channel Nos as variable which are equal to or smaller than said computation channel No Example 02 001 01 In this example any computation channel No which is equal to or greater than A03 cannot be used Either TLOG or CLOG can be used in an equation Note Each equation must consist of up to 40 characters The total number of channels and constants to be us
254. lues of an operation mode with 30ch inputs and 30ch computations DR231 DR241 Maximum about 50 KB in case when saving the setting values of an operation mode with 30ch inputs and 30ch computations Measured values Binary data 2 bytes 1 data ASCII data 12bytes 1 data Computed values Binary data 4 bytes 1 data ASCII data 12 bytes 1 data Equation to calculate the total data capacity 256 64 x number of measured ch number of computation ch number of measured ch x 2 number of computation ch x 4 6 x specified data length suoneoyi2ods IM DR231 01E 14 9 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S3 Save interval of measured computed values Measurement interval of the recorder or select from 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min By combining with the event action function it can also sample 1 data at a time e g at each M FUNC key or remote control signal input Selection of the saving method of measured computed values WRITE MODE Direct Start saving the data when key operation occurs After saving specified length of data stop the saving process Trigger single Start saving the data when the trigger condition is met After saving a specified length of data stop the saving process Trigger repeat Start saving the data when the trigger condition is met Repeat the process of saving a specified length of data to 1 file until there is no more area in the memory Trigger condition All Trigger condi
255. move the prong or brackets designated with 1 and 2 in the figure below because they may interfere with both instruments 3 2 IM DR231 01E 3 2 How to Install DR130 AC power supply model im 338 30 207 98 8 iB L I I I L O Q CO e ce Care G m ow E ELLED o LE Oo IL LJ pe CJ C 10 N DC power supply model 30 252 98 8 O a Pes odi LJ C Rack Mounting Dimensions AC power supply model 32 Panel face 482 671 11 3 11 3 pP T 1 _ f In Li Y e 8 e al 9 CN E 27 1 2 1 TTS 1 amp 2 Removed N e DC power supply model 32 Panel face EJ
256. mputation Error and Setting the Time Axis for TLOG SUM Relevant Keys o LPS ee ESC RECORD SETU P MATH 0 LONC PRINT C Cre Select Setting Parameter TNS pain if PRN ADJ SCANINTVL RECORD MATH ALARM Al EYLOG CO ser ewrer 2 Operating Procedure Carry out the following steps to enter the SET UP menu If the SET UP menu is not currently displayed turn the power OFF While holding the DISP key turn the power ON Make sure you still continue to hold down the DISP key for approximately another five seconds Select set using the GS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept Noe Main menu SETUP MATH ENTER MATH ERROR OVER ENTER 4 OVER OVER 4 TLOG TIME SCALE SEC ENTER OFF SEC MIN HOUR 4 TLOG CH ERROR SKIP ENTER ERROR SKIP 4 TLOG CH OVER ERROR ENTER ERROR SKIP LIMIT 4 TLOG PSUM OVER OVER ENTER OVER ROTATE MATH SET Ena of setting ESC 12 12 IM DR231 01E 12 5 Setting Actions to be Carried out in Case of Computation Error and Setting the Time Axis for TLOG SUM Explanation Displaying recording in case of computation error MATH ERROR Used to determine whether OVER or OVER be displayed recording in c
257. n an alarm occurs For details see Section 10 4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal switch on page 10 9 When the alarm module on the DI DO modules are not recognized as system modules the relay is stto OFF For the system recognition see page 9 17 suue v Buipio2eg pue BuiAejdsig Bunnies IM DR231 01E 8 3 8 2 Alarm Display and Printing Relevant Keys Explanation RECORD CHART KEYLOCK Alarm display When an alarm status is detected and an alarm is issued the ALARM lights To display the alarm status for each channel see Section 4 4 Using the ALARM SEARCH Display on page 4 7 or Section 4 6 Using the ALARM STATUS Display on page 4 10 To display the alarm output relay or internal switch status see Section 4 7 Using the RELAY STATUS Display on page 4 11 If an alarm occurs while the alarm display hold ALARM HOLD is ON because the alarm has already been triggered the ALARM and alarm status displays flash Even after the alarm status is released the displays still flash When the alarm status hold function is ON use the alarm acknowledge function to determine the current status of the alarm To do this display the FUNC menu select ALARM ACK then press the ENTER key to use the alarm acknowledge function For details see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 16 Alarm printing For details on setting the alarm printing see Sec
258. n formula is as follows Result of difference between channels computation measurement value of destination channel measurement values of reference channel suonounJ This function changes the left and right span of the recording span to left and right scale values which are converted to a different physical quantity This can be applied to each channel and a different engineering unit can be entered for display and printouts Example where voltage values are cenverted into linear scaling values WERE EE EE Left span 2V Right span 2V left scale 0 1A Right scale 1 1A This function computes a moving average over a preset number K of measurement values This function is useful for displaying and recording of unsteady measurement values The computation formula is as follows Dm Mm K 1 Mm K 2 Mm 2 Mm 1 Mm where Dm m th average value Mm K 1 the measurement value of the K 1 th measurement before the m th measurement Mm K 2 the measurement value of the K 2 th measurement before the m th measurement Mm 2 the measurement value of the second last measurement before the m th measurement Mm 1 the measurement value of the last measurement before the measurement Mm the measurement value of the m th measurement K number of samples and an integer ranging from 2 to 64 At the first computation the measurement value of the fi
259. n horizontal direction bbe a5 bb dd m 3a are ci i EN IM DR231 01E 2 3 Recording Functions Recording Colors Recording Interval The color of trend recordings can be selected per channel The colors which can be selected are black purple red purple navy blue red blue brown green orange and yellowish green The recording color of the numerical values in the logging mode is purple only The time during which one scan of trend recording or numerical printout is carried out is called the recording interval Recording interval for trend recording This recording interval can be selected from AUTO or FIX AUTO The recording interval is decided automatically depending on the measurement scan interval and chart speed in order prevent the dots from overlapping However in cases where this suonounJ calculation would render the recording interval smaller than the scan interval the recording interval will equal the scan interval Recording interval Scan interval x N where N is an integer satisfying N lt 720 scan interval x chart speed 720 is fixed Example when scan interval is 2s chart speed is 100mm h then N lt 720 2 x 100 3 6 The closest matching integer is 3 Accordingly the recording interval becomes 2 x 3 6s FIX Recording is carried out at an interval which is the same as the scan interval 2 to 60s regardless of the chart
260. n the sum of the measured data of channel 001 and channel 002 Subtraction 002 001 Obtain the difference of the measured data of channel 002 and channel 001 Multiplication t 003 K1 Multiply constant K1 to the measured data of channel 003 Division 004 K2 Divide the measured data of channel 004 by constant K2 Power AE 005 006 Take the power of measured data of channel 005 with the measured data of channel 006 Absolute value ABSQ ABS 001 Obtain the absolute value of the measured data of channel 001 Square root SQRO SQR 002 Obtain the square root of the measured data of channel 002 Common logarithmLOGQ LOG 003 Obtain the common logarithm of the measured data of channel 003 Natural Logarithm LNO LN 004 Obtain the natural logarithm of the measured data of channel 004 Exponent EXPO EXP 005 Make the measured data of channel 005 to be x and obtain e can be used as signs as in 001 Logical operators Type Operator Example Description Logical product AND 001AND002 when channel 001 0 and channel 002 0 0 when channel 001 nonzero and channel 00220 0 when channel 00120 and channel 002 nonzero 0 when both channel 001 and channel 002 are nonzero 1 Logical sum OR 00108002 when channel 001 0 and channel 00220 0 when channel 001 nonzero and channel 00220 1 when channel 00120 and channel 002 nonzero 1 when both channel 001 and channel 002 are nonzero 1 Ex
261. n the time scale after the shift 10 34 IM DR231 01E 11 1 Saving Measured and Computed Data Procedure for Saving Data When saving measured computed data on a floppy disk save them first on the DR recorder s built in RAM disk and then copy them to the floppy disk You can save the data on the built in RAM disk in three ways as summarized in the following table Menu Item Method for Starting Saving Number of Files Saved DIRECT Immediately starts saving when the setting is complete One TRIGGER Starts saving when an event occurs as set using the One event action functions REPEAT Starts saving when an event occurs as set using the More than one event action functions The DR recorder continues to save an array of files of the specified size until the built in RAM disk becomes full Flow of Operation The following paragraphs show the flow operation for a case where a measured data file is saved using the occurrence of an alarm as a trigger 1 Setting an Event Action Menu Item Setting LOGIC in SET menu LOGIC BOX No EVENT ALARM ACT EDGE MEMORY WR_TRIG 2 Selecting a Channel Whose Data Are Saved Menu Item Setting MEMORY in SET menu SET 001 01 CH SET ON Allowed to set the consecutive numbers of channels 3 Selecting a Method and Condition for Saving Menu Item Setting MEMORY in SET menu MEMORY WRITE WRITE TRIGGER WRITE file File name If new press ENTER l
262. nal circuit is insulated functionally Communication distance 1 2 km maximum Terminator Internal resistor 120 ohm 1W switch with the slide switch Ethernet when equipped with C7 Electrical and Mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE802 3 Frames are not supported Communication method Ethernet Transmission specifications 10BASE T CSMA CD 10 Mbps Baseband Transmission speed 10 Mbps Protocols TCP IP UDP ARP ICMP Maximum number of connections 4 Input data ASCII Supporting RS 232 C commands Output data ASCII Binary IM DR231 01E 14 17 suoleoyioeds 14 2 Specifications of Optional Functions Alarm Output when equipped with A4 Number of outputs 10 points Output updating rate every measurement interval Contact mode Make contact normal open common contact type Energize de energize switchable Hold non hold switchable Reflash alarm up to 6 contacts can be specified Contact rating 250V DC 0 1A resistive load 250V AC 2A resistive load 30V DC 2A resistive load Dielectric strength Between the output terminal and ground 2300V AC 50 60Hz for one minute Alarm Output using DI DO when equipped with R1 Number of outputs 2 points Output updating rate every measurement interval Contact mode Transfer contact normal open common normal close type Energize de energize switchable Hold non hold switchable Reflash alarm can be set Contact rating 250V DC
263. ndard Computation FUDCUODS 6 n iren tree t nemi e e n eerta 2 17 2 6 r Other BUNCHONS oerte tete te e EE e m endete E hae messer dede deoa 2 18 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 3 1 General Precautions for Installation 3 2 Howto Install ertet tenerent tete ee tos 3 3 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette essere eene 3 6 A 3 4 Connecting the Interface Cables eset etre endie e rue 3 11 A 3 Connecting the Signal Lines eee tree entere tette ern eee E re arenae e 3 16 AN 3 6 Connecting the Power Cable and Turning the Power 3 21 343 Setting the Date nd Time oe reete das 3 25 3 87 Countering Noises 2r Ee de delen UE n cre im Ont e a e ese 3 26 Chapter 4 Setting the Monitor Mode Display 4A Using the AUTO MOd e itinere Rr tute Idee at ue EI os 4 2 Using the MANUAL Display bereit re RE e o ee eire pret irn 43 Usingthe PAGE Displdy eene eiae iis ee RE RE Mee i aa 4 4 Using the ALARM SEARCH Display essent enne 4 5 Using the BARGRAPH Display esee nennen nennt enetne trennen nne nennen 4 6 Using the ALARM STATUS Display eese 4 7 Using the RELAY STATUS Display essere nennen etre tenete nennen 4 8 Using the CLOCK Date amp Time Display Chapter 5 Setting the Input Typ
264. net 3 o 5 amp ETHERNET I F S Tx yellow Dip Switch GN 3 Status LINK yellow D OFF 2 Indicator LED STS1 green 1234 z STS2 green 10BASE T Port Connect the RJ 45 modular jack of the twist pair cable connected to the 10BASE T network You can select the following three modes by setting the dip switch Configuration mode A mode in which the IP address subnet mask and default gateway are set for the DR Test mode A mode in which the condition of the physical connection is tested Communication mode A mode in which the DR is connected to the network to carry out communication Use this mode to read in the DR measurement data with the PC In addition you can turn ON OFF the Keepalive function Mode Setting Mode Switch 1 Switch 2 Configuration mode ON OFF Test mode OFF ON Communication mode OFF OFF Default Setting Do not set both dip switches 1 and 2 to ON Keepalive Setting Keepalive Switch 3 Enable ON Default Setting Disable OFF Keepalive is a function supported by TCP It sends packets at constant time intervals and automatically disconnects when there is no corresponding response This instrument sends packets at 30 second time intervals If a response is not received it sends 4 more packets at one second intervals If a response is still not received the connection is dropped Have dip switch 4 turned OFF IM DR231 01E 3 15 3
265. ng seals on right and left sides of the instrument push the brackets toward the rear and engage the blocks with rectangular holes When a screw attached on each bracket is turned clockwise the entire brackets are pushed against the panel rear Tighten the screws to securely fix the instrument to the panel Proper screw tightening torque is 0 8 to 1 2 N m 8 to 12 kgf cm The brackets can be used for panels of 3 to 26 mm thick v _ Panel cutting dimension 203 100 IET al pue uonejeisu 288 280 At least 520 mm HR At least 80 mm IEE 2 425 0 IM DR231 01E 3 5 3 3 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette Installing the Chart Preparing the Chart 1 To prevent double feed of the folded chart sufficiently ruffle and fan the chart on both folded side ends Not Use chart papers specified by Yokogawa part number B9855AY for DR130 B9627RY or B9627AY for DR231 DR241 Using chart papers other than those specified may cause problems such as large recording errors or the paper getting caught under the sprocket Preparing the Chart Cassette 2 Open the front door and draw out the chart cassette from inside of the main unit by pulling forward the chart cassette pressers while simultaneously pushing them both right and left pressers toward the center Chart cassette
266. nimum value of the measurement range are decided when setting the type of input The difference between the minimum value and maximum value which will be recorded within this measurement range is called the recording span The value on the left and right side of the recording are called the left span and right span respectively Starting Stopping Recording Usually starting stopping movement of the chart and trend recording is carried out by pressing the appropriate key on the operation panel But movement of the chart and trend recording can also be started stopped upon alarm occurrence or by remote control event action function Recording Method of Trend Recording Recording Zone Scale Values Chart movement can start by either key operation or event action function and selected channels will thus be recorded as trend recording Normal Recording Selected channels will all be recorded regardless of the below mentioned occurrence release of alarms or group settings Recording will start when the chart starts moving Trend Recording upon Alarm Occurrence Trigger Recording All channels where an alarm occurred will be recorded Even when the alarm is released recording will continue Level Recording All channels where an alarm occurred will be recorded When the alarm is released recording will stop Group Trend Recording Channels can be clustered in a group and only those channels will be recorded The recording span of measurement
267. nnel When both channel numbers are equal settings will only apply to that particular channel When you have set the first channel number and you move the cursor to the last channel setting the channel number of the first channel setting will appear here IM DR231 01E 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span Selecting the Type of Input The following types of input can be selected The default setting is VOLT SKIP Measurement recording and display except for page display will not be carried out Measurement recording and display will be carried out for the next channel whose input type is not set to SKIP VOLT DC voltage This input type can be selected from 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V and 50V Refer to chapter 14 for the measurement range of each setting The default setting is 2V TC thermocouple This input type can be selected from R S B K E J T N W L U and KP KPvsAU7Fe Refer to chapter 14 for the measurement range of each setting The default setting is R RTD resistance temperature detector This input type can be selected from PT1 Pt100 1mA PT2 Pt100 2mA JPT1 JPt100 1mA JPT2 JPt100 2mA PT50 Pt50 2mA Ni100 1mA SAMA ND2 Ni100 1mA DIN Ni120 1mA CUI Cu10 GE CU2 Cu10 L amp N Cu10 WEED Cu10 BAILEY PTIS Pt100 1mA high resolution PT2S Pt100 2mA high resolution JPT1S JPt100 1mA high resolution JPT2S JPt100 2mA high resolution an
268. nstall a fuse on the interconnecting leadwire Use a fuse that will not permit the voltage or current being measured to exceed the maximum ratings of an AC input module The maximum voltage and current that can continuously be imposed on an AC input module are as follows Voltage 250 Vrms current 5 Arms To avoid electrical shock ALWAYS attach the terminal cover in place after the completion of wiring to the terminals so that the terminals cannot be accidentally touched CAUTION In wiring use double insulated leadwires that have sufficient withstanding voltage and current carrying capacity margins against the voltage and current being measured and meet the ratings at which they are used ALWAYS clamp measuring leadwires with the wire clips to prevent the wires from being disconnected from their terminals As the measuring leadwires use wires 0 2 to 2 5 mm2 AWG14 to 25 thick so they can be fastened securely with the wire clips The power monitor module is a product belonging to Installation Over voltage Category CAT Il 3 18 IM DR231 01E 3 5 Connecting the Signal Lines Diagram of Terminal Block
269. nstant zc eate an ee patere e E ER ERE EUN 12 7 12 4 Starting Stopping Computation essere 12 8 12 5 Setting Actions to be Carried out in Case of Computation Error and Setting the Time Axis for Chapter 13 Trouble shooting and Maintenance 13 1 Periodic Maintenance and Recommended Parts Replacement Period 13 1 13 2 Repl cing the REESE EP eb abt iet RO RO MC 13 2 13 3 Troubleslio tnDg beet nti eb ee ee a e gd b bed le e P Ee 13 4 13 4 Error Codes eei ege tee tete e eere e te le epo e E REED e dete 13 5 13 5 Calibration Chapter 14 Specifications INDEX 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S8 s eecseeseescseeeeseeseeeseeesseeaeesseseseesseeees 14 1 14 2 Specifications of Optional Functions 14 3 Dimensional Drawings ree ELEC RE LUNES IM DR231 01E 13 List of Menus and Set up Data The following is a list of set up data procedures to switch to different setting modes and setting menu Measurement Condition Settings Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Input type span linear RANGE key 001 01 VOLT 2V Chapter 5 scaling Units SET key SET UNIT Section 6 1 Moving average Press the SET key for about three seconds SET MOVE AVE Section 6 8 Measurement cycle Turn ON power wh
270. nt the release number of a dedicated software package must be the same or higher than the style number of the main unit or subunit where the package is installed and where it performs control Any equipment software not meeting these requirements might have incompatible areas with your system configuration In this manual equipment of style S8 is explained For unsupported functions as classified by the style number see the next page The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of improvements in the instrument s performance and functions Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual Copying or reproduction of all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA s permission is strictly prohibited MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Ist Edition January 1996 2nd Edition March 1996 3rd Edition June 1996 4th Edition September 1996 5th Edition March 1997 6th Edition September 1997 7th Edition November 1998 8th Edition June 2000 9th Edition October 2000 All Rights Reserved Copyright 1996 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM DR231 01E Unsupporte
271. nt accuracy maximum resolution Replace the values using the following formula F C value x 9 5 32 When changing the temperature unit as descibred above other settings will be initialized at the same time and therefore all settings need to be done again This initialization will be the same initialization as described on page 9 17 In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 24 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 24 Measurement ranges for temperature measurements when using the unit F Input Type Measurement Range TC Note that accuracy of reference junction compensation is not considered 32 to 3200 F 32 to 3200 F 32 to 3308 F 328 to 2498 F 328 0 to 1472 0 F 328 0 to 2012 0 F 328 0 to 752 0 F 328 0 to 1652 0 F 328 0 to 752 0 F 3 32 0 2372 4 32 to 4199 F KPvsAu7Fe 0 0 to 300 0K 21216 RTD Pt00 1mA s 328 0 to 1112 0 F Ptl00 2mA s 328 0 to 482 0 F 1 100 1 5 328 0 to 1022 0 F JPHO0 2mA 5 328 0 to 482 0 F Pt50 2mA s 328 0 to 1022 0 F Nil00 1mA 6 328 0 to 482 0 F SAMA NilOO ImA DIN e 76 0 to 356 0 F Nil20 1mA 94 0 to 392 0 F J263 B 0 0 to 300 0K Cul0 GE
272. nt interval In that case you can take the output after having converted the unit of summation so it matches that of the input data item applied Unit of Input Preset Unit Conversion Formula INTVL no conversion gt measured data values sec measured data values x measurement interval min gt measured data values x measurement interval 60 hour measured data values x measurement interval 3600 day measured data values x measurement interval 86400 10 30 IM DR231 01E 10 12 Working with the Report Function RCH RO1 R02 R03 R04 R05 R06 R07 R08 R09 R10 RCH CH TAG MODE UNIT Jan 03 00 00 MIN TOTAL MAX 1 TAG 001CH AVE 1 0000 2 0000 1 0000 RO2 002 INST V 10 000 003 SUM L 2 400000E 01 4 800000E 01 R04 ROS RO6 TAG AO1CH AVE unit06 20000 000 10000 000 30000 000 R07 02 INST 200000 00 RO8 A03 SUM 2 400000E 01 4 800000E 01 ROO R10 Types of _ Units n computing Results of Minimum or Maximum R60 Channels included in printing computing cumulative sum Axx computing channel Report channels Enhanced format Time to make report Starting time DAILY REPORT Jan 03 97 00 00 START Jan 01 97 00 00 MODE UNIT 03 00 00 MIN TOTAL MAX Jan 02 01 00 Jan 02 02 00 Jan 03 00 00 TAG 001CH AVE V 1 0000 2 0000 1 0000 2 0000 2 0000 2 0000 INST V 10 000 9 000 9 000 10 000 SUM L 2 400000E 01 4 800000E 01 1 000000 0 1 000000E 00 1 000000E 00 TAG A01CH AV
273. nter 2 EHI eU Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu Select set using the keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu 001 01 VOLT 2VC5 Select Channel No Lower menu 1 001 01 VOLT 2VLO 001 01 VOLT 2V gt Select Channel No L 001 01 SCL VOLT 2V D Vj 001 01 SCL VOLT 2V 4 001 01 SCL VOLT 2V ENTER 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V 50V 4 SPAN 2 0000 2 0000V ENTER Span limit 2 0000 2 0000V SCL __0 00 100 00 ENTER 4 SET OK ESC m 001 01 SCL TC R 4 001 01 SCL TC R ENTER RSBKEJTNWLU 4 SPAN J 0 0 1760 0C ENTER gt Span limit 0 0 1760 0 C 4 SCL __0 00 _100 00 ENTER 4 SET OK ESC To the next page 5 4 IM DR231 01E 5 2 Setting Linear Scaling and the Recording Span From the previous page 001 01 SCL RTD PT1 D 001 01 SCL RTD PT1 ENTER PT1 PT2 JPT1 JPT2 PT50 NI1 NI2 NI3 CU2 CU4 PT1S 25 JPT1S JPT2S J263B exo SPAN 200 0 _600 0 C ENTER gt Span limit 200 0 600 0 C 4 SCL X 0 00 100 00 ENTER 4 SET
274. nter 2 EHI uie Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SETUP co C O Lower menu wd COLOR ENTER 001 01 COLOR PURPLE D gt Select Channel No 001 01 COLOR PURPLE D gt Select Channel No 001 01 COLOR PURPLE ENTER PURPLE RED GREEN BLUE BROWN BLACK NAVY YEL_GR RED_PR ORANGE 4 COLOR SET ESC Explanation Setting Recording Color Set the recording colors for each channel This setting can also be made for optional computation channels Select a color from the following ten colors PURPLE RED GREEN BLUE BROWN BLACK NAVY navy blue YEL_GR yellowish green RED_PR red purple and ORANGE The default setting is PURPLE for channel 1 RED for channel 2 GREEN for channel 13 BLUE for channel 4 BROWN for channel 5 BLACK for channel 6 NAVY for channel 7 YEL_GR for channel 8 RED PR for chann
275. nting After printing starts the operation display mode appears During manual printing the menu displays MAN PR STOP During manual printing enter the PRINT menu again and select MAN PR STOP Then press the ENTER key to stop the manual printing After manual printing terminates or stops the display returns to MAN PR START Starting the list print LIST START Press the ENTER key to start list printing For details on setting the time for temporarily stopping printing see the previous page After list printing starts the operation display mode appears During list printing the menu displays LIST STOP During list printing if the PRINT menu is displayed to select the LIST STOP and the ENTER key is then pressed the list printing stops After list printing terminates or stops the display returns to LIST START Starting the header print HEADER START To start the header print press the ENTER key After header printing starts the operation display mode appears During header printing the HEADER STOP menu appears During header printing if the PRINT menu is displayed to select the HEADER STOP and the ENTER key is then pressed the header printing stops After header printing terminates or stops the display returns to HEADER START Notes on starting the above menus f the above menus are executed analog trend recording will stop After returning from the menus analog trend rec
276. nting is available only with the DR231 241 When the recording interval is MULTIPLE Set by timer Other functions Manual printout One scan s worth of data can be digitally printed by a key operation or event action function Zone recording Recording width and recording positions 0 and 100 positions can be set in mm units for each channel in case of trend recording Partial compression A part of the amplitude can be compressed in case of trend recording only one boundary Display method VFD 5 x 7 dot matrix 3 rows Number of characters Main display 22 large characters 1 row Sub display 1 and 2 40 small characters 2 rows Displayed contents Digital value display data for freely selected channels can be displayed on each row 1 channel per line max 5 rows channel No or tag up to 7 characters alarm search measurement values engineering unit Bargraph display measurement values of the main display are displayed as a bargraph Auxiliary data clock alarm status relay status key lock ON OFF recorder operation Number of settings Up to four alarms can be set for each channel Kind of alarms selection from higher limit lower limit difference higher limit difference lower limit higher limit on rate of change lower limit on rate of change However only upper limit and lower limit alrams are output for totalized results Rate of change alarm time interval Can be set to measurement interval x 1 to 15 comm
277. nts a monthly report in the enhanced format it prints the report in the standard format if it has been more than a day since the report was created To stop printing press the FUNC key and select REP PRINT STOP from the FUNC menu The following are examples of how a daily report prints Standard format Time to make report Starting time DAILY REPORT Jan 03 97 00 00 START Jan 01 97 00 00 computing Units computing cumulative sum Maximum _ list of the result of computing at respective preset times for daily reports Report channels Note f any of the following conditions is true you cannot print reports even when the preset time to make a report arrives In that case the DR recorder prints reports when the current printing ends Manual printing is in progress List printing or setup list printing is in progress Header printing is in progress Logging printing is in progress The DR recorder does not print reports either even if the preset time to make a report arrives while printing is enabled from the FUNC menu IM DR231 01E 10 31 dn 13s summas iseg 10 12 Working with the Report Function Starting Stopping Report Making Report making can be started or stopped in two ways Press the FUNC key and select REPORT START or REPORT STOP from the FUNC menu Use the event action functions to define the start stop of making a report for the following events Edge action You can define every e
278. nu is displayed only with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 and models with the M1 option The REPORT and FLOPY menus are displayed only with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 The REPORT menu is displayed only with M3 option From the previous page EVT TIMER 1 4 EVT TIMER 1 123456 4 CAC T ALARM ACK caer EDGE ALARM ACK T EDGE ALARM RST ACT EDGE TIMER RST ao ACT EDGE ME OFF ACT EDGE RECORD OFF OFF ON ACT EDGE MANUAL PR ao LI ACT EDGE DIGITAL PR I ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 4 ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1112131415 16 17 18 19 20 I ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 4 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 I ACT EDGE MATH START 4 ACT EDGE MATH START START STOP CLEAR RESET 0 1 4 ACT EDGE FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR 4 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA WR DATA WR WR TRIG RD TRIG LD TRG1 LD TRG2LD TRG3 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD TRG1 4 avo ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE REPORT START 4 ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP ale ACT LEVL RECORD ACT LEVL RECORD To the next page D ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER
279. o Use this Manual This User s Manual consists of the following fourteen chapters Chapter Title Description Chapter 1 System Configuration Explains the position of the DR within DARWIN its configuration etc Chapter 2 Functions Explains the functions of the DR Operating procedures are not explained here Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring Describes cautions for use explains how to install and wire the DR the power cord how to switch ON OFF the DR how to set the date time explains the noise filter etc Chapter 4 Setting the Monitor Mode Display Explains the display in the monitor mode Chapter 5 Setting the Input Type Recording Span Linear Scaling Explains the operations when setting the input type recording span and linear scaling function Chapter 6 Setting the Recording Conditions Explains the operations when setting recording conditions such as the recording mode channels recording interval chart speed recording span and recording format Chapter 7 Executing Recording Explains how to start and stop recording Chapter 8 Setting Displaying and Recording Alarms Explains how to set an alarm and what to do when an alarm occurs Chapter 9 Event Action Function and Other Functions Explains how to operate the event action function how to copy recording information how to reset alarms how to reset the timer how to use t
280. ocedure Main menu ALARM ACK C O O A Q O C C O O O O O ALARM RST TIMER RESET ENTER MATH START ENTER MATH CLR START ENTER MATH STOP ENTER MATH KEY LOCK ON ENTER A CODE NUMBER 2888 ENTER MSG PRINT m ESC TIMER_RESET x Goro UD INS DEL gt Select Function item CHART RANGE AL ARM CD cHART ser LEwrER runc 2 Press the FUNC key to enter the FUNC menu To enter the FUNC menu from the RANGE ALARM CHART or SET SET3 menu press the DISP key Select set using the C keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept There may be some menus that are not displayed due to the basic settings as described in Chapter 10 ENTER Operating status ENTER ENTER Lower menu ENTER PRINT MESSAGE No 01 ENTER Displayed when computation is not in progress 2 Displayed when computation is in progress 3 Displayed when incomplete measurement occurs while computation is in progress Note If MATH is selected as a level action MATH START MATH CLR START and MATH STOP will not be displayed The displayed information varies depending on the settings given in Section 10 8 Setting FUNC FUNC3 Menu The flow of operation shown above is the one given
281. of recording colors is black gt purple gt red purple gt navy blue gt red gt blue gt brown gt green gt orange gt yellowish green which means that black has the highest priority In the figure below a recording example is given of a horizontal line in the colors black red and yellowish green In the area where red and yellowish green overlap labeled as a only red dots will be recorded and in the area where black red and yellowish green overlap labeled as b only black dots will be recorded However at the locations where the recordings diverge after connecting a horizontal line all recording colors will be recorded a b c i a 9 X 8 x O 5 XXXXXXX OOOO z x S Gl x 1 Red Yellowish Black green IM DR231 01E suonounJ 2 3 Recording Functions List Printout A list printout will show the following items Title if a title has been entered Date and time Measurement interval recording interval chart speed and recording mode Timer setting 6 Multiple and Single Match time a specific time is set and when that time is reached a preset operation will be carried out refer to event action function on page 2 18 Tags for each channel input type recording span and linear scaling values this print can be selected ON OFF Alarm this print can be selected ON OFF Group setting F
282. of saving For TRIGGER or REPEAT one event must be set for the WR TRIG action during event action function setting For a detailed description of the event action function refer to 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions page 9 1 Data write interval WRITE SAMPLE The data write interval at which data is saved can be selected from the following INTVL Same as measurement interval Every set of measured computed data is saved min 2 min 5 min 10 min Saved at the specified interval LOGIC One piece of data per channel is saved each time the event specified by DATA WR event action function occurs For a detailed description of the event action function refer to 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions page 9 1 Data length WRITE LENGTH Used to set the number of pieces of data per channel Select one of the following options 10 20 30 40 50 100 200 300 400 500 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 10k 20k 30k 40k 50k Some options cannot be selected depending on the number of channels to be saved or the number of computation channels Pre trigger PRE TRIGGER If REPEAT or TRIGGER has been selected as WRITE MODE data which occurs before the trigger event is activated can be saved within the specified data length Set the trigger timing in units of percentage of the specified data length in steps of 10 Data which occurs before the trigger Trigger event 20 us Data length 100 File name If DIRECT o
283. on to both rising and falling limits Output mode Energize de energize selection AND OR mode selection and output hold non hold selection can be made common to all channels A maximum number of 6 reflash alarm output points can be specified Number of alarm output points Max 12 when equipped with both A4 and R1 options Alarm recording Analog trend mode The alarm occurrence release mark channel number or tag kind of alarm and alarm item No are printed in the right margin Logging mode The kind of alarm is printed when the measured data are recorded Alarm display Alarm status indication Lights or flashes when an alarm is detected Alarm acknowledge indication Indicator stops flashing by key operation 14 8 IM DR231 01E 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S3 Standard Computation Functions Kinds of computation Difference between channels linear scaling scaling and moving average Scaling Scalable range DC voltage TC RTD contact Scaling range 30000 to 30000 Measurement accuracy for scaling measurement accuracy for scaling digits measurement accuracy digits x scaling span digits measurement span digits 2 digits Numbers below the decimal point are discarded Example Measurement accuracy when the following settings are made Measuring range 6 VDC Measurement span 1 000 to 5 000 V Scaling span 0 000 to 2 000 Measured value 5 V 0 05 x 5 2 x 2000
284. opying of other items COPY OTHER ON Copies setting recording zones partial compressions dot recording ON OFF digital printing ON OFF manual printing ON OFF alarm printout ON1 ON2 OFF scale value printout ON1 ON2 ON3 OFF list printout ON OFF average numbers in moving averages and interpolation ON OFF OFF The copying of other items is disabled Setting a copy source channel Sets a copy source channel with up to three characters For details on these characters see Section 4 1 Using Auto Mode on page 4 2 Setting a destination channel to be copied Sets a channel to which the setting data in the source channel are copied When the COPY RANGE COPY ALARM and COPY OTHER are set to ON individual set data are copied For the setting of a destination channel number see Section 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span on page 5 2 Setting a computation channel to be copied Copies the following settings Range copy ON Computation equation unit tag Alarm copy ON Alarm Other copy ON Zone partial trend ON OFF digital print ON OFF scale print ON OFF manual print ON OFF alarm print ON OFF list print ON OFF linear interpolation IM DR231 01E suonoung 194 0 pue uonounJ uonoyAue 3 9 3 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Reset Timer Reset Computation Keylock and Message Printout Relevant Keys o 5 eee Operating Pr
285. or PF 1 PF2 PF2 PF13 PF13 PF13 PFO Phase angle PH PHI PHI PH3 PHI PH3 PHI PH2 PH3 PHI PH2 PH3 PH13 PH13 PH13 PHO Continuously Applicable Maximum Voltage and Current Voltage 250 Vrms Current 5 Arms Crest Factor 3 maximum 600 Vpeak Maximum Common Mode Voltage 250 Vrms Common Mode Voltage Rejection Ratio Voltage and Current Ranges 0 02 of span when 250 V 45 to 65 Hz is imposed Input Resistance Voltage input 300 kQ minimum for AC voltages Current input 1 Q maximum for AC currents Filter Moving average Wattage Calculation Use of M1 computing function Insulation Resistance Across output terminals and ground 100 MQ minimum Withstanding Voltage Across output terminals and ground 2 300 V AC 50 60 Hz 1 min Recording Recording method Raster scan method 10 color wire trend recording Number of recording points Measurement results Max 30 points Recording paper DR130 Ordinary recording chart Z fold chart total width 230 0mm length 20m Effective recording width 150mm for trend recording DR231 DR241 Ordinary recording chart Z fold chart total width 342 5mm length 30m Effective recording width 250mm for trend recording 14 6 IM DR231 01E 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S3 Recording colors Analog trend mode Trend recording purple red green blue brown black navy blue yellowish green red purple orange
286. or each individual channel whether the trend mode is ON OFF whether interpolation is ON OFF recording zone settings partially expanded recording settings selected Timer No whether moving average is ON OFF alarm type and whether manual print is ON OFF this print can be selected ON OFF Headers only when input is applied Contents of up to 20 messages Settings related to event action function Selections related to this list printout 2 12 IM DR231 01E 2 3 Recording Functions Manual Printout One scan of measurement values of selected channels will be recorded as digital values together with the date and time This printout can be executed by key operation or by event action function refer to page 2 18 Refer to page 2 6 2 7 for a recording example Header Printout For the header you can print as many as 60 characters each on 5 lines DR130 or as many as 80
287. or reception only Functions Talker functions Output of measurement data ASCII binary and setting parameters Listener functions Setting of measurement conditions control of measurement start and stop excluding the setting and control of power on off specifying causes of ESC S output of a status byte Contents of status Syntax error chart end completion of A D conversion operations of internal timer end of data saving reading incomplete measurement during computation 14 16 IM DR231 01E 14 2 Specifications of Optional Functions RS 422 A RS 485 Communication when equipped with C3 Electrical amp mechanical specs Conform to the EIA RS 422 A and EIA RS 485 Standard Connection format Multi drop 1 n n 16 for RS 422 A n 31 for RS 485 Communication format Half duplex Synchronizing format Start stop asynchronous transmission synchronized by start stop bit Baud rate bps 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 selectable START bit 1 bit fixed Data length Either 7 or 8 bits selectable Parity Even Odd or None selectable STOP bit Either 1 or 2 bits selectable Connector 6 point screw type terminal uses M4 screws Minimum response time 0 10 20 50 or 100 ms selectable Reception buffer length 250 bytes Escape sequence Trigger Status call Open and Close Electrical characteristics SDA SDB RDA RDB SG Between the signal terminal and the main inter
288. or three phase use only A SOURCE Cn SOURCE LOAD zAo02m LOAD IM DR231 01E 3 20 3 6 Connecting the Power Cable and Turning the Power ON OFF DR130 DR231 when using the accessory power cable Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument Connect the power cable only after confirming that the voltage of the power supply matches the rated electric power voltage for this instrument Connect the power cable after checking that the power switch of this instrument is turned off To prevent electric shock or fire always use the power cable supplied by Yokogawa Always use protective grounding to prevent electric shock Connect the power cable of the instrument to a three pole power outlet which has a protective ground terminal Do not use the function grounding terminal 4 marked terminal under the power connecting part as the protective ground terminal Never use an extension cord that does not have protective grounding otherwise the protection feature will be negated Connecting Procedure 1 Check that the power switch is turned off 2 Connect the plug of the accessory power cable to the power connector 3 Plug the other end of the power cable into a power outlet that satisfies the following conditions For models with
289. ording resumes While the above menus are being executed if any other menu is selected the previous menu is first executed and the later menu is then executed See Chapter 6 for details on setting the above menus 7 2 IM DR231 01E 7 3 Starting Message Printing Relevant Keys ESC MSG_PRINT Gee UD INS DEL Select Function item CD M FUNC 1 Operating Procedure cuart ser enter meuwca Press the FUNC key to enter the FUNC menu To display the print menu from the RANGE ALARM CHART or SET SET3 menu press the DISP key Select set using the O keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept Main menu ale Lower menu MSG PRINT ENTER PRINT MESSAGE No 01 ENTER Explanation Starting message printing MSG PRINT Select a message number from 01 to 20 For details on how to set the message see Section 6 7 Entering Messages Headers and Titles on page 6 15 While the instrument is recording if the ENTER key is pressed messages are printed If an alarm occurs messages are also printed See Section 6 5 Setting the Alarm Printout on page 6 11 Message printout buffer Analog trend Up to 10 message printouts can be stored in memory nformation exceeding 10 me
290. ords the results Four arithmetical operations addition subtraction multiplication division square root absolute values common logarithm natural logarithm power logical product logical sum exclusive OR logical negation statistical operation relational operation Up to 30 channels can be used for computation It is also possible to use the event action function to start stop computation or clear data for computation channels Furthermore up to 4 levels of alarm upper limit alarm lower limit alarm can be set for computation channels RRJC Remote RJC available if the instrument is equipped with the optional MATH function In cases where the object is located in distance for temperature measurement using thermocouples the temperature of the object can be measured without using a number of expensive thermocouples if a junction terminal is installed near the object This method requires the object to be connected to the terminal via a thermocouple and the terminal to this instrument via copper lead wires Furthermore the junction terminal needs to be connected to an input terminal of this instrument via a thermocouple The temperature of the junction terminal is then measured to carry out compensation for the reference contact point used for measurement of temperature of the object then finally temperature of the object is measured Junction terminal This instrument to be provided by the customer Thermocoupler Reference ch
291. ored alarm printout suonipuo eui Dunes information see page 9 17 Selecting a Message Printout This setting specifies whether to print a message on alarm occurrence and if so which message will be printed The default setting is OFF OFF No message will be printed Message No This setting can be selected from 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 and 20 When a message No has been selected where no message has been entered printout will not be carried out For details on setting messages refer to 6 7 on page 6 15 IM DR231 01E 6 11 6 6 Setting Scale Printout List Printout and List Format Relevant Keys SET SCALE PR ALAR gt Select Setting Parameter CHART DIGITAL PR MANUAL PR ALARM PR SCALE PRT Operating Procedure Select set 27 ro econo ESC recom CES Cree INS DEL charr set LEwrER 2 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu using the 2 keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET Low
292. otating knob once more in the direction of the arrow counterclockwise to take up the ribbon slack 7 Feed the chart paper by pressing the FEED key on the operation panel to prevent a delay in starting the chart paper feed Note Check that the ribbon cassette is properly loaded in the carriage f aribbon cassette is used for a long time the ribbon may become wavy and move out of the dot printing range of the printer head If this happens replace the ribbon with a new one IM DR231 01E 3 10 3 4 Connecting the Interface Cables When connecting a personal computer to the instrument via a communication interface observe the following GP IB The GP IB connector of the GP IB communication module is a 24 pin connector of IEEE St d 488 1978 Only use cables that conform to IEEE St d 488 1978 as a communication cable Connection Procedure Connect the cable as shown in the figure below GP IB module 5 7 2 Ferrite core E 5 o 2 Function Function grounding grounding Personal terminal Personal terminal computer DR130 computer DR231 DR241 ss Ferrite core E Ferrite core oo i 1 f When connecting the cable take note of the following To reduce noise use two ferrite cores e g ZCAT 3035 1330 from TDK at both ends of the interface cable as shown above Securely tighten
293. ound measurement object Isolate thermocouple from measurement object Use shielded wiring for input line Change A D integral times Use moving average Use input filter No countermeasure taken against ambient temperature changes Install input terminal cover properly Protect recorder from blowing air of fan Keep temperature changes near input terminals small Input connected improperly Connect input properly Connect module properly Tighten screws properly Isolate RTD from ground Replace disconnected thermocouples Recorder connected in parallel with other instruments Do not use burnout functions in other instruments Ground recorder and other instruments in the same ground line Do not connect recorder in parallel with other instruments for use with dual element TC RJC set improperly for TC input Set RJC properly Dot printing position not calibrated correctly Calibrate correctly Other cause Contact your nearest sales representative Defective display Noise superimposed DC supply voltage is low Lay input wiring far away from noise source Ground recorder Ground measurement object Isolate TC from measurement object Use shielded wires for input line Change A D integration times Use input filter Increase the input voltage or use a thicker wire to lower the wire
294. presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the OQ keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SETUP OOQ Lower menu RECORD ENTER CH OR TAG CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL TAG 4 TAG PRINT LEN 7 78910111213 14 15 16 ENTER 4 TREND MODE NORMAL ENTER NORMAL ALARM1 ALARM2 GROUP 4 SPEED CHANGE PR ON ENTER OFF ON 4 ON OFF MARK PR ON ENTER OFF ON 4 DIGITAL PR CLMN 1 ENTER 1234 4 CHANNEL PITCH 5 0mm ENTER OFF 5 0mm 12 5mm 4 TITLE PITCH 1500mm ENTER OFF 600mm 1500mm 4 SCALE TIC PR OFF ENTER OFF ON LOG FORMAT HORIZON HORIZON VERTICAL 4 LOG INTERVAL SINGLE ENTER SINGLE MULTIPLE 4 RECORD SET ESC For the DR130 indicated as 1 2 IM DR231 01E 10 3 dN Las sBumes oiseg 10 2 Setting Recording Format Explanation Selection of Channel Number or Tag CH OR TAG Select the call name for printing or displaying the measured values of either CHANNEL or TAG Select either CHANNEL or TAG Howe
295. r TRIGGER has been selected as WRITE MODE the file name must consist of up to 8 characters If REPEAT has been selected as WRITE MODE the file name must be of up to 5 characters in length The lower 3 digits of the file name indicate the serial number 001 to 208 Characters that can be used with a file name are only those which you can choose on the display No spaces are allowed AUX CON PRN and CLOK cannot be used for a file name The identifier is DAT IM DR231 01E 11 5 ejeg dn jegs pue payndwog peanseejy Buipeeg Dui es 11 1 Saving Measured and Computed Data Data format Measured computed data is saved in binary format Data size Data size can be calculated using the following equations Measured data 2 bytes 1 data Computed data 4 bytes 1 data Header 576 64 x number of measurement channels number of computation channels bytes Data size 576 64 x number of measurement channels number of computation channels number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 6 x specified data length For instance if the number of channels is 10 number of computation channels is 5 and specified data length is 5k the data size can be calculated as follows Data size 576 64 x 10 5 10 x 2 5 x 4 6 x 5k 231 536 bytes Status display during saving The following status symbols are displayed in the sub display 2 lowest display section Y Saving is in progress iul
296. r cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged in an outlet with protective grounding terminal Do not invalidate protection by using an extension cord without protective grounding Protective Grounding Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent an electric shock before turning ON the power Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of protective grounding terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding and Fuse Do not operate the instrument when protective grounding or fuse might be defective Do not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Fuse To prevent a fire make sure to use fuses with specified standard current voltage type Before replacing the fuse turn OFF the power and disconnect the power source Do not use a different fuse or short circuit the fuse holder Do not Remove any Covers There are some areas with high voltages Do not remove any cover if the power supply is connected The cover should be removed by qualified personnel only External Connection To ground securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to measurement or control unit ba IM DR231 01E 7 How t
297. r each alarm number from among the following OFF default set No alarm is set H Upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value exceeds the upper limit alarm setpoint L Lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value exceeds the lower limit alarm setpoint RH Rate of change upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value changes in the increasing direction within a certain time rate of change alarm interval and exceeds the upper limit alarm setpoint RL Rate of change lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value changes in the decreasing direction within a certain time rate of change alarm interval and exceeds the lower limit alarm setpoint dH An alarm occurs when the difference between two channels exceeds the alarm setpoint This only applies to a channel for which interchannel differential computation is selected and can be set as a type of alarm dL An alarm occurs when the difference between two channels exceeds the lower limit alarm setpoint This only applies to a channel for which interchannel differential computation is selected and can be set as a type of alarm For details on the rate of change alarm interval setting or other basic alarm settings see Section 10 3 Select Alarm Interval Hysteresis Hold A D Converter Integration timer Filter on page 10 8 For details on interchannel differential computation see Section 5 1 Setting the Type of Input
298. r menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET Lower menu MATCH TIME ENTER MATCH TIME No 4 ENTER 123 i 1 TIME 01 00 00 ENTER OQ gt Set Day amp Time DD HH MM 00 i SET OK ESC n MOVE AVE ENTER gt 001 01 MOVE AVE 0 D gt Select Channel No i 001 01 MOVE AVE 0 D gt Select Channel No i CK 001 01 MOVE AVE 0 ENTER gt 2 64 Move Average Number O OFF 4 SET OK ESC i INTERPOL ENTER 001 01 INTERPOL OFF D gt ON W 001 Dea gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 INTERPOL 0FF D gt ON W 001 ae gt Select Channel No O C 001 01 INTERPOL OFF ENTER OFF ON i SET OK ESC GROUP ENTER GROUP No G01 ENTER G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 Got 001 010 020________ ENTER DP S 6 16 IM DR231 01E 6 8 Setting Match Time Moving Average Interpolation and Groups Setting the Match Time MATCH TIME No selection of the match time number Three kinds of match times can be set TIM
299. resets the display and therefore allows you to verify the current alarm status on the display When the alarm display hold function is ON selecting the ALARM ACK menu results the alarm display changing from flashing to lit and will turn off when the alarm is released This setting applies to all alarms You can reset the internal switches and alarm output relays and the corresponding displays The previously mentioned alarm acknowledge function has the same function as resetting the alarm display here Resetting the internal switches and alarm output relays when the relay hold function is set to ON has the following affects and depends on the alarm status when alarms occur continuously the internal switches alarm output relays will turn to their non operative status for a short period but soon change into their operation status when alarms are released the internal switches alarm output relays turn to their non operative status 2 16 IM DR231 01E 2 5 Standard Computation Functions Standard computations such as difference between channels and linear scaling can be set with measurement input settings A moving average computation is also available Difference between Channels Linear Scaling Moving Average This function computes the difference between the measurement values of a selected channel reference channel and any other channel destination channel This can be applied to each channel and the computatio
300. rking with the Report Function If Power Failure Occurs While Report Function Is Active The DR recorder takes different actions depending on the length of a power failure If the power failure time is longer than 12 hours The DR recorder makes a report immediately after it recovers from the power failure and then stops making reports It does not execute printing based on the settings for automatic printing Print out reports either using the communication function or from the FUNC menu Results of computing The DR recorder computes data measured up to the point immediately before the power failure Time of report making The time when the power failure occurred If the power failure is less than 12 hours The DR recorder takes different actions depending on the time it recovers from the power failure Time of Recovery from Power Failure After the Time of Report Making Before the Time of Report Making Condition after recovery from power failure Valid report function start of report making enabled Valid report function start of report making enabled Report making Immediately after recovery from power failure Time for report making Report printing Immediately after recovery from power failure Time for report making Data included in report making Data measured up to the point of power failure Data measured over the given period except the power failure time If
301. roove place the chart cassette on the bottom of the main unit and slide the cassette deep inside the main unit until the latch engages 11 Turn on the power of the main unit and feed the chart paper by pressing the FEED key on the operation panel Feed the chart paper by three folds or more to the chart paper rest and check that the paper is fed properly Check this in the same way when the chart paper is fed manually without recording If the chart paper is not fed properly repeat the procedure from step 2 For details of turning the power on see page 3 23 12 When the chart paper approaches the end the words RENEW CHART in an scarlet strip on the paper appear Prepare a new set of chart paper 13 When the letters CHART in the status indicator in the display light it indicates that the paper has run out Replace the chart with a new one according to the above procedure To remove the chart paper from the chart rest open the chart rest cover and take out the paper IM DR231 01E 3 7 3 3 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette Loading the Ribbon Cassette Preliminary Preparation Ifthe carriage to which the ribbon cassette is to be mounted is located near the right end turn off the power and bring the carriage to a location near the left end by turning the screw shaft then load the ribbon cassette Set the RECORD key on the operation panel to OFF and set all the recording actions for the event action functions see p
302. rs will be included in one group A is used for 6 o entering a single channel while a can be used to enter a range of channels Setting the same channel two or more times in one group causes an error For example setting channel numbers such as G01 003 001 009 results in an error because channel number 003 is repeated The default setting is 001 The group setting is used with the event action function Refer to 9 1 on page 9 1 for details IM DR231 01E suonipuo eui Dunes 7 1 Starting Dot Printing Digital Printing and Printing in Logging Mode Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation DISP MODE C RECORD ESC I rune Jeran C J gt Cee OOg T INS DEL RANGE ALARM M FUNC 1 EYLOG SSS CHART SET ENTER M FUNC2 To start recording Press the RECORD key The status display RECORD lights To stop recording Press the RECORD key once again The status display RECORD turns off To feed the recording paper Press the FEED key Starting dot printing digital printing and recording in logging mode See Chapter 6 Setting Event action functions can also be used to perform the above printing and recording see Page 9 1 Feeding the recording paper Press the FEED key to feed the recording paper Even if t
303. rst measurement will be multiplied by the number of samples after which the average will be taken The measurement values of the second and later measurements will replace these in turn after which the average will be computed each time IM DR231 01E 2 17 2 6 Other Functions Event Action Function Key Lock Function Following the occurrence of an event such as remote control signal 12 alarm internal switch chart end signal timer match time or key operation any of the following actions can occur Alarm acknowledge refer to page 2 16 Alarm reset refer to page 2 16 Timer reset refer to page 2 9 Recording start stop According to the recording mode and recording format recording will start stop Manual printout refer to page 2 13 Digital printout refer to page 2 6 2 7 Message printout refer to page 2 13 Message display A preset message will be displayed on the main display Change of chart speed recording interval Chart speed 1 and recording interval 1 will change to chart speed 2 and recording interval 2 and analog trend and logging recording will be carried out Usually recording will be carried out using chart speed 1 set at the menu displayed after having pressed the CHART key and with recording interval 1 set at the menu displayed after having pressed the SET key at a touch Upon the occurrence of an event recording will be carried out using chart speed 2 and with recording interval
304. s an unfavorable noise that is superimposed on a signal voltage Since it is a voltage between the H and L terminals it is also called the line voltage or since it is a voltage in series with the signal voltage it is sometimes called the series mode voltage 3 28 IM DR231 01E 3 8 Countering Noise In the figure on the previous page due to common mode voltage Ecm noise currents i and i2 flow through the impedance to grounds 71 and 72 and coupling impedance Z3 resulting in the generation of normal mode noise between input terminals and L Like this common mode noise is converted to normal mode noise The amp is equipped with a built in filter and in case of output Eo the normal mode noise will be eliminated This rate of conversion is called the common mode rejection ratio and expressed by the following equation Eo Common mode rejection ratio CMRR 20Log dB CM Since the actual CMRR is expressed using the ratio of an error component output caused by common mode noise to common mode noise it contains the normal mode rejection ratio NMRR expressed by the following equation Eo e Normal mode rejection ratio NMRR 20Log dB NM The NMRR is a value that shows the ability to reject the output error normal mode noise component by normal mode noise Thus this is also a very important value which shows the resistance to noise characteristics of the measuring instrument Basics of Anti Nois
305. s outside the measuring range an error occurs For example if channels with measuring ranges 20 mV and 2 V and a type T thermocouple channel are all set to an alarm value of 10000 then the alarm values in the respective channels are as follows 10 000 mV in the 20 mV measuring range channel 1 0000 V in 2 V measuring range channel 1000 0 C in the type T thermocouple channel A type T thermocouple has a measuring range from 200 0 to 400 0 C so an error results For details on the decimal point positions in individual measuring ranges see Chapter 14 Specifications 8 2 IM DR231 01E 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches Setting Relays Internal Switches Set which alarm output relay or internal switch should be triggered when an alarm occurs Select the desired alarm output relay or internal switch from among the following The default setting is OFF OFF Alarm output relays and internal switches remain OFF S01 to S60 60 internal switches are provided ONI to 0 N 1 0 A4 option N Slot number for an alarm module Ten relays are provided to 0M2 R1 option M Slot number for a DI DO module Two relays are provided For the model with both A4 and R1 options both the above can be selected simultaneously Multiple alarm setpoints can be set for one alarm output relay or internal switch The operation mode in the alarm output relay or internal switch can be set whe
306. s page n 001 01 DI LEVL 4 001 01 DI LEVL ENTER LEVL CONT 4 SPAN 0 1 ENTER Span limit 0 1 4 SET OK ESC R 002 02 DELTA REF Ch 01 D 4 002 02 DELTA REF Ch 01 ENTER gt Select Channel No 4 SPAN 2 0000 2 0000V ENTER gt Span limit 2 0000 2 0000V 4 SET OK ESC 002 02 RRJC RJC Ch 01 D i 002 02 RRJC RJC Ch 01 ENTER Select Channel No SPAN 0 0 1760 0 C ENTER gt Span limit 0 0 1760 0 C 4 SET OK ESC r Setting the Channel No This setting specifies the channels to which the type of input and recording span applies You can set a range of channels by specifying the first begin and the last channel end First Channel No Begin The first three characters on the main display show the number of the first channel to which settings apply Default is 001 and the first character is always 0 The setting ranges from 001 to the maximum number of input channels of your unit 010 for 10 input channels 020 for 20 input channels 030 for 30 input channels Last Channel No End The two characters following the first channel number show the number of the last channel to which settings apply Default is 01 The setting ranges from 01 to the maximum number of input channels of your unit The number of the last channel cannot be smaller than the number of the first cha
307. s the FUNC key and select the desired operation from the FUNC menu MATH START Starts computation This is displayed while computation is not in progress MATH CLR START Clears computation results then re starts computation Computed data 4 4 t Stop Clear start Start Start MATH STOP Stops computation Computation results are not cleared This is displayed while computation is in progress MACH ACK Clears status indication which is displayed in case of incomplete measurement during computation For a detailed description of the FUNC menu refer to 9 3 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Rest Timer Reset Keylock and Message Printout page 9 14 Starting stopping computation using the event action function The event action function can be used to carry out the following operations MATH START Starts computation MATH STOP Stops computation MATH CLEAR Clears data before the first computation is carried out Computed data T 9 dee e ar fj L Start Clear Measurement interval MATH RESET Clears data after the first computation is carried out Computed data Buca ys tue o t Start Reset 12 8 IM DR231 01E Q AE a TA a E a AEE Measurement interval 12 4 Starting Stopping Computation Event action function An example of setting the event action function is given
308. selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET ENTER MEMORY INIT ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 INIT YES ENTER NO YES M INIT OK End of initialization ESC Explanation The internal RAM disk is initialized All the data in the RAM disk will be deleted Thus copy necessary data to a floppy disk before carrying out initialization Note During initializations GP IB RS 232 C RS 422 A RS 485 communication remains inactive 11 24 IM DR231 01E 11 10 Formatting a Floppy Disk Formatting a floppy disk in the SET mode Relevant Keys Louse J C ESC RECORD SET FLOPPY GO INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TRI ETT rer MEME n cuart ser enter runc Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the amp y amp keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET __
309. service center Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual Power cable Nothing should be placed on the power cable it should also be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cable from the outlet never pull the cord itself Always hold the plug and pull it If the power cable is damaged contact your dealer for replacement Refer to page 2 for the part number when placing an order General Handling Precautions Never place anything on top of the instrument Never place another instrument or any objects containing water on top of the instrument Otherwise a failure may occur When moving the instrument First turn off the power of the equipment being measured and disconnect the measurement leadwires and the communication cable Then turn the power switch of this instrument OFF and unplug the power cable from the outlet When carrying the instrument securely hold the instrument with both arms and take care not to drop it Ventilation openings Do not block the ventilation openings in order not to raise the internal temperature Electrically charged objects Don t bring electrically charged objects near the input terminals The internal circuitry might be damaged Chemicals Do not pour volatile agents on the case nor leave the case in contact with rubber or PVC products for a long period The case is made of a thermoplastic resin so take care not to let anything hot such as a soldering iron touch the case
310. six characters are used for displaying engineering units If TAG has been selected to appear on the display only three characters are used for displaying units Only the first three characters of the unit setting will then be displayed even if the first character of the unit setting is a space When XXXXXX or are displayed as measurement value no engineering unit will be displayed 001 d 0 0467V El nmi aM ae Alarm Difference between channels Channel No 1st digit unit No fixed to 0 A will be displayed in the case of optional computation channels 2nd digit slot No depending on the number of modules 0 1 0 2 0 3 3rd digit channel No in units of 1 Others If you selected SKIP as the input type that channel will not be displayed When the input type of all channels is set to SKIP ALL SKIP will be displayed IM DR231 01E 4 1 Using the Auto mode AUTO Mode for Sub display 1 Data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms Measurement Values Same as for the main display Engineering Units If the channel number has been selected to appear on the display the first four characters of the unit setting are used for displaying engineering units If TAG has been selected to appear on the display or when XXXXXX OOOOOO are displayed as measurement value
311. ssage printouts will be discarded After one message printout 9 are stored and another printout message can then be stored f 11 message printouts exceeding the allowed number of 10 are entered an asterisk will be printed at the top of the message when 10 message printouts are executed The message buffer clear function is available for canceling stored printout messages see page 9 17 Logging mode Up to 5 message printouts can be stored in memory nformation exceeding 5 message printouts will be discarded f 6 message printouts exceeding the allowed number of 5 are entered an asterisk will be printed at the top of the message when 5 message printouts are executed The message buffer clear function is available for canceling stored printout messages see page 9 17 IM DR231 01E HB Buip1028H Bunnooex3 7 4 Printing Set up Lists Relevant Keys o 5 eee S U_LIST_START Geer OD ce gt Select Function item 5 0 LIST START ALM BUF CLEAR MSG BUF CT koc CA cuart ser Enter runc 2 Operating Procedure Press the FUNC key for three seconds to enter the FUNC3 menu Explanation uis LIST START ENTER aS Printing the set up list S U LIST START Prints a list of the settings made in the SETUP menu For details of the settings and their values see Chapter 10 Press the ENTER key to s
312. t channels AC power supply model Heat sink fins SE aS om H e He m D e H T e a 9 TOT EINE NUNCA CSS AS Terminals DC power supply model DC Power fuse See page 13 3 DC Power connector See page 3 23 O aA Power connector A See page 3 21 Power fuse A See page 13 2 Function grounding terminal AC Power connector See page 3 21 AC Power fuze A See page 13 2 AC Power switch See page 3 24 Function grounding terminal g unT ADne A T Terminals IM DR231 01E 1 2 Names of Parts DR231 Desk top hybrid recorder Front Main display See chapter 4 Sub display 1 See chapter 4 Sub display 2 See chapter 4 Status indic
313. t w BS cable Part No A1023WD 3 pin inlet with screw conversion terminal Mec 3 pin inlet with screw conversion terminal For DR130 DR231 only For DR241 only Options M1 Mathematical Func M3 Report Func C1 GP IB interface C2 RS 232 C interface C1 C2 C3 and C7 cannot be specified together C3 RS 422 A RS 485 interface C1 C2 C3 and C7 cannot be specified together C7 Ethernet interface C1 C2 C3 and C7 cannot be specified together A4 Alarm module 10 make contacts R1 DI DO interface H1 Internal illumination for DR231 DR241 only H5 Carrying handle for DR231 only D2 deg F Display L1 Summer winter time N7 Power Monitor module single phase use N8 Power Monitor module three phase use P6 DC Power supply for DR130 DR231 only NO Instrument Number Style number equipment and Release number software package Please refer to these numbers when contacting the dealer IM DR231 01E 3 Checking the Contents of the Package Modules Check that the model code given on the name plate is according to your order Note that the input modules at the DR130 DR231 DR241 are fixed and cannot be moved Model Codes Description 10 channel universal input module screw terminal 20 channel universal input module screw terminal 30 channel universal input module screw terminal 10 channel universal input mod
314. tage categoly of each input module is CAT IEC 1010 When connecting to a clamp terminal use a signal conductor with the following cross sectional width Solid conductor 0 14 to 2 5 mm Stranded conductor 0 14 to 1 5 mm AWG 26 to 14 1 Check that the power switch of this instrument is turned off 2 Remove the terminal cover the figure below shows DU100 11 9 Terminal cover o Screws for fastening the cover 3 Fasten the signal wires to the terminals as shown in the figure on the next page 4 Re apply the terminal cover and fasten the screws 3 16 IM DR231 01E 3 5 Connecting the Signal Lines Make sure that the equipment connected to the signal in output conforms IEC CSA 950 IEC CSA 1010 Also make sure to use cables that conform to IEC CSA standards In case you are using an internal RJC in case of thermocouple input the following considerations are necessary to stabilize the temperature at the terminals Always make sure to re apply the terminal cover The thermal capacity of the wiring should be small cross sectional area of less than 0 5mm Minimize outside temperature fluctuations as much as possible To prevent noise make sure to ground each unit at the grounding function terminal below the power switch together at one point Refrain from wiring the input signals parallel However if you do then the following considerations are necessary Ground all equipm
315. taken as the title printing interval For setting a title see Section 6 7 Entering Messages Headers and Title page 6 15 OFF not printed 600 mm printed every 600 mm 1500 mm printed every 1500 mm The default setting is 1500 mm Selection of Scale Check Mark Printing SCALE TIC PR In trend recording select whether a tic mark indicating the scale mark positions is printed or not For setting the scale mark printing see Section 6 6 Setting Scale Printout List Printout and List Format page 6 13 OFF not printed ON printed The default setting is OFF Selection of Horizontal or Vertical Printing LOG FORMAT In logging mode select either horizontal or vertical printing of the channel number TAG For examples of printing see Section 2 3 Recording Functions page 2 8 HORIZON printed horizontally VERTICAL printed vertically The default setting is HORIZON dN Las sbumes oiseg IM DR231 01E 10 5 10 2 Setting Recording Format Selection of Recording Interval in Digital Printing Logging Mode LOG INTERVAL Select recording of the channel number TAG and measured values whether at one interval or at a selected interval for each channel from the 6 timers For the setting of the timer see Section 6 1 Setting the Recording Mode Engineering Unit Recording Channel and Recording Interval page 6 3 and for the selection of the timer for each channel see Section 6 4 Setting
316. tart printing the set up list After printing starts the operation display mode appears During list printing the S U LIST STOP menu appears During list printing if the FUNC3 menu is displayed to select the S U LIST STOP and the ENTER key is then pressed the list printing stops After the list print terminates or stops the display returns to the S U LIST START If the setup list printing starts analog trend recording will stop After the printing is completed analog trend recording resumes IM DR231 01E 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches Relevant Keys mee DS recens ESC 001 01 1 OFF mm sepe GO Gee INS DEL CHART I OFF2 OFF 3 OFF 4 OFF a cuart ser enter mrunc 2 OPE a Press the ALARM key to enter the ALARM menu Select set using the O Q keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu 001 01 1 0FF Select Channel No 4 001 01 1 OFF gt Select Channel No Lower menu 001 01 1 OFF 001 01 1 OFF 1234 4 SET OK ESC ao L 001
317. tarting operation Never install the instrument in any of the following locations in direct sunlight or near heat sources where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gases are present near strong magnetic field sources near high voltage equipment or power lines where the level of mechanical vibrations is high inanunstable place DR130 DR231 Can be used on a desk top installed on the floor or rack mounted Always install the instrument vertically Desk top or floor installation Install the instrument vertically on a horizontal flat floor as shown below Rack mounting The following fitting can be supplied for rack mounting Name Model Description Rack mount fitting DV400 013 Conforming to ANSI EIA for DR231 Rack mount fitting DV400 015 Conforming to ANSI EIA for DR130 External dimensions and rack mounting dimensions for the DR130 and DR231 are shown below To install the rack mount fitting on the instrument remove the screws at the right and left forward of the instrument and use the mounting screws attached to the rack mount fitting Be careful that right and left screws have different lengths The screw at the right when facing the front of the instrument is M4 of 20 mm long and the left screw is M4 of 16 mm long Appropriate tightening torque is 1 4 to 1 5 N m 14 to 15 kgf cm If another instrument is to be mounted under this instrument in an ANSI EIA rack re
318. ter l LIST PR LIST FMT MESSAGE HEADER TITLET 27 Ce RECORD ESC refer CO Ce INS DEL KEYLOGI charr ser enter Operating Procedure Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu Select set using the O Q keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting menu sET p 3 Lower menu C32 MSGOlz MESSAGE No 02 4 C O MSG02 196 amp 4 0123456789 ABC KLT ENTER ENTER gt MSGO2 IBID eE No 20 4 MSG20 PET L amp 0123456789 ABC KLT ENTER ENTER C Msaoo MESSAGE No COPY 4 COPY MSG01 TO MSG01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 4 COPY MSG01 TO MSG02 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 To the next page 11 12 18 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 49 8 0123456789 ABC KLT ENTER ENTER MESSAGE ENTER MESSAGE No 04 ENTER Gmpamecred mt MSG01 ext E ENTER SET OK ESC IM DR231 01E 6 7 Entering Messages Headers and Title From the
319. the O Q keys Main menu Select set Cerea ZS recens ESC Func PRINT CGD Feen INS DEL ser To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting 001 01 VOLT 2VC5 Select Channel Select Channel No Lower menu 4 n 001 01 VOLT 2V C 001 01 VOLT 2V 4 001 01 VOLT 2V ENTER 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V 50V 4 SPAN 2 0000 2 0000V ENTER Span limit 2 0000 2 0000V 4 GET OK ESC gt 001 01 SKIP ENTER 4 A ESC gt 001 01 TC R D 4 001 01 TC R ENTER RSBKEJTNWLUKP 4 ____0 0 1760 0 ENTER Span limit 0 0 1760 0 C 4 ESC 001 01 RTD PT1 4 001 01 RTD PT1 ENTER PT1 PT2 JPT1 JPT2 PT50 NI1 NI2 CU2 PT1S PT2S JPT1S av JPT2S J263B 4 SPAN _200 0 _ _600 0 ENTER gt Span limit 200 0 600 0 C 4 ESC To the next page IM DR231 01E Buieos seaulq ueds 1ndu ay 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span Explanation From the previou
320. the key down for approximately five seconds Using y select and or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure press the MODE ESC key This returns to the first item of the menu Note however that your new settings and selections are canceled Reaching the step showing the message REPORT SET or REPORT CH SET confirms the latest settings selections Sending the Instantaneous Value and Average to a Report Output Main menu item SET UP ___ EE OQ Submenu items REPORT ENTER MODE SET ENTER SET CH_SET PRINT 4 HOURLY REPORT 0FF ENTER OFF ON 4 c K amp 2 DAILY REPORT ON1 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 4 MONTHLY REPORT ON1 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 START TIME 01 00 00 ENTER 4 ow REPORT SET configuration complete ESC gt MODE CH_SET ENTER SET CH_SET PRINT REPORT CH R01 ENTER R01 R02 R03 R04 ROS R07 R09 R10T 4 RO1 ON 001 OFF ON 4 RO1 ON 001 ENTER i CALC MODE AVE ENTER INST AVE SUM 4 REPORT CH SET contiguration complete ESC END ENTER SETUP ABORT ESC gt ABORT STORE Completes the configuration of the SETUP menu IM DR231 01E 10 27 dN Las s
321. the screws which fasten the GP IB cable connector f more than one equipment is connected the same addresses cannot be assigned to different equipment Use only cables of 2 m or less to interconnect each equipment How to Assign an Address The address can be assigned easily by turning the rotary dipswitch as shown in the figure below Any address can be set from 0 to 15 the characters A to F on the dipswitch correspond to the address 10 to 15 respectively IM DR231 01E 3 11 3 4 Connecting the Interface Cables RS 232 C Communication Settings Communication parameters are set using the three switches located on the RS 232 C modules El El E 6289 4 NEN Switch 1 Pd Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 1 and No 4 of switch 2 ON OFF L Data length Baud rate ON OFF zr LT L Not used Stop bit Parity ON OFF I L Not used Handshake format Baudrate dipswitch No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Switch 2 150 OFF OFF OFF OFF 300 OFF OFF ON OFF 600 OFF ON OFF OFF 1200 OFF ON ON OFF 2400 ON OFF OFF OFF 4800 ON OFF ON OFF 9600 ON ON OFF OFF c initial value 19200 ON ON ON OFF 38400 OFF OFF OFF ON Data length dipswitch No 4 7 bits OFF 8 bits ON initial value Switch 2 Pari
322. tic fields of 400 A m within 0 1 of rdg 10 digits Except for power monitor module within 15 of range Signal source resistance variation with respect to signal source resistance 1 kQ change 1 voltage 2 V range or below within 10uUV 6 V range or above within 0 196 of rdg 2 thermocouple within X104 V however it must be within 1001 V when burnout is specified 3 RTD Variation with respect to change of 100 per wire when all wires have the same resistance value Indication within 0 1 of rdg 1 digit Variation in indication with respect to a difference of 40mQ in the resistance between conductors max difference between 3 wires approx 0 1 C Mounting position Variation when the unit is mounted horizontally on a panel within 0 1 of rdg 1 digit Vibration Variation when sinusoidal vibration of acceleration 0 2m s is applied for two hours in each of the 3 axial directions over a frequency range of 10 to 60Hz within 0 1 of rdg 1 digit Transportation and Storage Conditions These refer to the environmental conditions existing during transportation and storage from the time of shipment from the factory until commencement of use and also during transportation and storage in the case of a temporary period of non use If the environmental conditions are specified within the specified range the unit will not incur permanent damage and can be returned to a normal working condition although re adjustment may be require
323. ting the chart speed page 6 4 C O ZONE Setting recording zones page 6 6 C A PARTIAL Setting partially expanded recording page 6 6 C CO TAG Setting tags page 6 8 C CO DIGITAL Setting digital printout page 6 8 C CO MANUAL PR Setting manual printout page 6 8 CY CO ALARM PR Setting alarm printout page 6 10 c OC SCALE PR Setting scale printout page 6 12 C Q LIST PR Setting list printout page 6 12 C CO LIST FMT setting list format page 6 12 C CO MESSAG E Entering messages page 6 14 c CO HEADER Entering headers page 6 14 C Q TITLE Entering title page 6 14 CY ke MATCH TIME setting match time page 6 16 C ke MOVE AVE Setting moving average page 6 16 CY CO INTERPOL Setting interpolation page 6 16 CY Q GROUP Setting groups page 6 16 X3QNI IM DR231 01E Index 1 Main Menu FUNC menu ALARM Alarm acknowledgment page 9 14 c CO ALARM Alarm reset page 9 14 C O NIT BRANCE Executing initial balancing page5 10 C O TIMER RESET gt Timer reset page 9 14 c CO MATH START starting computation page 12 8 al Re starting computation after MATH CLR START clearing computed data page VO is MATH STOP gt Stopping computation page 12 8 O MATH Clearing incomplete measurement status indication page 12 8 cy CA REPORT STARTO Starting report making page 10 32 O C REPORT STOP gt Stopping report making page
324. tion 6 5 Setting the Alarm Printout on page 6 10 The alarms are printed after making this setting Alarm reset This function is selected from the FUNC menu when the relay hold function see page 10 11 is activated To use the alarm reset function select ALARM RST then press the ENTER key to use the alarm reset function For details on the alarm reset see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 16 IM DR231 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Relevant Keys SET LOGIC RECORD ALARM gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT TREND TIMER LOGIC COPY Operating Procedure Main menu sET L 1 Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the O Q keys Co WESS recens Func COD Feen INS DEL ser enter mrFunc2 To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Selection of the logic box and event NONE Lower menu LOGIC ENTER LOGIC BOX NO 01 01 30 i EVT NONE To the next page ENTER ENTER GET From the following page IM DR231 01E
325. tion from the hold point after the hold is released Number of channels for computing Number of channels that can be allocated for computational purposes 30ch maximum Computation interval Every measurement interval except when the computation becomes too difficult to be processed every measured interval in which case an alarm is generated Significant digits during computation 10308 Significant digits of the computed result 9 999 999 to 4 99 999 999 Decimal point can be set to have 1 to 4 digits on the right of the decimal point Input from communication interface Digital value ASCII numerical array input from the communication interface can be handled as computational data Computation start stop Can be controlled by communication commands M FUNC key operation and event action function such as FUNC key operation remote control signal timespecified and alarm status Other functions included in the math function Remote RJC Input type Thermocouple TC Accuracy Twice the measurement accuracy of the standard thermocouple input temperature difference between the terminal of the remote terminal section and thermocouple section for measuring the remote terminal temperature Thermocouple burnout not selectable 14 10 IM DR231 01E 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S3 Communication Function Communication interface is possible by GP IB RS 232 C RS 422 A or RS 485 Report Function feature of the s
326. tion function Normal recording Trend recording on alarm occurrence trigger level Group trend recording Auxiliary printing functions During analog trend recording and logging setting information and comments will be printed Chart speed mm hour x trend recording interval must not exceed 3000 Printout items Engineering unit channel number TAG alarm scale title message Event Action function Recording can be started or the chart speed changed by alarm output status remote control signal chart end signal timer or key operation Relation between the chart speed and recording interval analog trend mode however chart speed mm hour x trend recording interval must not exceed 3000 Channel No Alarm scale hart speed Digital print out 2 TAG a to 9mm h Record enabled Record disabled Record enabled 10 to 1500mm h Record enabled Record enabled Record enabled IM DR231 01E suoneoyi2ods 14 1 Specifications of DR130 DR231 DR241 Style S3 Display Alarms Recording interval for digital printout and chart speed When the recording interval is SINGLE however chart speed mm hour x trend recording interval must not exceed 3000 Unit hour Chart speed Number of digital print rows 1row 2 row 3row 4 row 10 to 24mm h 12 6 4 3 25 to 49mm h 4 2 2 50 to 99mm h 2 1 1 1 100 to 1500mm h 1 1 1 1 Three and four row digital pri
327. tions are configured with the event action function Trigger condition when saving the measured computed values Event action function such as key operation remote control signal alarm status and chartend Trigger condition when loading the measured computed values from buffe memory Event action function such as key operation remote control signal and alarm status Pretrigger 0 to 100 can be specified in 10 intervals Filename when saving data 8 ASCII characters input However when saving the measured computed values using trigger repeat 5 ASCII characters input last 3 letters are set automatically from 001 to 208 Optional Math Function Computation types Types Four arithmetical operations SQR square root ABS absolute value LOG common logarithm LN natural logarithm EXP exponent statistical computation logical computation AND OR NOT and XOR relational computation exponentiation previously measured value reference hold and reset Statistical computation CLOG Computation process of simultaneously measured values within a group total maximum minimum average and maximum minimum TLOG Computation process of a specific channel over time axis total maximum minimum average and maximum minimum Statistical computation interval Set by the event action function Hold Temporary suspending of computation and temporary hold of the computed result During statistical computation resume the computa
328. to save the data item 11 20 IM DR231 01E 11 7 Deleting a Data File Relevant Keys Deleting a data file for the SET mode Operating Procedure Main menu Lose mone C ESC RECORD SET MEMORY a GO C INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TRI ETT rer MEME n cuart ser enter runc Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the amp y amp keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting SET i OQ ENTER MEMORY DELETE ENTER CH SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 1 lt 2 DELETE TYPE DATA ENTER DATA PANEL 4 DELETE FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 DELETE OK End of setting ESC 1 FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY DELETE ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 DELETE FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 DELETE OK End of setting ESC gt Deleting a data file for the SETUP mode A data file for the SETUP mode can be deleted in the same way as a data file for the SET mode is deleted
329. to 20 ms 50 Hz If you are using the instrument on a 60 Hz power supply set the A D integration time to 16 7 ms 60Hz A filter can be set ON OFF to reduce normal mode noise Effects on normal mode noise are as follows depending on the filter being ON OFF theoretical values Frequency 1Hz 10Hz 50Hz100Hz 300Hz 0dB ee x 20dB Slope 20dB dec 6 40dB Filter ON Filter OFF 60dB g 4 80dB Slope 60dB dec 100dB IM DR231 01E 2 3 Recording Functions Chart Speed Recording Mode The speed at which the chart moves when performing trend recording can be selected from any value between 1 to 1500mm h Two types of chart speeds can be set When you are not using the Event Action function which will be described later on in this manual chart speed 1 will be valid When the Event Action function is being used you can select whether chart speed 1 will change to speed 2 according to the event status Two types of recording modes are available analog trend and logging mode The default setting is analog trend mode Analog Trend Mode refer to the next page for a recording example Trend Recording Dot recording The recording principle is that according to measurement data and recording conditions the correct position on the chart will be decided and on that position the dot will be printed Trend recording conditions consist of the following chart speed channels to be r
330. ty dipswitch No 1 No 2 NONE OFF OFF ODD OFF ON EVEN ON OFF initial value Stop bit dipswitch No 3 1 OFF lt initial value 2 ON Switch 3 Handshake format dipswitch No 1 No 2 No 3 no handshake OFF OFF OFF lt initial value XON DTR OFF OFF ON XON RTS OFF ON OFF CTS DTR OFF ON ON CTS RTS ON OFF OFF When the baud rate is set to 38400 there is no handshake 3 12 IM DR231 01E 3 4 Connecting the Interface Cables Connecting the RS 232 C Cable For details on connecting the RS 232 C connector of the RS 232 C communication interface module to a personal computer see IM DR231 11E DR231 DR232 DR241 DR242 Communication Interface User s Manual CAUTION When dis connecting the RS 232 C cable turn OFF the power of both the personal computer and the instrument If the power is not turned OFF malfunctions may occur and the internal circuitry may be damaged Note To reduce noise use ferrite cores e g ZCAT 3035 1330 from TDK for the interface cable as shown below Two ferrite cores should be installed near both ends of the interface cable If the noise is particularly bad use several ferrite cores in series Use a shielded cable for the interface cable and make a one point grounding at the ground terminal of this instrument together with the functional ground terminal of the personal computer Function Function grounding grounding Personal terminal Personal terminal comp
331. uffix code M3 available with models with style number 5 or higher Report Channels 60 channels from R01 to R60 DR231 DR232 30 channels from R01 to R30 DR130 Types of Reports Hourly report Hourly every hour statistical information Daily report Statistical information for a day starting at a specified time Monthly report Statistical information for a month starting at a specified date and time These types of report making can be turned on or off separately Output of the Results of Computing for Reports The DR recorder prints the results on a recording chart or send them to a report output Output Formats of the Results of Computing for Reports Hourly report Standard format Daily report Standard format or enhanced format Standard format results of computing daily reports Enhanced format results of computing daily reports plus results of computing hourly reports Monthly report Standard format or enhanced format Standard format results of computing monthly reports Enhanced format results of computing monthly reports plus results of computing daily reports The enhanced format applies to either daily reports or monthly reports only Either the average instantaneous value or sum in each computing of a report Types of Computing for Reports AVE Average maximum and minimum over a preset interval INST Instantaneous value at the time of report making SUM Sum and cumulative sum over a preset interval Sum Cumulative S
332. ule clamp terminal 20 channel universal input module clamp terminal 30 channel universal input module clamp terminal 10 channel DCV TC DI input module screw terminal 20 channel DCV TC DI input module screw terminal 30 channel DCV TC DI input module screw terminal 10 channel DCV TC DI input module clamp terminal 20 channel DCV TC DI input module clamp terminal 30 channel DCV TC DI input module clamp terminal Power monitor module single phase use Power monitor module three phase use Optional Modules Check that the model code given on the name plate is according to your order Note that the modules at the rear of the main unit are fixed and cannot be moved Model Codes Description DI DO module screw terminal Alarm module 10 make contacts screw terminal GP IB module RS 232 C module D sub terminal RS 422 A RS 485 module 4 IM DR231 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories Name Part No Q ty Presence Absence DR130 DR231 DR241 Description 1 Power cord 2 Fuse 3 DC power terminal connector 4 Ribbon cassette 5 Chart paper 6 Mounting brackets 7 User s Manual 8 Data acquisition software DAQ32 see page 3 1 A1350EF 1 A1354EF 1 A1105JC 1 B9627AZ 1 B9627AY 1 B9855AY 1 B9900CW 1x2 IMDR231 01E 1 IMDR231 11E 1 IMDP12013 61E DP120 13 1 v v v v A SS lt lt gt lt lt Timelag 2
333. ult becomes OVER or OVER Computation channel numbers Computation channel numbers less than the current computation channel number can be used as variables within the computing equation Example A02 001 A01 lt Computation channel numbers greater than or equal to A03 can not be used in this computation Statistical operators TLOG or CLOG can only be used once in 1 computing equation Computation channel A total of 30 computation channels are available A01 to A30 Constant A total of 30 constants can be set K01 to K30 Flag F01 to F16 Flags can be set in computing equations as constants 1 or 0 Flags are normally 0 but it is set to 1 when a certain event occurs according to the event action function For example if the computing equation is set to NOTFO0I TLOG SUM 001 and FLAG F01 is set as an edge action of an event action F01 becomes 1 when the event occurs This causes NOTFO1 to become 0 and the SUM of channel 001 to become 0 Computation range If the result exceeds 102 during computation an overflow will occur Data applicable for computation The following data is used for computation Measured data Specified by channel No DR130 001 to 020 DR231 241 001 to 030 Computed data Specified by computation channel No A01 to A30 Constant Value specified for K01 to K30 e Group data Measured data of channels belonging to a group Specified by group No G01 to G07 This is applicable only
334. um Hourly report Hourly sum Sum over 24 hours resets at the time to make up a daily report Daily report Daily sum Sum over a month resets at the time to make up a monthly report Monthly report Monthly sum Not applicable Unit Conversion SUM only When inputs over a unit of time are integrated the unit conversion compensates for any discrepancy in the unit of value arising between computed values depending on the measurement interval applied INTVL no conversion results of computing sec converted to the sum of input in seconds results of computing x measurement interval min converted to the sum of input in minutes results of computing x measurement interval 60 hour converted to the sum of input in hours results of computing x measurement interval 3600 day converted to the sum of input in days results of computing x measurement interval 86400 Time to Make Report Reference dates 1st to 28th days of a month Reference times 00 00 to 23 00 Output Ranges of the Results of Computing for Reports AVE 9999999 to 99999999 with the position of the decimal point dependent on the measurement and computing channels assigned as report channels INST 9999999 to 99999999 with the position of the decimal point dependent on the measurement and computing channels assigned as report channels SUM seven digits for the mantissa and two digits for the exponent Processing of Faulty Data AVE Faulty data
335. ups of combinations Select from either of the two groups of combinations 5 8 IM DR231 01E 5 3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel Setting the Recording Span SPAN Set the left and right spans within the limits of an input range In the SPAN menu item the left hand value is the left span and the right hand value the right span Set the recording span within the measuring range The measurable limits vary depending on the measuring range you select as shown below 25V 0 5A 25V 5A 250V 0 5A 250V 5A Effective voltage 0 00 to 25 00V rms 0 00 to 25 00V rms 0 0 to 250 0V rms 0 0 to 250 0V rms Vi i 1 2 3 13 0 Effective current 0 0000 to 0 5000A rms 0 000 to 5 000A rms 0 0000 to 0 5000A rms 0 000 to 5 000A rms Ii 1 1 2 3 13 0 Active power P1 P2 P3 12 50 to 12 50W 125 0 to 125 0W 125 0 to 125 0W 1250 to 1250W Active power P13 25 00 to 25 00W 250 0 to 250 0W 250 0 to 250 0W 2500 to 2500W Active power PO 37 50 to 37 50W 375 0 to 375 0W 375 0 to 375 0W 3750 to 3750W Apparent power 0 00 to 12 50VA 0 0 to 125 0VA 0 0 to 125 0VA 0 to 1250VA VALVA2 VA3 Apparent power 0 00 to 25 00VA 0 0 to 250 0VA 0 0 to 250 0VA 0 to 2500VA VA13 Apparent power 0 00 to 37 50VA 0 0 to 375 0VA 0 0 to 375 0VA 0 to 3750VA VAO Reactive power Varl Var2 Var3 0 00 to 12
336. urce power meer High frequency noise grounding inverter etc The instrument _ reverse flow The power meter leaks the high frequency noise component to the ground and that noise flows back to the The instrument side z Noise Noise source AC power meter blocking of reverse flow X v inverter etc The instrument 3 Ferrite beads Rm high impedance at high frequency Reverse flow of high frequency to the The instrument is thus suppressed Input noise rejection If input noise cannot be rejected by means of one point grounding or 100 ms integration insert capacitor or ferrite beads as they are effective in rejecting pulse noise Step 1 Connect a capacitor between the L input and ground OH lt instrument Use a capacitor from a hundred T oL to thousands of pF which can D C withstand high voltages and must be grounded Step 2 Rejection of pulse noise when grounding is impossible 3 cL re instrument USe a capacitor from a hundred 0 1 oL to thousands of pF TL Ferrite beads T 1 Insert the ferrite beads as necessary IM DR231 01E 3 34 3 8 Countering Noise Relay noise suppression DC relay To prevent noise and protect the contact connect the diode to the relay coil terminal directly Dc external 4 Cont
337. urning the power check that each unit is properly mounted and the power cable is correctly connected If nothing appears on the display when the power switch is turned on turn off the power and check the following s the power cable properly connected s the supply voltage within the range noted on the previous page s the power fuse blown see page 13 2 If the problem still cannot be fixed there may be an equipment problem please contact your nearest sales representative Addresses may be found or the back cover of this manual The device takes about 30 minutes to warm up The service life of the lithium battery used to save the settings is about 10 years at an ambient temperature of 23 C If the settings cannot be held because the lithium battery has run down please contact your nearest sales representative Addresses may be found or the back cover of this manual Turning AC Power ON OFF When using the AC power supply on the DR130 DR231 with P6 option turn on the AC power switch on the upper right section of the rear panel Pressing turns the power on Pressing O turns the power off To stop using the AC power supply turn off the AC power switch DR231 AC Power AG eu AC Power switch UNUS BS switch w FT ele eye o e
338. uter DR130 computer DR231 DR241 ss Ferrite core JL Ferrite core t f RS 422 A RS 485 ON swi OFF RS422 485 1 L Data length SSS Baud rate D et ON sw2 OFF La L four wire two wire Stop bit Parity ON sw3 OFF L Address upper Minimum response time CECE sw4 OFF Address lower Baud rate No 1 to 3 of SW1 Baud rate No 1 No 2 No 3 300 OFF OFF ON 600 OFF ON OFF 1200 OFF ON ON 2400 ON OFF OFF 4800 ON OFF ON 9600 ON ON OFF Default Setting 19200 ON ON ON 38400 OFF OFF OFF Data length No 4 of SW1 Data length No 4 7 OFF 8 ON lt Default Setting IM DR231 01E 3 13 pue uonejeisu 3 4 Connecting the Interface Cables Parity No 1 to 2 of SW2 Parity No 1 No 2 None OFF OFF ODD OFF ON EVEN ON OFF Default Setting Stop bit No 3 of SW2 Stop bit No 3 1 OFF Default Setting 2 ON Switch between four wire two wire systems No 4 of SW2 four wire two wire No 4 four wire OFF Default Setting two wire ON Minimum response time No 1 to 3 of SW3 Minimum response time No 1 No 2 No 3 Oms OFF OF
339. ution As described below under the following operating conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C ambient humidiy 55 10 RH power supply voltage 90 to 250 VAC AC power supply or 10 to 32 VDC DC power supply 90 to 132 80 to 250 VAC when P6 option is specified power supply frequency 50 60Hz within 1 warm up time 30 minutes or more vibrations and others not affecting instrument operation However RTD input is not available with the DCV TC DI input module Measured Data Item Measuring Accuracy Resolution Effective voltage 0 596 of SPAN 0 01 Vrms for 25 V range 0 1 Vrms for 250 V range Effective current 0 5 of SPAN 0 0001 Arms for 0 5 A range 0 001 Arms for 5 A range Active power 1 of SPAN 0 2 5 of SPAN 0 lt l Ix 30 5 of SPAN 30 lt l o Ix 80 0 01 W for 12 5 W 25 W and 37 5 W spans 0 1 W for 125 W 250 W and 375 W spans 1 W for 1 250 W 2 500 W and 3 750 W spans Apparent power 1 of SPAN 0 lt 1 Ix 80 0 01 VA for 12 5 VA 25 V A and 37 5 V A spans 0 1 VA for 125 VA 250 VA and 375 VA spans 1 VA for 1 250 VA 2 500 VA and 3 750 V A spans Reactive power 5 of SPAN 0 lt 1 1 lt 60 2 5 of SPAN 60 lt 1 Ix 80 0 01 Var for 12 5 Var 25 Var and 37 5 Var spans 0 1 Var for 125 Var 250 Var and 375 Var spans Var for 1 250 Var 2 500 Var and 3 750 Var spans Frequency 0 1Hz 0
340. values on the chart is called recording zone For each channel you can set between what locations on the chart the measurement values will be recorded It is possible to assign zones so that the analog trend recordings of each individual channel will not overlap This setting is only valid for trend recordings in the analog trend mode The default setting is the full recording width of 150mm for the DR130 or 250mmfor the DR231 DR241 The left and right boundary of the recording zone left position and right position respectively correspond to respectively the left and right span of the recording span Trefid of channel 1 Tr nd of channel 2 Tr nd of channel 3 gt lt gt lt gt A Zone 1 A Zone 2 Zone 3 Left position of zone 1 Right position of zone 1 left span of ch1 right span of ch1 Scale values are used to mark the divisions of zones and three different scale format can be selected 2 10 IM DR231 01E 2 3 Recording Functions Partially Expanded Recording When carrying out trend recording partially expanded recording enables you to compress a part of the recording span in order to examine the expanded other part of the span in more detail The left boundary of the recording span being 0 and the right boundary of the recording span being 100 a segment of the recording span can be compressed The following example shows a situation where 25 of the recording span has been
341. vent as an edge action to start stop report making Level action You can use remote alarm relay and end of chart signals as events to start stop report making Report making starts at the same time that any of these events occur Report making stops when the event clears Note f you start report making all reports created up to that point are reset When report making is in progress you cannot make changes to measurement channels measuring ranges or dates and times nor can you copy information on the ranges f any computed data are included in your report making let computing start first and then get report making started If you fail to enable computing the data in your reports will become meaningless because no change takes place on the computed data f you want the start of computing and report making enabled at the same time use the event action functions to assign both of these instructions to the same event as actions Time Relationship Between the Settings of the REPORT START STOP Menu Items and Report Making The following figure shows the time relationship between the settings of the REPORT START STOP menu items and report making Report n Report 3 river 2 Report 2 pE ae l A et Report 1 ah A ac 402 e P Start of report Stop of report making making A A A a Time to make report Time to make report Time to make report A denotes the point in time a report is created Data items include
342. ver if the TAG setting includes all spaces vacant the channel is printed or displayed regardless of selection The default setting is CHANNEL For the TAG setting see Section 6 4 Setting Tag Digital Printout and Manual Printout Selection of Number of TAG Printing Characters TAG PRINT LEN Select 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 or 16 The default setting is 7 If the number of printing characters is less than the set TAG set in sect 6 4 Only the number selected here will be printed For the number of characters when displaying see chapter 4 Selection of Dot printing Recording System TREND MODE Select it from the following systems The default setting is NORMAL To practically record it the RECORD must be turned on Channels to be recorded are those selected to be ON in Setting the Channels to be Recorded Trend Recording on page 6 2 NORMAL Records all channels to be recorded ALARMI Records only those channels in which alarms are generated Continues recording even if the alarm is reset ALARM2 Records only the channels in which alarms are generated Stops recording when the alarm is reset GROUP Records the channels which are set into a group see page 6 16 Recording can be done only if GR TREND is set in the event action function 10 4 IM DR231 01E 10 2 Setting Recording Format Selection of Printing When Chart Speed Is Changed SPEED CHANGE PR When the chart speed
343. ver protecting the power terminals 3 Connect the power supply wires and the function ground wire to the power terminals 4 Replace the cover Rated supply voltage 12 to 28 V DC operating supply voltage 10 to 32 V DC Power consumption About 80 VA max Power terminals Function ground wire Power supply wires DR130 DR231 when using the DC power supply connector Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument Connect the power wires after checking that the power is turned off to prevent electric shock To prevent fire use wires with cross sectional area of 0 3 mm 22AWG or more 1 Check that the power switch is turned off 2 Connect the power supply wires and the DC power supply connector standard accessories part number A 1105JC For the power supply wires use wires 0 3 mm AWG22 thick Soldering 0 V DC 10 to 32 V DC Rated supply voltage 12 to 28 V DC operating supply voltage 10 to 32 V AC Power consumption About 80 VA max DR130 DR231 DC power terminal DC power terminal DC power connector IM DR231 01E 3 23 pue uonejeisu 3 6 Connecting the Power Cable and Turning the Power ON OFF Turning Power ON OFF The power switch is a push button the power is turned on when pressed once and turned off when pressed again DR130 DR231 DR241 Power switch Power switch E N M Ss Before t
344. ving set up data for the SET mode Relevant Keys SET MEMORY Select Setting Parameter CHART SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the amp y amp keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu wr ESC C secos reper CO Ge INS DEL nee acani runc cuart ser enter m Func 2 SET i pa MEMORY ENTER gt MEMORY SAVE ENTER CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE INFO INIT 4 SAVE file ENTER AAA BBB CCC S O 4 SAVE FILE AAA ENTER 4 Saving 4 SAVE OK End of saving ESC Y FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY SAVE ENTER SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 SAVE file ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 SAVE FILE AAA ENTER 4 Saving 4 SAVE OK End of saving ESC IM DR231 01E 11 11 ejeg dn jegs pue payndwog peanseejy Buipeeg Dui es 11 3 Saving Set up Data Saving set up data for the SETUP mode Relevant Keys A SETUP FLOPPY a mz I
345. w mark on the Sub display leftward 2 Select AUT using the MODE key Sub display 1 004 0 0926V 005 0 0824V 4 UT AUTO Mode for Sub display 2 1 Select sub display 2 using the DISP key Direct the arrow mark on the Sub display downward 2 Select AUT using the MODE key Sub display 1 005 0 8210V 006 0 0095V VAUT IM DR231 01E 4 1 Aejdsig 101100Jy 34 6umes B 4 1 Using the Auto mode Explanation AUTO Mode for the Main Display Channel No The first seven characters are used The first three characters are used to display the channel number The first character always displays 0 A will be displayed in the case of optional computation channels If you selected TAG at the channel No TAG setting in the set up mode refer to 10 2 on page 10 4 the assigned tag will appear for each channel The first 7 characters of the TAG setting will be displayed f the TAG setting consists of only spaces the channel number will be displayed instead If the first character of the TAG setting is a space the 2nd to 8th character will be displayed Difference between Channels delta One character is used to let you know that difference between channels delta is displayed However it will not be displayed in the case of optional computation channels Only if you selected the difference between channels delta as the input type will be displaye
346. wer fuse A See page 13 2 Power connector See page 3 21 Function grounding terminal TT 2 MOI S Terminals DC power supply model DC Power fuse See page 13 3 DC Power connector See page 3 23 AC Power connector See page 3 21 AC Power fuze A See page 13 2 AC Power switch See page 3 24 Function grounding terminal TOMS TOO LT33 oso Terminals IM DR231 01E 1 3 2 1 Display Functions The inter active front panel display consists of three rows The first row is the main display and the second and third row are sub display 1 and 2 respectively Monitor Mode and Status Display Monitor Mode Auto Mode This mode can be set for the main display sub display 1 and sub display 2 Measurement values of all channels will be consecutively displayed with update interval Manual Mode This mode can be set for the main display sub display 1 and sub display 2 Measurement suonounJ values of a single channel will be displayed The display update interval is the same as the measurement interval refer to page 2 4 Page Mod
347. ximum noise between channels 150VAC rms 50 60Hz Measurement range accuracy and resolution As described below under the following operating conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C ambient humidiy 55 10 RH power supply voltage 90 to 250 VAC AC power supply or 10 to 32 VDC DC power supply 90 to 132 80 to 250 VAC when P6 option is specified power supply frequency 50 60Hz within 196 warm up time 30 minutes or more vibrations and others not affecting instrument operation However RTD input is not available with the DCV TC DI input module Measurement digital display Maximum Input Type Measurement range Measurement accuracy resolution DC Voltage 20mV 20 000 to 20 000mV 0 05 of rdg 5digits 60mV 60 00 to 60 00mV 0 05 of rdg 2digits 10uV 200mV 200 00 to 200 00mV__ _ 0 05 of rdg 2digits 10uV 2V 2 0000 to 2 0000V 0 05 of rdg 2digits 100uV 6V 6 000 to 6 000V 0 05 of rdg 2digits 1mV 20V 20 000 to 20 000V 0 05 of rdg 2digits 1mV 50V 50 00 to 50 00V 0 05 of rdg 2digits 10mV TC R 1 0 0 to 1760 0 C 0 05 of rdg 1 C Note that Accuracy However R S 0 to 100 C 3 7 C of reference junction 100 to 300 C 1 5 C compensation is not S 1 0 0 to 1760 0 C B 400 to 600 C 2 C accuracy considered B 1 0 0 to 1820 0
348. y the selected display mode will appear IM DR231 01E Aejdsig spo 101100Jy 34 6umes B 4 6 Using the ALARM STATUS Display Relevant Keys DISP MODE Cox RECORD ESC FUNC PRINT CO FEED INS DEL RANGE ALARM OD M FUNC 1 CHART SET enter mrunc2 Bui ALARM STATUS Display for Sub display 1 1 Select the sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select ALM using the MODE key Sub display 1 001 3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels Sub display 1 011 ALARM STATUS Display for Sub display 2 1 Select the sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select ALM using the MODE key Sub display 1 and 2 001 WALM 001 3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels Sub display 1 and 2 001 WALM 011 Explanation Alarm Status Display The status of
349. yAuoe 3 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event RELAY actions The MATH menu is displayed only with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 and models with the M1 option The MEMRY and FLOPY menus are displayed only with the DR130 1 DR231 1 DR241 1 The REPORT menu is displayed only with M3 option From the previous page EVT RELAY S01 4 EVT RELAY S01 4 ACT EDGE ALARM ACK 4 ACT EDGE ALARM ACK L ACT EDGE ALARM RST I ACT EDGE TIMER RST ACT EDGE RECORD OFF 4 ACT EDGE RECORD OFF OFF ON ACT EDGE MANUAL PR ACT EDGE DIGITAL PR t ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 4 OY ACT EDGE MSG PR 01 CR 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 l ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 1 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 AYP 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START 4 ACT EDGE MATH START START STOP CLEAR RESET ACT EDGE FLAG FO1 4 Ao ACT EDGE FLAG FO1 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 L ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA WR 4 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR DATA WR WR_TRIG RD_TRIG LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD TRG1 evo ACT EDGE FLOPY LD TRG1 TRG1LD TRG2LD TRG3 ACT EDGE REPORT START 4 ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP ACT LEVL RECORD 4 m ACT LEVL RECORD OQ I ACT LEVL SPEED CHG TREND G01 ACT LEVL GR TREND G01

DR130/DR231/DR241 Hybrid Recorder(Stand

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents